6 Slickline Operations

S P E O IDENTIFICATION CODE PAG 2 OF 302
ENI S.p.A.
E&P Division REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
INDEX
1. INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................9
1.1 purpose of the manual ............................................................................................ 9
1.2 implementation ........................................................................................................ 9
1.3 UPDATING, AMENDMENT, CONTROL & DEROGATION ...................................... 9
1.4 Documentation and approval ................................................................................. 10
2. RESPONSIBILITIES AND CREWING ......................................................................11

2.1 Personnel RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................... 11
2.2 Terminology ............................................................................................................. 11
2.2.1 Light Duty Operations............................................................................................... 12
2.2.2 Heavy Duty Operations............................................................................................. 12
3. TOOLSTRING SELECTION .....................................................................................13

3.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 13
3.2 ASSEMBLY SELECTION ......................................................................................... 15
3.2.1 Rope Socket............................................................................................................... 15
3.2.2 Stem............................................................................................................................ 16
3.2.3 Jars ............................................................................................................................. 16
3.2.4 Knuckle Joints........................................................................................................... 20
3.2.5 Types Of Connections .............................................................................................. 21
4. SURFACE EQUIPMENT SELECTION .....................................................................22

4.1 LIFTING EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................. 22
4.1.1 Crane .......................................................................................................................... 22
4.1.2 Lifting Frame.............................................................................................................. 23
4.1.3 Hydraulic Mast........................................................................................................... 23
4.2 ADAPTER FLANGE.................................................................................................. 24
4.3 BOPs ......................................................................................................................... 24
4.4 LUBRICATOR RISER ............................................................................................... 25
4.5 STUFFING BOX ........................................................................................................ 27
4.6 INJECTION NIPPLE.................................................................................................. 28
4.7 SAFETY CHECK UNION .......................................................................................... 29
4.8 SWAB VALVE ........................................................................................................... 30
5. WIRE SELECTION ...................................................................................................31

5.1 wire DIAMETERs ...................................................................................................... 31
5.2 Materials ................................................................................................................... 31
5.3 Associated EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................... 31
5.3.1 Counter Wheel ........................................................................................................... 31
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
5.4 Other Sheaves.......................................................................................................... 32

5.5 COATED WIRE LINE CABLE................................................................................... 33
6. WIRELINE UNIT SELECTION..................................................................................34

6.1 HEAVY DUTY LAND TRUCK ................................................................................... 34
6.1.1 Truck Specification ................................................................................................... 34
6.1.2 Winch.......................................................................................................................... 35
6.1.3 Surface Equipment.................................................................................................... 35
6.2 LIGHT DUTY LAND TRUCK..................................................................................... 36
6.2.1 Truck Specification ................................................................................................... 36
6.2.2 Winch.......................................................................................................................... 36
6.3 HEAVY DUTY OFFSHORE SKID ............................................................................. 37
6.3.1 Skid Unit..................................................................................................................... 37
6.3.2 Winch.......................................................................................................................... 38
6.4 LIGHT DUTY OFFSHORE SKID............................................................................... 39
6.4.1 Skid Unit..................................................................................................................... 39
6.4.2 Winch.......................................................................................................................... 39
7. DOCUMENTATION ..................................................................................................41
7.1 Preliminary Information .......................................................................................... 41
7.2 Wellsite Reports....................................................................................................... 42
7.3 Feed Back Reports .................................................................................................. 42
7.4 Other Reports........................................................................................................... 42
8. WIRELINE RIG-UP/DOWN OPERATIONS ..............................................................43

8.1 Toolstring Weight Determination ........................................................................... 43
8.2 RIG OPERATIONS.................................................................................................... 44
8.2.1 Land ............................................................................................................................ 45
8.2.2 Jack-Up/Fixed Platform/Barge ................................................................................. 51
8.2.3 Drill Ship/Semi-Submersible .................................................................................... 56
8.3 RIGLESS OPERATIONS .......................................................................................... 61
8.3.1 Heavy Duty Land Operation ..................................................................................... 62
8.3.2 Light Duty Land Operation ....................................................................................... 66
8.3.3 Heavy Duty Offshore Operation............................................................................... 70
8.3.4 Light Duty Offshore Operation ................................................................................ 72
9. GENERAL WIRELINE PROCEDURES ....................................................................76

9.1 SUMMARY OF GENERAL OPERATION ................................................................. 76
9.2 TUBING GAUGING ................................................................................................... 77
9.2.1 Gauging During Well Completion............................................................................ 77
9.2.2 Gauging During Production ..................................................................................... 79
9.3 Pressure & Temperature GRADIENT SURVEY...................................................... 81
9.3.1 With Amerada Gauge ................................................................................................ 82
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.3.2 With Memory Gauge.................................................................................................. 85

9.4 BAILING .................................................................................................................... 86
9.4.1 Sample Bailing........................................................................................................... 88
9.4.2 Sand Bailing............................................................................................................... 91
9.4.3 Hydrostatic Bailing.................................................................................................... 93
9.4.4 Drive Down Bailing.................................................................................................... 96
9.5 TUBING PERFORATING .......................................................................................... 97
9.6 SUB SURFACE CONTROLLED SAFETY VALVE OPERATION ............................ 108
9.6.1 Setting ........................................................................................................................ 111
9.6.2 Pulling......................................................................................................................... 113
9.7 SURFACE CONTROLLED SUBSURFACE SAFETY VALVE OPERATION ........... 115
9.7.1 Setting SCSSV ........................................................................................................... 117
9.7.2 Pulling SCSSV ........................................................................................................... 119
9.7.3 Installation During Completion................................................................................ 121
9.8 PLUGS ...................................................................................................................... 124
9.8.1 Setting ........................................................................................................................ 127
9.8.2 Pulling......................................................................................................................... 129
9.9 SLIDING SLEEVE OPERATION............................................................................... 133
9.9.1 Open Up SSD ............................................................................................................. 138
9.9.2 Open Down SSD ........................................................................................................ 144
9.9.2.1 FORMALITY OF EXECUTION .................................................................... 145
9.9.3 Selective Shifting ...................................................................................................... 147
9.9.3.1 FORMALITY OF EXECUTION .................................................................... 148
9.10 PACKER SETTING ................................................................................................... 153
9.10.1 One Trip Check Valve Operation ............................................................................. 154
9.10.2 Two Trip Check Valve Operation ............................................................................. 159
9.11 SCRATCHING ........................................................................................................... 165
9.12 IMPRESSION TAKING ............................................................................................. 168
9.13 HYDRATE REMOVAL .............................................................................................. 171
10. SPECIFIC FLOW CONTROL PROCEDURES .........................................................175

10.1 otis ’W’ Lock Mandrel .............................................................................................. 175
10.1.1 Equipment Required ................................................................................................. 175
10.1.2 Redressing/Preparation............................................................................................ 176
10.1.3 Running Procedure ................................................................................................... 176
10.1.4 Pulling Procedure...................................................................................................... 176
10.2 Otis ‘D’ collar Lock Mandrel.................................................................................... 178
10.2.1 Equipment Required ................................................................................................. 178
10.2.2 Redressing/Preparation............................................................................................ 179
10.3 Otis type ‘s’ & ‘T’ lock mandrel............................................................................... 181
10.3.1 Disassembly Procedure ........................................................................................... 182
10.3.2 Assembly/Preparation .............................................................................................. 183
10.4 Otis type ‘x’ & ’XN’ lock mandrels.......................................................................... 185
10.4.1 ‘X’ and ‘XN’ Disassembly Procedure....................................................................... 185
10.4.2 ‘X’ and ‘XN’ Assembly Procedure............................................................................ 185
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.4.3 ‘X’ Running Procedure.............................................................................................. 186

10.4.4 ‘X’ Pulling Procedure ................................................................................................ 186
10.4.5 ‘XN’ Lock Mandrel ..................................................................................................... 188
10.4.6 ‘XN’ Disassembly Procedure ................................................................................... 188
10.4.7 ‘XN’ Assembly Procedure ........................................................................................ 188
10.4.8 ‘XN’ Running Procedure ........................................................................................... 189
10.4.9 ‘XN’ Pulling Procedure.............................................................................................. 190
10.5 Otis type ‘R’ & ‘RN’ lock mandrels ......................................................................... 190
10.5.1 ‘R’ Disassembly Procedure...................................................................................... 191
10.5.2 ‘R’ Assembly Procedure ........................................................................................... 191
10.5.3 ‘R’ Running Procedure ............................................................................................. 191
10.5.4 ‘R’ Pulling Procedure ................................................................................................ 192
10.5.5 ‘RN’ Lock Mandrel ..................................................................................................... 193
10.5.6 ‘RN’ Disassembly Procedure ................................................................................... 194
10.5.7 ‘RN’ Assembly Procedure ........................................................................................ 194
10.5.8 ‘RN’ Running Procedure........................................................................................... 194
10.5.9 ‘RN’ Pulling Procedure ............................................................................................. 195
10.6 Otis ‘X’ and ‘R’ Plug Chokes................................................................................... 196
10.6.1 ‘PX’ and ‘PR’ Plug Chokes ....................................................................................... 198
10.7 Baker ‘W’ & ‘Z’ Lock mandrels ............................................................................... 200
10.7.1 Running Procedures ................................................................................................. 200
10.7.2 Pulling Procedures.................................................................................................... 200
10.7.3 Baker Bomb Hanger.................................................................................................. 202
10.7.4 Bomb Hanger Running Procedure .......................................................................... 202
10.7.5 Bomb Hanger Pulling Procedure............................................................................. 202
10.8 Camco lock mandrelS ............................................................................................. 203
10.8.1 ‘DB-6’ Lock Mandrel.................................................................................................. 203
10.8.2 ‘Z-6’ Running Tool..................................................................................................... 203
10.8.3 ‘DB-6’ Running Procedure ....................................................................................... 205
10.8.4 'PRS' Pulling Procedure ........................................................................................... 206
10.9 Baker Type ‘B’ and ‘B1’ Lock Mandrel................................................................... 206
10.10 Surface controlled subsurface safety valves........................................................ 208
10.10.1 SCSSV Running Procedure...................................................................................... 208
10.10.2 SCSSV Pulling Procedure ........................................................................................ 208
11. WIRELINE PROBLEMS ...........................................................................................209

11.1 Wire Breaks .............................................................................................................. 209
11.1.1 Wire Breaks At Surface ............................................................................................ 209
11.1.2 Wire Break In The Well.............................................................................................. 210
11.1.3 Wire Stuck In The Stuffing Box................................................................................ 212
11.2 Wireline TOOLstring sticking ................................................................................. 212
11.2.1 During Gauging Operations ..................................................................................... 212
11.2.2 During Pressure and Temperature Surveys ........................................................... 213
11.2.3 During Perforating Operations ................................................................................ 213
11.2.4 During Lock Setting/Retrieving ............................................................................... 213
11.2.5 During Packer Setting............................................................................................... 214
11.2.6 During Scratching Operations ................................................................................. 214
11.2.7 During Hydrate Removal .......................................................................................... 214
11.3 TOOLString PROBLEMS ......................................................................................... 214
11.3.1 Toolstring Breakage.................................................................................................. 215
11.3.2 Toolstring Disconnection ......................................................................................... 215
11.4 Fishing ...................................................................................................................... 215
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11.4.1 Standard Well Site Inventory Of Fishing Tools...................................................... 215

11.4.2 General ....................................................................................................................... 216
11.4.3 Fishing Prevention Measures .................................................................................. 216
11.4.4 Fishing Assembly...................................................................................................... 217
11.5 slickline fishing procedures ................................................................................... 220
11.5.1 Wireline Finder/Retriever.......................................................................................... 220
11.5.2 Running A Wire Finder ............................................................................................. 221
11.5.3 Wireline Grabs ........................................................................................................... 222
11.5.4 Alligator Grab ............................................................................................................ 224
11.5.5 Go Devil ...................................................................................................................... 226
11.5.6 Cutter Bar................................................................................................................... 227
11.5.7 Blind Box.................................................................................................................... 234
11.5.8 Special Tools ............................................................................................................. 235
11.5.9 Centre Spears ............................................................................................................ 237
11.6 lost tool fishing procedure...................................................................................... 241
11.6.1 Impression Block ...................................................................................................... 241
11.6.2 LIB Running Procedure ............................................................................................ 242
11.6.3 Fishing Magnet .......................................................................................................... 243
11.6.4 Type ‘BB’ Pulling tool ............................................................................................... 244
11.6.5 Overshot..................................................................................................................... 245
11.7 Wire recovery ........................................................................................................... 249
11.7.1 Wire Recovery Procedure ........................................................................................ 249
11.8 tool recovery ............................................................................................................ 251
11.8.1 Tool Recovery Procedure......................................................................................... 251
11.9 fishing for KNOWN/unidentified objects ............................................................... 252
12. TOOLSTRING WEIGHT FOR FLOWING WELLS ...................................................253

12.1 PISTON EFFECT ...................................................................................................... 253
12.2 FORCE ON TOOLSTRING SECTION ...................................................................... 258
12.3 FORCE DUE TO FRICTION OF THE TOOLSTRING AT SURFACE....................... 260
13. WIRELINE TESTING ................................................................................................265

13.1 Torsion test .............................................................................................................. 265
13.1.1 Test Objective............................................................................................................ 265
13.1.2 Procedure................................................................................................................... 265
13.1.3 Wireline Test Analysis .............................................................................................. 266
13.1.4 General Guidance Notes .......................................................................................... 269
13.2 eddy current NDT..................................................................................................... 269
14. WIRELINE ANGLE AND STRETCH CORRECTION FACTORS .............................270

14.1 Line Stretch Calculation.......................................................................................... 270
14.2 Calculation of Line Stretch ..................................................................................... 272
15. WIRELINE EQUIPMENT NDT PROCEDURES........................................................274

15.1 Surface equipment Test schedules........................................................................ 274
15.1.1 Stuffing Box ............................................................................................................... 275
15.1.2 Safety Check Union................................................................................................... 275
15.1.3 Injection Nipple.......................................................................................................... 275
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
15.1.4 Lubricator (5,000 through 20,000psi WP) ............................................................... 275

15.1.5 BOPs........................................................................................................................... 276
15.1.6 Adapter Flange .......................................................................................................... 276
15.2 Equipment NDT procedures ................................................................................... 276
15.2.1 Visual Inspection Procedure.................................................................................... 276
15.2.2 Lubricator Component Pressure Test Procedure.................................................. 277
15.2.3 BOP Pressure Test Procedure................................................................................. 277
15.2.4 Magnetic/Ultrasonic Examination Procedure......................................................... 277
15.2.5 Radiographic Examination (X-Ray) Procedure ...................................................... 278
15.2.6 Hardness Test Procedure......................................................................................... 278
15.3 NDT REport Forms .................................................................................................. 278
15.3.1 Visual Inspection Report .......................................................................................... 279
15.3.2 Pressure Test Report ................................................................................................ 280
15.3.3 BOP Pressure Test Report ....................................................................................... 281
15.3.4 Magnetic/Ultrasonic Examination Report ............................................................... 282
15.3.5 Radiographic Examination Report .......................................................................... 283
15.4 FIELD TESTS ............................................................................................................ 284
15.4.2 Pressure Test Procedure.......................................................................................... 284
15.5 Inspection of wireline and cable ............................................................................ 285
16. SAFETY ....................................................................................................................286

16.1 policy ........................................................................................................................ 286
16.2 Safety audit .............................................................................................................. 286
16.3 Risk assessment...................................................................................................... 286
16.4 safety training .......................................................................................................... 286
16.5 Personnel Safety Equipment .................................................................................. 286
16.6 Wireline Unit Safety Equipment.............................................................................. 287
16.7 Operational safety ................................................................................................... 287
16.7.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 287
16.7.2 Site Safety .................................................................................................................. 288
16.8 H2S Procedures........................................................................................................ 288
16.8.1 General H2S Guidelines ............................................................................................ 288
16.8.2 Operational H2S Guidelines...................................................................................... 289
16.8.3 Safety Recommendations ........................................................................................ 289
16.8.4 Emergency Procedure .............................................................................................. 290
16.9 Corrosive and hazardous substances ................................................................... 290
16.10 Reporting of safety incidents ................................................................................. 291
APPENDIX A - REPORT FORMS.....................................................................................292

A.1. Initial Activity Report (ARPO 01) ............................................................................ 292
A.2. Daily Report (ARPO 02) ........................................................................................... 293
A.3. Wireline Report (ARPO 11)...................................................................................... 294
A.4. Pressure And Temperature Survey Report (ARPO 12) ........................................ 295
A.5. Malfunction & Failure Report (FB-1) ...................................................................... 296
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
A.6. Contractor Evaluation (FB-2) .................................................................................. 297
APPENDIX B - ABBREVIATIONS ....................................................................................298
APPENDIX C – BIBLIOGRAPHY .....................................................................................302

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
1. INTRODUCTION
Wireline is a well intervention service for the servicing, maintenance and logging of wells
whether during the drilling/completion or production phases. This is achieved by the
deployment of various service or logging tools on a toolstring attached to the end of a
wireline deployed into the hole. The wireline is stored on a winch and the tools run into,
and pulled out, of the well by manipulation of the winch.
It is the most widely used well intervention method and less costly due to the easier
rigging up and speed of operations in the hole, however as the wireline is relatively small
and has low tensile strength, there is always a risk of becoming stuck or breaking the
wire.
1.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL

The purpose of this manual is to define Company procedures for general wireline
operations.
This manual has been published to assist users in avoiding discrepancies in the
performance of wireline operations, therefore minimising risk to personnel and
installations, resulting in protection of Company from major cost penalties due to
inefficient or dangerous practices.
It is intended to guide users towards using procedures which have been found to provide
the most efficient and cost effective operations.
The policies herein are considered to be the minimum requirement, or standard, but
locally dictated conditions, legislation or third party contractor procedures may demand
more stringent procedures to be adopted.
1.2 IMPLEMENTATION
The guideline and policies specified herein will be applicable to all Company wireline
activities.
All engineers engaged in Company wireline activities are expected to make themselves
familiar with the contents of this manual and be responsible for compliance to its policies
and procedures.
1.3 UPDATING, AMENDMENT, CONTROL & DEROGATION

This manual is a ‘live’ controlled document and, as such, it will only be amended and
improved by the Company, in accordance with the development of its operational
experience. Accordingly, it will be the responsibility of everyone concerned in the use and
application of this manual to review the policies and related procedures on an ongoing
basis.
Derogations from the manual shall be approved solely in writing by the Company Well
Operations Manager after the local Company Manager and the Corporate Drilling &
Production Optimisation Services Standards Department in Eni E&P Division Head Office
have been advised in writing.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
The Corporate Drilling & Production Optimisation Services Standards Department will
consider such approved derogations for future amendments and improvements of the
Corporate manual, when the updating of the document will be advisable.
Feedback for manual amendment is also gained from the return of completed ‘Feedback
and Reporting Forms’ from well operations; refer to Appendix-A page 292.
1.4 DOCUMENTATION AND APPROVAL

The control of every day wireline operations is governed by the policies laid down in this
manual.
Deviations from these policies will only be approved after detailed consideration of the
specific circumstances of the operation which is to be undertaken.
The reasons for deviations to existing policies will be fully documented along with any
implications that the variation will or may have to Company before approval for the
deviations is granted.
Approval for variations to policy will only be granted for specific circumstances and will
not apply to subsequent operations. If it is deemed necessary to formally amend the
policy document, approval for variation to policy must be continued to be obtained on an
individual basis until the amendments have been approved.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
2. RESPONSIBILITIES AND CREWING
This section outlines personnel responsibilities and contains the terminology for the
various operational requirements and the composition of wireline crews for these
requirements.
2.1 PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES

1) The Well Operation Engineering Department is responsible for the compilation and
submission of the Wireline Programme.
2) The Wireline Superintendent is responsible for wellsite operations and wireline crew
organisation as outlined below.
3) The Wireline Supervisor is responsible for the distribution of documentation
necessary to carry out the wireline operations and for the filing in of the ARPO
reports forms.
4) It is responsibility of the Wireline Service Contractor Chief Operator to ensure
surface pressure control equipment and bottom hole equipment is in good operating
condition.
5) The Wireline Superintendent and Company Supervisor are responsible for any
variations to the programme which must be agreed before implemented.
6) The Company Supervisor must approve all actions to be undertaken for the solution
of well problems that may arise during the execution of operations.
2.2 TERMINOLOGY
Wireline operations are split into two distinct categories of operation, ‘Light Duty
Operations’ and ‘Heavy Duty Operations’, according to the following criteria:
• Completion type
• Completion size
• Surface equipment size
• Surface equipment working pressure rating
• Operational complexity.
For the execution of light duty operations, it is recommended that the crew be composed
as listed in section 2.2.1 below, otherwise termed a ‘Light Duty Crew’.
Likewise for heavy duty operations, it is recommended that the crew composition is a
‘Heavy Duty Crew’, Refer to section 2.2.2.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
2.2.1 Light Duty Operations

Light duty wireline operations are defined by:
• Operations performed on completed wells or during the completion
phase, with tubing < 27/8” OD.
• Operations carried out using surface equipment < 21/2” nominal OD.
• Operations carried out using surface equipment < 5,000 psi WP.
• Operations requiring the use of a gin pole for lifting equipment.
For particular operations within the criteria listed above such as fishing, paraffin removal,
etc., the Wireline Superintendent may decide the operations are heavy duty.
2.2.2 Heavy Duty Operations

Heavy duty wireline operations are defined by:
• Operations performed on completed wells or during the completion
phase, with tubing ≥ 3 1/2” OD.
• Operations carried out using 3” nominal OD or larger surface
equipment.
• Operations carried out using 10,000psi WP or higher surface
equipment.
• All operations performed on HP/HT wells.
• Operations requiring the use of crane for lifting equipment.
For particular quick and easy operations such as tubing gauging, bottom hole depth
control etc., the Wireline Superintendent may decide that the operation is light duty.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
3. TOOLSTRING SELECTION
3.1 GENERAL
The ‘Wireline String’ is defined as the down hole equipment connected with the slickline
cable, fit to allow the running and the operations with wire line tools in an oil or gas well,
furnishing the weight and the necessary impact force to operate.
The wire line working string is composed by:
• Rope Socket
• Stems
• Jars
• Knuckle joints.
The service tools (running tools, pulling tools etc.) are not considered integral part of the
wire line working string.
The standard sizes for ‘Wireline String’ are 11/4”, 11/2” and 17/8” OD.
Sizes 1", 111/16” could be used for special operations or conditions, only if planned or
under the Wireline Superintendent’s authorisation.
The matching between sizes of wire line string and completion tubing are shown in the
following ‘A’ - ‘B’ - ‘C’ schedules.
Key
Recommended
Recommended only in particular operating conditions
Not recommended
Tubing Diameter
1.9” 23/8” 27/8” 31/2” 4” 41/2” 5” 7”
Gradient Survey
Flow Control Redress
SCSSV Operation
Gauging
Fishing
Bailing
Tubing Perforating
SSD Operations
Packer Setting
Scratching
Impression Taking
Hydrates Removal
Running in Flowing Well
Table 3-a - Schedule ‘A’ 11/4” OD Wireline Toolstring
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Tubing Diameter
1.9” 23/8” 27/8” 31/2” 4” 41/2” 5” 7”
Gradient Survey
SCSSV Operation
Gauging
Fishing
Bailing
Tubing Perforating
SSD Operations
Packer Setting
Scratching
Impression Taking
Hydrate Removal
Table 3-b - Schedule ‘A’ 11/2” OD Wireline Toolstring
Tubing Diameter
1.9” 23/8” 27/8” 31/2” 4” 41/2” 5” 7”
Gradient Survey
SCSSV Operation
Gauging
Fishing
Bailing
Tubing Perforating
SSD Operations
Packer Setting
Scratching
Impression Taking
Hydrates Removal
Table 3-c - Schedule ‘A’ 17/8” OD Wireline Toolstring
The wireline toolstring diameter and composition to operate in directional wells and in
flowing wells shall be provided by preplanning and agreed upon by the Wireline
Superintendent and Well Operations Engineering Department.
The standard material for the wire line string equipment is AISI 4140.
For H2S service, material for the wireline string components shall be defined in
accordance with the Company Wireline Superintendent.
All the wireline string equipment must be supplied with proper external fishing necks,
suited to be hooked with a standard Halliburton/Otis type or Camco type pulling tool.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
3.2 ASSEMBLY SELECTION
3.2.1 Rope Socket

The ‘Rope socket’ is defined like the upper part of the wireline string connecting with the
wireline cable.
The use of the rope socket ‘Disk-Spring Type’ (Refer Figure 3-2) for light duty operations
is suggested.
The use of the rope socket ‘No-Knot Type’ (Refer to Figure3-1) for heavy duty operations
and with H2S service wireline cable is suggested.
For 0.125" OD wireline cable size, only the use of the ‘No-Knot Type’ rope socket is
allowed.
Figure3-1- Knot Type Rope Socket Figure 3-2 - No-Knot Type Rope Socket
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
3.2.2 Stem
‘Stem’ is defined as the bar used to add weight to the wireline string; they must be
installed immediately under the rope socket, to furnish the necessary weight to allow the
running in hole and the necessary impact force for the jar action.
The lengths of the wireline stem are 1ft, 2ft, 3ft and 5ft length. Wireline stem (Refer to
Figure 3-3) must be obtained by machining out of a single piece of forged steel.
In order to obtain a more compact wireline string, the use of ‘Filled Type Stem’ (Refer to
Figure 3-4) is suggested. The use of ‘Filled Type Stem’ only with a tungsten alloy inside
core is allowed.
The ‘Filled Type Stem’ external barrel must have an equalising hole and the threads
locked by an Allen screw.
Operations in high deviated wells may be performed by using ‘Roller Stem’ provided with
rollers. The friction reduction of the wireline string (Refer to Figure 3-5) is a function of the
number of wheels and size.
The wheels must be made by material compatible with the tubing material.
3.2.3 Jars
‘Jars’ are defined as the tools that, installed below the stems in the wireline string, allow
to operate the down hole tools applying force of impact, toward the top and toward the
bottom.
The link jars and the tubular jars are the type of jars having the capability to operate in
both upward and downward directions.
The use of “Knuckle Jar” is allowed for particular operations on the Wireline Supervisor’s
authorisation.
Link Jar
A link jar with a stroke from 20” to 30” (Refer to Figure 3-6) must be always be included in
the wireline string assembly, with the exception of when running Amerada gauges or
memory gauges.
For heavy duty the Hydraulic Jar or Upstroke Jar is used in the wireline tool string set
above the Link type Jar.
The length of the jar stroke must be as longest as possible, compatibly with completion
characteristics and planned wireline operation.
The shot force of the link jar is related to the jar opening speed.
The link jar external diameter must be the same of rope socket and stems external
diameters.
The link jar must be periodically inspected on the brackets and extremities. The link jar
that highlights contingent anomalies on these parts (bending, cracks, rapping etc.) must
be rejected.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Tubular Jar
The tubular jar (Refer to Figure 3-7) is a tool that can be used during fishing operations.
For safety reasons, when performing fishing operations, a tubular jar is preferred to the
link jar because of its particular design.
The tubular jar is not a particularly strong tool, as consequence its use in normal wireline
operations is not recommended.
The tubular jar external diameter must be the same of rope socket and stem external
diameters.
Figure 3-3 - Stem Figure 3-4 - Filled Stem Figure 3-5 - Roller Stem
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Hydraulic Jar
The Hydraulic jar is a tool able to perform only upstroke jar action.
The shot force is related to the applied over pull to the wireline string, at the jar release
moment.
The hydraulic jar shooting time depends on the hydraulic oil characteristics, selected
according to the well temperature. The choice of an oil with viscosity such to allow the jar
action 15-20secs after the overpull applied, is suggested.
The hydraulic jar external diameter must be the same of rope socket and stem external
diameters.
The hydraulic jar must be connected in the wireline string immediately above the link jar.
Use of the hydraulic jar in gas wells is not recommended. A leakage on the hydraulic
section can produce the ‘gasification’ phenomenon in the hydraulic oil, loosing the jar
action.
Mechanical Up-stroke Jar (Spring Type)

The mechanical up-stroke jar is a tool able to perform only the up stroke action. The shot
force is function of the opposing mainspring load. The up-stroke jar is activated when the
compression force of the mainspring is reached, acting the releasing mechanism.
The hydraulic jar must be connected in the wire line string immediately above of the link
jar.
The mainspring could be: at fixed setting (ex. up-stroke jar Flopetrol type), to change the
setting, this mainspring must be replaced; adjustable setting (ex. up-stroke jar Petroline
type).
The external diameter of the hydraulic jar must be the same of the external diameter of
rope socket and stems.
Use of the mechanical up stroke jar is the alternative choice of the hydraulic jar.
For operations on HP-HT wells the Upstroke Jar is used in the wireline toolstring.
Hydro-Mechanical Up-stroke Jar (Spring Type)

The hydro-mechanical up-stroke jar is a tool able to perform only up stroke action.
The shot force is related to the applied overpull to the wireline string, at the moment of jar
release.
The main differences between hydro-mechanical up-stroke jar and hydraulic jar are the
smaller hydraulic section drawing of the first one, the jar rod that is not part of the
hydraulic section, on which is not necessary to have a ‘travelling’ hydraulic sealing.
The external diameter of hydro-mechanical up-stroke jar must be the same of the external
diameter of the rope socket and stem.
The use of mechanical up stroke jars is the alternative choice to the hydraulic jar and
mechanical up-stroke jar.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 3-6 - Link Jar Figure 3-7 - Tubular Jar Figure 3-8 - Hydraulic Mechanical Jar
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
3.2.4 Knuckle Joints

The knuckle joint (Refer to Figure 3-9) is a string tool that provides wireline string
flexibility. It is used to run wireline equipment in deviated wells or to simplify the down
hole equipment retrieving in particular situations.
The number and position of knuckle joints are planned in accordance with the completion
type, well deviation, type of wireline operation to be performed, and previous experience.
The insertion of knuckle joints in the wire line string for operations on vertical wells, or in
heavy jarring operations is not suggested because, due to its constructive design, it
represents a weak point in the wire line string.
The use of knuckle joints in the Wireline toolstring will be defined by the Wireline
Superintendent while programming the operations.
Figure 3-9 - Knuckle Joint

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
3.2.5 Types Of Connections

The connections of the wireline string tools for standard operations must be threaded.
Operations on flowing wells, heavy jar operations, and operations on HP/HT wells must
be performed by using a wireline string with ‘Quick Lock Connections’.
The thread of 11/4” and 11/2” OD wireline string tools is 15/16” - 10 UNF
The thread of 1" OD wireline string tools is 5/8” - 11 UNF
The thread of 111/16” and 17/8” wireline string tools is 11/16” - 10 UNF
The ‘Quick Lock Connection’ must be compatible with the wireline string standard
external diameters. They must have a design that allows its releasing exclusively by the
operator’s hand action, without keys or a pipe wrench.
The service tools (running tools, pulling tools etc.) will be provided with ‘Quick Lock
Connections’, or have the standard threaded connection and a pinned crossover.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
4. SURFACE EQUIPMENT SELECTION
‘Wire Line Surface Equipment’ is defined as the necessary equipment to perform wireline
operations in a pressure well, included connection with the wellhead, safety equipment
and the lifting equipment.
It consists of:
• Lifting Equipment
• Adapter Flanges
• BOP
• Lubricator Riser
• Stuffing Box
• Injection Nipple
• Safety Check Union
• Swab Valve.
4.1 LIFTING EQUIPMENT

‘Lifting Equipment’ is defined as the equipment used to rig up, to lift, to position on the
Xmas tree and to hold in position the Pressure Control Equipment, during the execution
of the wire line operation.
The Lifting Equipment may include:
For onshore operations: a crane
For offshore operations:
• Lifting frame
• Hydraulic mast.
4.1.1 Crane
The use of a crane to lift the lubricator equipment is selected according to the following
criteria:
a) Minimum operating range to ensure:
• Lifting of the lubricator completely vertical. The travelling block of the
crane must be at least 2m away from the stuffing box sheave bracket
assembly after the connection with the well head.
• The effective hook load with the lubricator connected at the well head
must be the sum of double the lubricator weight plus the maximum
allowable pull on the line.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
b) Hydro-mechanical features:
• The adjustable crane jib must be able to not slack off the weight for at
least 24hrs, independently of the meteorological conditions.
• The hook must be equipped with a safety shut-off device.
• The following items must be subjected to CND at least once every year:
hook, dedicated cables to wire line works, power cable.
Spark arrester on the muffler.
c) Operator:
• Four years of experience in the oil patch, of which at least two in rigless
and wire line operations.
4.1.2 Lifting Frame

The lifting frame is defined as a gin pole for offshore operation.
It consists of:
• A frustum pyramidal base
• Pipe sections.
The lower section is connected to the base by two ties, set on top and at the bottom of
the pyramidal base, with a pin hinge that allows, in case of necessity, laying down of the
frame.
The lifting frame shall be installed in the best position to satisfy the verticality of the
lubricator on the wellhead. The lifting of the lubricator is carried out by a block and tackle
system, with the fixed block connected to the ‘flag’ and the travelling block connected to
the lubricator itself, by means of a hook.
4.1.3 Hydraulic Mast

The Hydraulic Mast is used for lifting wireline surface equipment in offshore operations.
It consists of:
• A frame
• Mast sections
• Hydraulic power pack.
The base section is a skid fabricated out of heavy duty channels and structural hollow
sections.
The mast sections are fabricated out of square hollow sections and erected to the
maximum operating height by inserting each section (one at a time) into the mast base.
Once each section has been inserted and bolted together, they are then hydraulically
extended ready for the next section; each section is locked into position by failsafe
hydraulic locking dogs.
The hydraulic power for the mast is supplied by an external source.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
4.2 ADAPTER FLANGE

The Adapter Flange is defined as the linking element between the Xmas Tree top flange
and the Wireline BOP bottom flange. The Adapter Flange must be machined from a
single piece of forged and worked steel; the flange characteristics (nominal diameter,
working pressure, type of ring joint) must be clearly marked.
The type of steel shall be corrosion resistant to all fluids in the hole.
The working pressure of Adapter Flanges must be equal to, or higher than, the Xmas
Tree working pressure.
Adapter Flanges with API EUE bottom threaded connections must not be used.
Figure 4-1 - Typical Adapter Flange
4.3 BOPS
BOPs are the safety surface equipment that provide emergency shut-in on the wireline in
the event of a leak or accidental well flow; they are still sometimes referred to as the
wireline valve. Only BOPs with wire shaped rams are allowed.
The BOP must be equipped with an equalising valve to enable equalisation of pressure
before opening the BOP rams. The wire rams must be replaced after an emergency shut
in on the slickline.
The specification of the BOP must include resistance to corrosion from the well fluids and
have a WP equal to, or higher than, the Xmas Tree WP. The ID must be compatible with
the maximum tool OD to be run during operations and the bottom connection must be
metal seal, flanged or equivalent.
The BOP must be hydraulic and manually controlled. The hydraulic control circuit must be
equipped with accumulators to provide a ‘shut-in, open, shut again’ cycle within 90secs.
Hydraulic hose connections of ‘snap’ type are allowed. The use of THE manual hydraulic
pump is allowed only for 21/2” nominal size BOPs.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
The hydraulic control pump must be equipped, downstream of the fluid end, if necessary,
with check valve + ‘Tee’ + bleed off valve of the appropriate WP.
The BOPs hydraulic control unit must be positioned a minimum of 30 m away from the
well head. The hose WP must be at least equal to or higher than the BOP working
pressure.
The wire rams must be replaced after an emergency shut in on the slick line.
4.4 LUBRICATOR RISER

The Lubricator is composed of sections of tubes of about 8ft long.
Lubricator connections must be of the ‘Quick Union’ type, with the hydraulic seals as
follows in Table 4-a.
Working Pressure Seal Type

5,000 psi ‘O’ring
10,000 psi ‘O’ring with seal protector ring
15,000 psi ‘O’ring with seal protector ring and non-extrusion ring
Table 4-a- Lubricator Seal Criteria
The connection among pipes and quick union must be integral type or weld-on type. The
use of Lubricator Risers with threaded connection among pipes and quick union is
allowed for working pressure up to 5,000psi, and in any case it is subordinate to the
Wireline Superintendent’s approval.
The type of steel and the elastomeric seals will be corrosion resistant to all the fluids in
hole. The Lubricator working pressure must be equal to or higher than the well head
working pressure. The Lubricator ID must be compatible with the maximum tool OD to be
run during the operation. In the lower section of the Lubricator a 1/2" NPT threaded hole
for WPs up to 10Kpsi shall be present, or 11/2" UNF metal seal threaded hole for greater
WP (Refer to Figure 4-2). The Lubricator pressure bleeding off shall be carried out using
one bleed off valve for WPs up to 5,000psi, and two bleed off valves for WPs > 5,000psi.
A wear joint must be applied on the Lubricator bleed off point. The bleed off valves WP
must be equal to or higher than the Lubricator working pressure, and must be made of
material resistant to all the fluids in hole.
In order to lift the lubricator, its upper section must be equipped with lifting tie, installed 2
to 3ft from the stuffing box, able to hang the surface equipment weight.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 4-2 - Typical Lubricator Section (Lower)

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
4.5 STUFFING BOX

The Stuffing Box is defined as the surface equipment element that guarantees the
hydraulic seal on the wireline cable by means of sealing elements during the operations
in hole (Refer to Figure 4-3). The Stuffing Box must be equipped with a top pulley
(Sheave Bracket Assy) and bottom connection fit to the lubricator upper section
connection.
hole for quick union seals and packing element as well.
The Stuffing Box WP must be the same as the other surface equipment WP.
Figure 4-3 - Typical Stuffing Boxes
The Stuffing Box must be hydraulically controlled and the hydraulic control pump
positioned in safe position. Hydraulic hose connections ‘pull-push’ type are allowed.
The hydraulic control pump must be equipped downstream of the fluid end, if necessary,
with check valve + ‘Tee’ + bleed off valve of the appropriate WP.
The hoses WP must be at least equal to or higher than the Stuffing Box working pressure.
The sheave bracket assy dimensions shall be changed according to the wire diameter
and material.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
The quantity and quality of packing elements in the Stuffing box packing unit shall be
changed in accordance with the fluid in hole and with the wire line steel type. They must
be replaced as per the following criteria:
• Characteristics of the fluid in hole
• HP-HT situations
• Work typology and duration
• Packing type versus wire line material compatibility
• Experiences in analogous situations.
The stuffing box packing conditions must be compulsory inspected before starting to run
in hole with any tools.
4.6 INJECTION NIPPLE

Injection Nipple (Refer to Figure 4-4) is defined as the part of the Lubricator equipment
that allows the injection in hole, during Wireline operations and directly onto the wire, of
chemical products.
Figure 4-4 - Typical Injection Sub
The installation of the Injection Nipple is recommended between the stuffing box and the
safety check union during wells operations where hydrates, asphaltene or paraffin
problems are anticipated.
The Injection Nipple working pressure must be same as or higher than the wellhead
working pressure, and in any case equal to at least the Lubricator working pressure.
The Injection Nipple connections must be the Quick Union type with a hydraulic seal, to
allow the connection between the Safety check union and the Stuffing Box without
crossovers.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
hole even for quick union seals and packing element. A 1/2" NPT threaded hole for WP up
to 10Kpsi, or 11/8" UNF metal seal threaded hole for greater WP shall be present on the
Injection Nipple external body.
The use of needle valve and/or check valve on the injection line, connected directly to the
Injection Nipple in standing position, is suggested.
4.7 SAFETY CHECK UNION

The Safety Check Union (Refer to Figure 4-5) is defined as the part of the Lubricator
equipment to shut in, automatically and in brief time, the well flow through the Stuffing
Box in case of breaking and expulsion of the wire from the well.
Figure 4-5 - Safety Check Union
The use of the Safety Check Union is compulsory during wireline operations on sour gas
and oil wells.
The Safety Check Union must be installed in the Pressure Control Equipment between
the upper section of the Lubricator and the Injection Nipple.
The Safety Check Union working pressure must be the same as or higher than the
wellhead working pressure, and in any case equal to the Lubricator working pressure.
The Safety Check Union connections must be the Quick Union type with a hydraulic seal,
to allow the connection between the Lubricator upper section and the Injection Nipple
without crossovers.
hole.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
4.8 SWAB VALVE

Swab Valve is defined as the upper vertical valve of the Xmas Tree. In some types of
wellheads, this valve is not present in normal producing conditions.
The inclusion of a Swab Valve having the same characteristics as the Xmas Tree Master
Valve is compulsory for wire line operations with the well flowing, and recommended for
wire line operations in static conditions.
The hydraulic test on the Swab Valve at the Working Pressure must be recorded before
the installation. The flanged connection between the Swab Valve and the Xmas Tree
must be hydraulically tested at Working Pressure before rigging up the Pressure Control
Equipment.
The use of an additional hydraulic Swab Valve having the same characteristics and the
same Working Pressure as the Christmas Tree Working Valve is recommended for
wireline operations on wells with STHP higher than 10,000psi.
The hydraulic test on the additional Swab Valve at the working pressure must be
recorded before the installation. The flanged connection between the additional Swab
Valve and the Xmas Tree must be hydraulically tested at working pressure before rigging
up the Pressure Control Equipment.
The hydraulic actuator of the additional hydraulic Swab Valve must be the double effect
type. Fail Safe Hydraulic Swab Valves are not allowed.
The hydraulic Swab Valve control unit must be positioned a minimum of 30m away from
the wellhead.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
5. WIRE SELECTION
The following section describes the various sizes and types of wireline available and the
criteria for use.
5.1 WIRE DIAMETERS

API specification 9A gives the industry standard for wireline sizes although other products
may be available on the market out with API specifications for specialised operations or
conditions.
The specification lists the following wire sizes for slickline:
• 0.066” (1.68mm) OD
• 0.072” (1.83mm) OD
• 0.092” (2.34mm) OD
• 0.108” (2.74mm) OD
• 0.125” (3.17mm) OD.
Company standardises on the use of only the last three sizes.

The 0.092” wire shall be used for light duty operations.
The minimum wire size to be used for heavy duty operations must have at least twice the
yield strength than the maximum tension expected pull on the line for the particular
operation although unexpected operations such as fishing, etc., must be taken into
consideration.
The use of 0.108" or 0.125" slickline to perform heavy duty operations is recommended.
The Wireline Superintendent may make exceptions to these regulations by selecting and
authorising a wireline for some special operations (i.e. gradient recording on HP/HT
wells).
5.2 MATERIALS
Wireline steel grades must be compatible with the well fluids (API 9A Specification for
Wire and Rope).
5.3 ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
5.3.1 Counter Wheel

The minimum dimensions of the counter wheel (Refer to Figure 5-1) depend on the steel
grade and size of the wire to be used. This is ensure depth measurement accuracy and
also to prevent fatigue to the wire.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
The following formula may be applied to calculate the minimum wheel diameter:
d
D= C× × 10 6 Eq. 5.A
Rm
where:
D = Wheel Diameter, ins
d = Wire Diameter, ins
Rm = Tensile strength, psi
C = Constant of proportionality
The counter wheel groove bottom diameter must be altered in accordance with wire size
being used and the depth measurement equipment (odometer). The wire depth
measurement is calculated on the centre of the wire and the turns on the counter wheel.
The wireline must have one complete turn around the counter wheel and be held in
position by two pressure wheels to prevent jumping off during jarring and other rigorous
operations.
ØD
Figure 5-1 - Measuring Wheel
5.4 OTHER SHEAVES

The formula given above also determines the minimum diameter of all the other sheaves
which includes the hay pulley and stuffing box sheaves. This is not for accurate depth
measurement in these cases but to prevent fatigue of the line.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
5.5 COATED WIRE LINE CABLE

For wireline operations in wells completed with internal coated tubing, the utilisation of
external coated wireline or slickline (Refer to Figure 5-2) can be considered.
At the current time, this type of wire has given some problems due to the different
elasticity between the wire and the coating. However, it is envisaged in the near future
that the development of these new products will overcome the problems.
Steel wire
OD
Coating
Figure 5-2 - Coated Wireline
When selecting a coated wireline, the following considerations must be applied:

• The steel grade of the line shall be for standard service (plough steel)
• The coating material must be compatible with the tubing coating.
• The final coated line OD must be included in the standard (refer section
5.1).
• Associated equipment specification and wheels diameters must be
supplied by the seller of the wireline.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
6. WIRELINE UNIT SELECTION
The Wireline Unit is the surface equipment necessary to deploy the toolstrings into and
retrieval from the well and consists of a winch and power pack and relevant auxiliary
equipment.
The wire line operations are identify as:
a) Heavy Duty Operations
b) Light Duty Operations
The heavy duty wireline unit or light duty wireline unit will be selected in accordance
with the operations for which they have to perform taking into account the following main
criteria:
• For onshore operations the use of a truck mounted wireline is
recommended
• For offshore operations the use of skid mounted wireline unit is
mandatory
• Truck mounted wireline units as well as the skid mounted wire line units
may be, either, heavy duty or light duty types.
6.1 HEAVY DUTY LAND TRUCK
6.1.1 Truck Specification

a) The truck must have mechanical characteristics (wheel base, number of
driving axles, tires, gear ratio etc.) correct for the area of operation.
b) The available power for the hydraulic pump must be at least 1.2 times higher
than the winch required power.
c) The use of the truck motor as the power source is recommended for
operations in areas with a temperate climate. In the areas with arid climate, it
is possible to carry out the wireline operations with a dedicated power source.
d) The separation between the winch room from the operator’s cabin is
recommended.
e) The operating cab (winch and operator’s cabin) must be provided with internal
lighting. The heavy duty wire line unit should be equipped with a generating
set, compressor and auxiliary external electric plant.
f) All the electric systems must be explosion-proof.
g) The mufflers of the motors must be equipped with spark arresting exhaust
silencers.
h) The cab should be manufactured from stainless steel for use in continental
climates.
i) The carrying capacity of the truck must be greater than the weight of reel,
contingent dedicated power unit and all the wireline equipment.
j) The overall dimensions of the truck must meet with the regulations of the
country in which it must operate.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
6.1.2 Winch
a) The power transmission between motor and winch must be hydraulically
driven.
b) The motor-hydraulic pump group must furnish the sufficient power to the
performance of the winch, approximately 40-50 HP.
c) Reel capacity must be not less than 25,000ft of 0.092" wire or 20,000ft of
0.108" wire.
d) Minimum line speed is 1,800ft/min at surface.
e) Maximum pull on line must be not less than 2,100lbs at 20,000ft.
f) The hydraulic circuit must have:
• The capability to exert a line pull and line speed with stepless control.
• To regulate and maintain the maximum practicable tension on the line.
• To use the hydraulic motor as brake during the running in hole.
• Equipped with safety pressure relief valves on the hydraulic pump and
hydraulic motor to drain the pressure from the high to the low pressure
circuit.
• Equipped with safety pressure relief valves to drain from the low
pressure circuit to atmosphere.
• Must operate with readily available hydraulic oil.
g) The winch equipment necessary is:

• Weight indicator composed by hydraulic load cell and reading gauge
having the full-scale not less than the breaking strength of the wireline
with a resolution which must be not greater than 5lbs full scale.
• Depth indicator counter wheel, with 0.5m resolution.
• Hydraulic high pressure circuit manometer, hydraulic oil thermometer,
hydraulic oil level indicator and alarm, motor oil manometer and motor
cooling circuit thermometer.
6.1.3 Surface Equipment

a) Surface equipment with a diameter, working pressure and correct length for
the planned operations.
b) Quantity of wireline tools to be sufficient for the composition of two toolstrings.
c) Down hole equipment in accordance with the planned operations.
d) Fishing tools provided for contingency in retrieval of wire and toolstrings.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
6.2 LIGHT DUTY LAND TRUCK
6.2.1 Truck Specification

a) The truck must have mechanical characteristics (wheel base, number of
driving axles, tires, gear ratio etc.) correct for the area of operation.
c) The use of the truck motor as the power source is recommended for
operations in areas with a temperate climate. In the areas with arid climate, it
is possible to carry out the wireline operation with a dedicate power source.
d) The separation between the winch room from the operator’s cabin is
recommended.
e) The operating cab (winch and operator’s cabin) must be provided with internal
lighting.
f) All the electric systems must be explosion proof.
g) The mufflers of the motors must be equipped with spark arresting exhaust
silencers.
h) The cab should be manufactured from stainless steel for use in continental
climates.
i) The carrying capacity of the truck must be greater than the weight of reel,
contingent dedicated power unit and all the wireline equipment.
j) The overall dimensions of the truck must meet with the regulations of the
country in which it must operate.
6.2.2 Winch
driven.
c) Reel capacity must be not less than 15,000ft of 0.092" wire.
circuit.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1


6.3 HEAVY DUTY OFFSHORE SKID
6.3.1 Skid Unit

a) The cab must have the minimum possible overall dimensions and equipped
with certified lifting points. The total weight and the overall dimensions must
be easily observable.
c) The use of a diesel power pack with an electric start is recommended.
d) The power pack must be separated from the operator’s cabin both physically
and acoustically. The use of a power pack completely separate from the
wireline skid is permitted.
e) Separation of the winch from the operator’s cabin is recommended.
f) The operating cab (both winch and operator’s cabin) must be supplied with
internal lighting. Equipping a heavy duty wireline unit with a generating set is
recommended.
g) All the electric systems must be explosion proof.
h) The muffler of the motor must be equipped with spark arresting exhaust
silencers.
i) The cab should be manufactured from stainless steel for use in continental
climates.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
6.3.2 Winch
driven.
c) Reel capacity must be not less than 25,000ft of 0.092" wire or 20,000ft of
0.108" wire.
circuit.


e) The surface equipment may be stored on the completing cab of the wireline
heavy duty skid, with the tools stored separately in a toolbox.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
6.4 LIGHT DUTY OFFSHORE SKID
6.4.1 Skid Unit

a) The cab must have the minimum possible overall dimensions and equipped
with certified lifting points. The total weight and the overall dimensions must
be easily observable.
c) The use of a diesel power pack with an electric start is recommended.
d) The power pack must be separated from the operator’s cabin both physically
and acoustically. The use of a power pack completely separate from the
wireline skid is permitted.
e) Separation of the winch from the operator’s cabin is recommended.
f) The operating cab (both winch and operator’s cabin) must be supplied with
internal lighting. Equipping a heavy duty wireline unit with a generating set is
recommended.
g) All the electric systems must be explosion proof.
h) The muffler of the motor must be equipped with spark arresting exhaust
silencers.
i) The cab should be manufactured from stainless steel for use in continental
climates.
6.4.2 Winch
driven.
c) Reel capacity must be not less than 15,000ft of 0.092" wire.
circuit.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
7. DOCUMENTATION
This section outlines the documentation necessary for conducting efficient wireline
operations and reporting.
All information concerning well condition, operation to be carried out and safety
regulations to be followed shall be given by the Supervisor to the Chief Operator.
The Chief Operator shall consign the Rig/Well Site Report to the Supervisor at the end of
operation.
7.1 PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

Before performing any well operations the following documentation and information must
be available:
a) A detailed programme including:
• Name of Field
• Name of Well
• Well Code
• Cost Centre Number
• Progressive Number for the Operation (where applicable)
• RKB Elevation
• Completion String Profile (completion components ID, length, tubing
size/weight, depths, etc.)
• Tubing Entry Guide Depth
• Intervals Open
• Type of Flange to Connect Wellhead
• Type of Back Pressure Valve (where scheduled )
• Date and Magnitude of the Last Recorded WHP
• Type and Characteristics of Well Equipment
• Design of the Wireline Toolstring
• Type and Specifications of Surface Equipment
• Type and Specifications of Wireline Tools
• Type and Diameter of Wire
• Deviation Report.
b) Up to date Well Report (ARPO-02)

c) Up to date Wellhead Report
d) Last Wireline Operation Report (ARPO-11)
e) Last recorded Pressure and Temperature Gradient Report (ARPO-12)
f) Last Production Well Testing Report (ARPO-10).
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
7.2 WELLSITE REPORTS

To schedule future operational programmes, all rigless wireline operations must be
properly documented and kept on file to maintain the history of operations performed on
any well.
The wireline operations performed during rig operations (completion string gauging,
packer setting, etc.) will not be reported in the Wireline Report (ARPO-11) but in the Daily
Report (ARPO-02). Also, at the end of operations the Wireline Chief Operator will provide
to Company Representative a 'Wellsite Report' containing a full description of the
operations performed.
The wireline operations performed during rig operations that gives the configuration of the
well at the end of completion operations (plug setting, SCSSV setting, BPV setting, etc.)
must be reported on the ARPO-11.
It is responsibility of the Wireline Superintendent to inform the Company Representative
on how to compile the necessary reports.
It is responsibility of the Company Representative to compile and forward the reports
(indicated below) to the Wireline Superintendent. The Wireline Superintendent will then
check and approve the reports before distribution and filing.
7.3 FEED BACK REPORTS

The following reports are compiled at the end of the operations:
a) ARPO 02 Daily Report
b) ARPO 11 Wireline Report
c) ARPO 12 Pressure and Temperature Survey Report
d) FB-01 Report on Equipment Damage and Malfunctions
e) FB-02 Service Company Evaluation Report
Refer to Appendix A for copies of appropriate reports.
7.4 OTHER REPORTS

The Eni E&P Representative must sign the Service Report of the Service Company which
must include the following information:
• Name of Well
• Name of Field
• Order Number
• Date
• Personnel and equipment used
• Description of the operations conducted.
Prior to the commencement of operations the Company Representative must confirm the
Job Permission document is duly compiled and approved by the Operations Manager or
his designate.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
8. WIRELINE RIG-UP/DOWN OPERATIONS
Rig up and Rig down Operations are defined by operations that precedes and follows
running wireline tools into the hole; independent of the type of work to be carried out.
Type of work includes handling, make-up, lifting and installing surface facilities,
positioning the unit by means of lifting and make-up of the wireline string.
The Wireline Chief Operator is responsible to check the equipment condition, make-up,
lifting and installing the equipment.
The Company Representative shall ensure that:
• Manuals and procedures are available at rig site.
• Wireline Crew have at their disposal their own safety equipment.
• Wireline Chief Operator to provide the documentation on the NDE (Non
Destructive Examination) performed on the equipment in use.
8.1 TOOLSTRING WEIGHT DETERMINATION

The weight of the wireline toolstring is the sum of required weights as follows:
a) to balance the force resulting from wellhead pressure acting on the wire area
and to overcome the friction of the wire on sheaves and stuffing box (which is
defined minimum weight, Pm ).
b) to provide mass for jar action, WR .
The minimum weight, Pm , is calculated with the following formula:
⎡⎛ φ WL ⎞ 2 π ⎤
Pm = ⎢⎜ ⎟ x x WHP ⎥ x 1.5 Eq. 8.A
⎣⎢⎝ 10 ⎠ 4 ⎦⎥
where:
Pm = Minimum weight, kg
ΦWL = Wireline OD, mm
WHP = Wellhead pressure, kg/cm2
The total weight will be then given by relation:

PT = Pm + WR [kg]
where:
PT = Total weight, kg
Pm = Minimum weight, kg
WR = Additional weight for jar impact action, kg.

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
It is then possible to calculate the total length of the wireline string to make up, according
to the diameter selected and the material of which it is made.
Wireline carbon steel stem:

⎡ ⎤
⎢ ⎥
⎢ ⎥
⎢ PT ⎥ [m]
LSTEM =⎢ 2 ⎥
⎢ ⎛⎜1 − SG ⎞⎟ x 7.85 x ⎛⎜ φSTEM ⎞⎟ x π ⎥
⎢⎝ 7.85 ⎠ ⎝ 100 ⎠ 4⎥
⎢⎣ 10 ⎥⎦
Wireline tungsten carbide filled stem:

⎡ ⎤
⎢ ⎥
⎢ ⎥
⎢ PT ⎥ [m]
LSTEM =⎢ 2 ⎥
⎢ ⎛⎜1 − SG ⎞ ⎛ φ ⎞ π
⎟ x 11.5 x ⎜ STEM ⎟ x ⎥
⎢⎝ 11.5 ⎠ ⎝ 100 ⎠ 4⎥
⎢⎣ 10 ⎥⎦
8.2 RIG OPERATIONS

Rig Operations are defined as operations carried out on rigs for drilling or workovers,
either onshore or offshore, with the use of equipment and Wireline Crews for HD (Heavy
Duty) or LD (Light Duty) Jobs, according to the type of equipment, completion and
duration of the operation.
It is the responsibility of the Eni E&P Supervisor to provide instructions and
documentation required by the operation, in particular:
• Operation programmes
• Completion design including depths and diameters of equipment
• Height of rotary table floor from a reference point (base flange or upper
flange of the tubing spool)
• Type and characteristics of fluid present in the string
It is the responsibility of the Company Supervisor to give instructions to the Rig

Contractor regarding the location of the wireline unit at rig site and assist the Wireline
Crew during the operation.
The Wireline Crew shall be qualified to deal with all planned operations without creating
interruptions in the activity. For this purpose, the organisation of the Wireline Crew is the
responsibility of the Wireline Superintendent.
The Wireline Crew shall observe the general safety conditions given by the operations
responsible according to either the rig site or platform logistic and of the possible danger
of fluids present on location.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Control of the regulation's application by the Wireline Crew is the responsibility of the
Drilling Contractor.
The Wireline Crews equipment shall include individual protection equipment and fire
prevention equipment required to comply with the rules issued by the responsible
department.
8.2.1 Land
A) Rig Up During Well Completion

Rig up during well completion operations are wireline operations performed during the
well completion phase, i.e. tubing gauging and depth control of the landing nipples which
are performed during or at the end of the completion running and before the wellhead
installation.
Selection of surface facilities:
a) Sub tubing threaded pin down x quick union box up with connection for lifting
sub.
b) ‘T’ member threaded quick union pin x box and 2” hammer union lateral outlet
(i.e. Fig.1002 or 1502)
c) Wireline BOP with quick union pin down x box up.
The above components shall have an ID to allow the passage of the tool with a maximum
diameter according to the completion design.
The unit type shall be selected according to the type of completion and maximum working
depth. Wire size and metallurgy shall be selected according to the characteristics of the
completion fluid and possible presence of corrosive fluids (e.g. H2S, brine with corrosive
components).
The Wireline Crew shall be qualified to withstand all planned operations without creating
interruptions in the activity. Light Duty Crew shall be used when dealing with a single
completion on wells of a limited depth. Heavy Duty Crew shall be used when dealing with
single selective or dual completion with several sliding sleeves, landing nipples, surface
controlled safety valves.
The Wireline unit shall be equipped with at least the following:
a) Components of the wireline string sufficient to make up two strings.
b) Gauge cutters suitable to the completion design.
c) Wire suitable to fluids present/expected in hole as well as mechanical stress.
d) Fishing equipment suitable to the completion design (e.g. Wireline grabs, wire
cutters Go Devil, impression blocks, etc.), and wireline string used (pulling
tools, fishing socket, etc.).
Procedure
1) Position the wireline unit approximately 30m from the wellhead, in front of the pipe
rack walkway taking into consideration the logistics of the rig used.
2) Extend the wire, check it visually and perform an integrity test by way of a torsion
test.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
3) Bring the disassembled wireline working string, wheels and loading cell of the
weight indicator onto the rotary table floor.
4) Make up the rope socket (Refer to section 3.2.1):
For Heavy Duty Jobs use a ‘no knot’ type.
For Light Duty Jobs the use of a conventional rope socket, making it with 15 turns,
is allowed.
5) After assembling, check that the rope socket is free to rotate around the wire.
6) On the rig floor :
a) Install the loading cell of the weight indicator in optimal position to the sight of
the Wireline Operator so that he can easily see it. Install the first sheave to
the loading cell so that the wire forms an angle as close as possible to 90°.
b) Install sub tubing thread pin down x quick union box up + ‘T’ member quick
threaded union pin x box and 2” hammer union lateral outlet (Fig. 1002 or
1502) plus Wireline BOP with quick union pin x box.
c) Connect the 2" Weco connection to the rig manifold for a possible kill.
d) Install the second sheave to the travelling block.
7) Pulling the wire, bring the rope socket previously composed to the rig floor.
8) Insert the wire into the groove of the wheels.
9) Connect at least one length of stem to the rope socket.
10) Lift the first sheave keeping the wireline string from snagging.
11) Complete the make-up of the toolstring according to the programme or Company
Supervisor’s indications.
12) Make up the required wireline tool.
13) Lay down the wireline string onto the rotary table. The weight indicator should
indicate zero. Lift the string and check that the weight indicator reading corresponds
to the calculated weight. If the check is wrong, clean the line and/or manually re-
adjust the instrumentation.
14) With the ‘Tool’ at rotary table level set the odometer to zero.
15) Perform the planned wireline operation.
16) Rig down procedures follows the opposite to the above mentioned procedures
paying particular attention to the following points:
a) Cut the wire only after having disassembled all the components of the wireline
string. To allow a faster and better rewinding of the wire for the initial recovery
on the drum of the draw works move away from the rig floor. For this purpose
make an eye on the end of the wire.
b) It is necessary to put back the used components after they have been
cleaned and redressed. Perform the same maintenance on the BOP.
B) Rig Up During Production

These are wireline operations carried out in a pressured hole.
The surface facilities are composed of a lubricator, stuffing box, BOP and adapter flange.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Such components shall be suitable to the operation according to the following criteria:
a) Lubricator ID adequate to the max. tool size of the equipment used.
b) WP greater or equal to the Xmas tree WP.
c) Compatibility of materials with fluids present in hole.
d) Additional equipment, i.e. injection nipple and safety check union can be
decided according to the type of operation and well condition.
The unit type shall be selected according to the completion and maximum depth of work.
Wire size and metallurgy shall be selected according to characteristics of the completion,
formation fluids and reservoir temperature.
The composition of the Wireline Crew shall be qualified to withstand all planned
operations without creating interruptions in activity. The employment of Heavy Duty Crew
or Light Duty Crew depends on the diameter of the completion string, working pressure of
surface equipment, duration and type of operation.
The Wireline unit shall be equipped with a minimum of equipment including:
b) Gauge cutter of a suitable diameter to the completion design.
c) Wire suitable to fluids present or expected in the hole as well as mechanical
stress.
d) Fishing equipment suitable to the completion design (e.g.: Wireline. grabs, Go
Devil wire cutters, impression blocks, etc.), and to the wireline string used
(pulling tools, fishing socket, etc.).
e) Shifting tools, running and pulling tools of suitable size.
f) Amerada mechanical and/or memory gauges and all relevant equipment.
g) Plugs for possible shut off levels and well securing.
Procedure (Light Duty Operation)

1) Position the wireline unit at approximately 30 m from the wellhead in front of the
pipe rack walkway taking into consideration the logistic of the rig used.
2) Ensure that the wellhead is made safe (derrick floor, barriers, etc.) and remove all
objects from the rotary table floor that can constitute a hitch or risk to the operation.
3) Check the top flange of the wellhead and ensure that the required adapter flange is
available.
4) Ensure that the swab valve is completely closed.
5) If the programme or Company Supervisor deems it necessary, function test the
BOP.
6) Install the adapter flange.
7) Lift the BOP using the crane by hooking it up to the eye of the lifting plug and install
it on the adapter flange. In some cases, the surface equipment for Light Duty Jobs
is provided with a flanged BOP. In this situation skip step 6) of the procedure.
8) Take from the unit or basket the required joints of the lubricator and lean them on
the gantries.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9) Remove thread protectors and properly clean sealing areas and all threads. Check
integrity of the ‘O’ Ring on the pin.
10) Make up the lubricator on the appropriate gantry without removing the lower thread
protector. Install a bleeder valve on the lower joint of the lubricator.
11) Check, measure and mate each component of the wireline string before inserting
into the lubricator.
12) Check the stuffing box seals and if required replace them.
13) Extend the wire, visually check it and test integrity by way of a torsion test.
14) Insert the wire through the stuffing box seals and through the rope socket of a
suitable diameter.
15) Make up the rope socket (Refer to section 3.2.1):
• For Heavy Duty Jobs use a ‘no knot’ type.
• For Light Duty Jobs the use of a conventional rope socket, making it with
15 windings, is allowed.
17) Make up the rope socket onto the top of the string, block the wire in the groove of
the stuffing box sheave and pull back the wire until the string is set on the top of the
lubricator.
18) Connect the stuffing box to the lubricator.
19) Apply the lifting clamp of the lubricator plus two equal lengths of steel rope and
relevant eyebolts at about 2ft from the stuffing box.
20) Install the loading cell of the weight indicator in optimal position to the sight of the
Wireline Operator so that he can easily see it. Install the first sheave to the loading
cell so that the wire forms an angle as close as possible to 90°.
21) Slowly lift the lubricator with the rig hoist or winch. In this phase the helper shall
follow the wire until the string runs to the bottom thread protector.
22) Place the lubricator onto the ramp of the pipe rack, hook off the hoist or winch and
hook up the travelling block to the lubricator with adequate steel ropes.
23) Insert the line into the groove of the sheave which is connected to the load cell of
the weight indicator.
24) Spool back the wire with the draw works until the string is no longer on the bottom
thread protector.
25) Remove the thread protector from the bottom thread.
26) Lay down the wireline string on the rotary table. The weight indicator should indicate
zero. Lift the string and check that the weight indicator reading corresponds to the
one calculated. If the check is negative, clean the line and/or manually re-adjust the
instrumentation.
27) Connect the selected tool to the wireline string.
28) When the tool is at the rotary table level or at the reference flange, reset the
odometer to zero.
29) Retrieve the wireline string inside the lubricator.
30) Connect the lubricator to the BOP.
31) Install onto the bleeder valve a proper scaled gauge or the control line for the dead
weight tester.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
32) Perform the lubricator pressure test to the Xmas tree WP for 15mins by using water
or non-freezing fluid then bleed off pressure to zero.
33) The operator shall open/close the wellhead valves and count the revolutions. Slowly
open the swab valve until the fluid or gas fills the lubricator. When the pressure is
stable complete to open the swab valve.
35) When the wireline string is completely pulled out, ensure that the wireline tool is
above the swab valve. Close the swab valve and count the revolutions of the
closing wheel.
36) The rig down procedures follows the opposite of the above mentioned procedures
paying particular attention to the following points :
Procedure (Heavy Duty Operation)

1) Position the wireline unit approximately 30m from the wellhead in front of the pipe
rack walkway keeping due consideration to the logistics of the rig.
available.
5) Install the wireline adapter flange.
6) Perform a torsion test on the wire and function test the BOP.
7) Lift the BOP with the crane by hooking it up to the eye of the lifting plug and install it
on the adapter flange.
8) Make up the lubricator on the ground or on the appropriate gantries.
9) Inspect the stuffing box; replace the packing if it is required. Extend the wire, insert
it through the stuffing box seals and through the rope socket of a suitable diameter.
Make up a ‘no knot’ type rope socket (section 3.2.1).
10) Lift the lubricator by means of the crane and place it on the ramp of the pipe rack.
Ensure that the bottom connection is protected by an aluminium plug.
11) Hook up the lubricator to the travelling block by means of a hanger and steel ropes.
12) Remove the master bushing of the rotary table.
13) Lift the lubricator with the travelling block and insert it inside the rotary table.
14) Lift the stuffing box by means of an air hoist or winch and insert it inside the rotary
table.
15) Install the pressure transducer (load cell of the Martin-Decker) and the sheave on
the wellhead. Insert the line in the groove of the sheave.
16) Keep the stuffing box hoisted and make up the rope socket on at least 6ft of stem.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
17) Connect the stuffing box to the lubricator and bring the bottom connection of the
lubricator to the height of the derrick floor.
18) Remove the aluminium plug, lower the wireline string and complete the
composition.
19) Check that the weight indicator reading in the operator box is equal to the
theoretical calculation; otherwise, adjust the instrumentation as per manufacturer’s
instructions.
20) Lower the working string to the derrick floor, and make up the required tool.
21) Bring the tool to the height of the referenced flange and reset the odometer to zero.
22) Pull back the wireline string into the lubricator, and lower the lubricator by means of
the travelling block. Connect the lubricator to the BOP and close the bleeder valve
(for a surface assembly greater or equal to 10,000psi two bleeder valves in series
are used).
23) Perform the lubricator pressure test to the Xmas tree WP for 15mins using water or
non-freezing fluid then bleed off pressure to zero.
24) Slowly open the swab valve until the fluid or gas fills the lubricator. Check that there
are no leaks in the quick unions and stuffing box. When the pressure is stable
complete to open the swab valve counting the revolutions.
25) Install onto the bleeder valve a proper scaled gauge or control line for the dead
weight tester.
closing wheel.
28) Bleed off pressure of the lubricator through the bleeder valve. In case of gaseous
hydrocarbon without H2S, release in the atmosphere is allowed.
In the case of liquid hydrocarbon the lubricator discharge shall be performed in a
dedicated container; in the case of H2S the above procedure shall be authorised by
the Safety Expert and added to the operating programme.
29) Loosen the connection between the lubricator and BOP, lift the lubricator by means
of the travelling block until the lower connection of the lubricator remains just above
the top connection of the BOP.
30) Lower the wireline string until the wire line tool is placed at derrick floor level, break
off the wireline tool and lower the wire line string as stated above then break off the
wireline string.
31) Lower the wire line string, cut the line approximately 6” above the rope socket and
pull out the wire outside the stuffing box. Spool back the wire into the reel taking
care not to bend it.
32) The rig down procedures follows the opposite to the above mentioned procedures
paying particular attention to the following point :
a) It is necessary to put back the used components after they have been
cleaned and redressed.
b) Perform the same maintenance on the BOP.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
8.2.2 Jack-Up/Fixed Platform/Barge

well completion phase, i.e. tubing gauging and depth control of the landing nipple which is
performed during or at the end of the completion running and before the wellhead
installation.
Selection of the surface facilities:
sub.
b) ‘T’ member threaded quick union pin x box and 2" hammer union lateral outlet
(i.e. Fig. 1002 or 1502).
depth. The wire size and metallurgy shall be selected according to the characteristics of
the completion fluid and the possible presence of corrosive fluids (e.g. H2S, brine with
corrosive components).
interruption in the activity. Light Duty Crew shall be used when dealing with a single
completion of a limited depth. Heavy Duty Crew shall be used when dealing with single
selective or dual completion with several sliding sleeves, landing nipples, surface
controlled safety valves.
The Wireline unit shall be equipped with at least the following:
b) Gauge cutters suitable for the completion design.
c) Wire suitable to fluids present/expected in hole as well as for mechanical
stress.
d) Fishing equipment suitable for the completion design (e.g., Wireline grabs, Go
Devil wire cutters, Impression blocks, etc.) and wireline string used (pulling
Procedure
1) Position the wireline unit approximately 30m from wellhead, in front of the pipe rack
walkway taking into consideration the logistics of the rig used.
test.
weight indicator onto the rotary table floor
4) Make up the rope socket:
• For Light Duty Jobs the use of a conventional rope socket, making it
with 15 turns, is allowed.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
6) On the rig floor:
a) Install loading cell of the weight indicator in optimal position to the sight of the
Wireline operator so that he can easily see it. Install the first sheave to loading
cell so that the line forms an angle as close as possible to 90°.
threaded union pin x box and 2” hammer union lateral outlet (i.e. Fig. 1002 or
1502) plus Wireline BOP with quick union pin x box.
c) Connect the 2" Weco connection at the rig manifold for a possible kill.
d) Install the second sheave to the travelling block.
7) Pulling the wire, bring the rope socket previously assembled on the rig floor.
9) Connect at least 1 stem to the rope socket.
10) Lift the first sheave keeping the wireline string.
11) Complete the make-up of the working string according to the programme or
Company Supervisor’s indications.
to the one calculated. If the check is negative, clean the line and/or manually re-
14) With ‘Tool’ at rotary table level set the odometer to zero.
16) The rig down procedures follows the opposite of the above mentioned procedures
paying particular attention to the following points:
on the drum of the draw works move away from the rig floor. For this purpose,

The surface facilities are composed of a lubricator, stuffing box, BOP and adapter flange.
Such components shall be suitable according to following criteria:
a) The Lubricator ID adequate to the max. tool size of the equipment to be used.
b) WP is greater or equal to the Xmas tree W P.
d) Additional equipment, i.e. injection nipple and safety check union can be
decided according to type of operation and well condition.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Wire size and metallurgy shall be selected according to the characteristics of the
completion, formation fluids and reservoir temperature.
The composition of the Wireline Crew shall be qualified to withstand all the planned
operations without creating interruptions in the activity. The employment of a Heavy Duty
Crew or Light Duty Crew depends on the diameter of completion string, working pressure
of surface equipment, duration and type of operation.
The wireline unit shall be equipped with a minimum of equipment including:
a) Components of the wireline string sufficient to make up two strings
b) Gauge cutter of a suitable diameter to the completion design
c) Wire compatible to the fluids present/expected in hole as well as mechanical
stress
d) Fishing equipment suitable to the completion design (e.g., Wireline grabs, Go
(pulling tools, fishing socket, etc.)
e) Shifting tools, running and pulling tools of suitable size
f) Amerada mechanical and/or memory gauges and all relevant equipment
g) Plugs for the possible shut off levels and well securing.
Procedure (Light Duty Operation)

rack walkway taking into consideration the logistics of the rig.
available.
5) If the programme or Company Supervisor deems it necessary, function test the
BOP.
6) Install the adapter flange.
7) Lift the BOP using the crane by hooking it up to the eye of the lifting plug and install
it on the adapter flange. In some cases the surface equipment for Light Duty Jobs is
provided with a flanged BOP. In this case omit step 6) of this procedure.
the gantries.
9) Remove the thread protectors and properly clean sealing areas and all threads.
Check integrity of the ‘O’ Ring on the pin.
10) Make up the lubricator on the appropriate gantries without removing the lower
thread protector. Install a bleeder valve on the lower joint of the lubricator.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
14) Insert the wire through the stuffing box seals, and through the rope socket of a
suitable diameter.
15) Make the rope socket :
• For Light Duty Jobs the use a conventional rope socket, making it with 15
turns, is allowed.
16) Check that the rope socket is free to rotate around the wire.
17) Make up the rope socket on top of the string, block the wire in the groove of the
stuffing box sheave and pull back the wire until the string is set on top of the
lubricator.
Wireline Operator so that he can easily see it. Install the first sheave to the load cell
so that the wire forms an angle as close as possible to 90°.
follow the wire until the string runs to the bottom thread protector.
22) Place the lubricator onto the ramp of the pipe rack, hook off the hoist or winch, and
hook up the travelling block to the lubricator with adequate steel ropes.
23) Insert the line in the groove of the sheave which is connected to the load cell of the
weight indicator.
24) Spool back the wire with the hoist until the string is no longer on the bottom thread
protector.
to the calculated weight. If the check is negative, clean the line and/or manually re-
27) Connect the required tool to the wireline string.
28) When the tool is at rotary table level or at the reference flange, reset the odometer
to zero.
31) Install onto the bleeder valve a proper scale gauge or control line for the dead
weight tester.
32) Perform the lubricator pressure test to the Xmas Tree WP for 15mins by using
water or non-freezing fluid then bleed off pressure to zero.
open the swab valve until the fluid or gas fills the lubricator. When the pressure is
stable complete to open the swab valve.
closing wheel.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
36) The rig down procedure is the opposite of the above detailed procedure paying
particular attention to the following points:
Procedure (Heavy Duty Operation)

1) Position the wireline unit approximately 30m from wellhead, in front of the pipe rack
walkway taking into consideration the logistics of the rig.
available.
5) Install the wireline adapter flange.
6) Perform a torsion test on the wire and function test the BOP.
7) Lift the BOP with the crane by hooking it up to the eye of the lifting plug and install it
8) Make up the lubricator on the main deck or on the appropriate gantries.
9) Inspect the stuffing box, replace the packing if it is required. Extend the wire, insert
it through the stuffing box seals and through the rope socket of a suitable diameter.
Make a ‘no knot’ type rope socket (Refer to section 3.2.1).
10) Lift the lubricator by means of the crane and place it on the ramp of the pipe rack.
Ensure that the bottom connection is protected by an aluminium plug.
11) Hook up the lubricator to the travelling block by means of a hanger and steel ropes.
12) Remove the master bushings of the rotary table.
13) Lift the lubricator with the travelling block and insert it inside the rotary table
14) Lift the stuffing box by means of an air hoist/winch and insert it inside the rotary
table.
15) Install the pressure transducer (load cell of the Martin-Decker) and the sheave on
the wellhead; insert the line in the groove of the sheave.
16) Keep the stuffing box hoisted and make up the rope socket to at least 6ft of stem.
17) Connect the stuffing box to the lubricator, bring the bottom connection of the
lubricator to the height of the derrick floor.
18) Remove the aluminium plug, lower the wireline string and complete the
composition.
19) Check that the weight indicator reading in the operator box is equal to the
theoretical calculation, otherwise clean the line and/or manually re-adjust the
instrumentation as per manufacturer’s instructions.
20) Lower the workstring to the derrick floor and make up the required tool.
21) Bring the tool to the height of the referenced flange and reset the depth indicator to
zero.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
22) Pull the wireline string back into the lubricator and lower the lubricator by means of
the travelling block. Connect the lubricator to the BOP and close the bleeder valve
(for surface assembly greater or equal to 10,000psi two bleeder valves in series are
used).
23) Perform the lubricator pressure test to the Xmas tree WP for 15mins using water or
non-freezing fluid then bleed off pressure to zero.
open the swab valve until the fluid or gas fills the lubricator. Check that there are no
leaks in the quick union and stuffing box. When the pressure is stable complete to
open the swab valve.
25) Install onto the bleeder valve a proper scaled gauge or the control line for the dead
weight tester.
closing wheel.
28) Bleed off pressure in the lubricator through the bleeder valve. In case of gaseous
hydrocarbon without H2S, release into the atmosphere is allowed.
In the case of liquid hydrocarbon, the lubricator discharge shall be performed in a
dedicated container; in the case of H2S the above procedure shall be authorised by
the Safety Expert and added to the operating programme.
29) Loosen the connection between the lubricator and BOP, lift the lubricator by means
of the travelling block until the lower connection of the lubricator remains just above
30) Lower the wireline string until the wireline tool is at the height of the derrick floor
level, break off the wireline tool and lower the wireline string as stated above then
break off the wireline string.
31) Lower the wireline string, cut the line approximately 6ins above the rope socket and
pull the wire outside the stuffing box. Spool back the wire manually taking care not
to bend it.
32) The rig down operation is the opposite of the above detailed procedure paying
particular attention to the following point :
a) It is necessary to put back the used components after they have been
b) Perform the same maintenance on the BOP.
8.2.3 Drill Ship/Semi-Submersible

well completion phase, i.e. tubing gauging and depth control of the landing nipples which
are performed during or at the end of the completion running and before the wellhead
installation.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Selection of surface facilities:

sub.
b) ‘T’ member threaded quick union pin x box and 2” hammer union lateral outlet
(i.e. Fig. 1002 or 1502)
depth. Wire size and metallurgy shall be selected according to the characteristics of the
completion fluid and the possible presence of corrosive fluids (e.g., H2S, brine with
corrosive components).
interruptions in the activity. A Light Duty Crew shall be used when dealing with a single
completion on wells of a limited depth. A Heavy Duty Crew shall be used when dealing
with single selective or dual completion with several sliding sleeves, landing nipples,
surface controlled safety valves.
The wireline unit shall be equipped with at least the following:
c) Wire suitable to fluids present/expected in hole as well as for mechanical
stress.
d) Fishing equipment suitable for the completion design (e.g., Wireline grabs, Go
Devil wire cutters, impression blocks, etc.), and wireline string used (pulling
Procedure
rack walkway taking into consideration the logistics of the rig.
test.
weight indicator onto the rotary table floor.
4) Make up the rope socket :
• For Light Duty Jobs the use of a conventional rope socket, making it with
15 turns, is allowed.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
6) On the rig floor:

a) Install the load cell of the weight indicator in an optimal position of the
Wireline Operator so that he can easily see it and in any case on the landing
string and not on the rotary table floor so that not feel the effect of the heave.
Install the first sheave to the load cell so that the wire forms an angle as close
as possible to 90°.
threaded union pin x box and 2" hammer union lateral outlet (i.e. Fig. 1002 or
1502) plus wireline BOP with quick union pin x box.
c) Connect the 2ins Weco connection at the rig manifold for a possible kill.
d) Install the second sheave at the rope of the air hoist or winch.
7) Pulling the wire, bring the rope socket previously assembled on the rig floor.
9) Connect at least one piece stem to the rope socket.
10) Lift the first sheave keeping the wireline string.
11) Complete the make-up of the working string according to the programme or
Company Supervisor’s indications.
14) With the ‘Tool’ at rotary table level set the odometer to zero.
16) The rig down procedure is the opposite of the above detailed procedures paying

The surface facilities are composed of a lubricator, stuffing box and BOP. With a
temporary Xmas tree available, the connection to the lubricator normally takes place by
means of a crossover threaded pin down x quick union box up. Furthermore, the Xmas
tree will be already compensated by means of the lifting frame.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Such components shall be suitable to the operation according to following criteria:

a) The lubricator ID adequate to the max. tool size of the equipment to be used.
b) WP greater or equal to the Xmas tree WP.
d) Additional equipment, i.e., injection nipple and safety check union can be
decided according to type of operation and well conditions.
Wire size and metallurgy shall be selected according to the characteristics of the
completion, formation fluids and reservoir temperature.
The composition of the Wireline Crew shall be qualified to withstand all planned
operations without creating interruptions in the activity. The employment of Heavy Duty
Crew or Light Duty Crew depends on the diameter of completion string, working pressure
of surface equipment, duration and type of operation.
b) Gauge cutter of a suitable diameter to the completion design.
c) Wire compatible to the fluids present/expected in hole as well as mechanical
stress.
d) Fishing equipment suitable to the completion design (e.g. Wireline grabs, Go
(pulling tools, fishing socket, etc.).
e) Shifting tools, running and pulling tools of suitable size.
f) Amerada mechanical and/or memory gauges and all relevant equipment.
g) Plugs for the possible shut off levels and well securing.
Procedure
rack walkway keeping due consideration to the logistics of the rig.
4) Perform a function test of the BOP.
5) Install the crossover threaded pin down x quick union box up. Hook up the DP
elevator at the lifting frame and connect it by means of adequate steel cables to the
motion compensator.
6) Lift the BOP by the eye of the lifting plug and install it onto the Xmas tree.
the gantries.
8) Remove thread protectors and properly clean sealing areas and all threads. Check
integrity of the ‘O’ Ring on the pin.
thread protector. Install a bleeder valve on the lower joint of the lubricator.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
suitable diameter.
14) Make up the rope socket. For Heavy Duty Jobs use the ‘no knot’ type; for Light Duty
Jobs the use of a conventional rope socket, making it with 15 turns, is allowed.
lubricator.
19) Install the loading cell of the weight indicator in an optimal position of the Wireline
Operator so that he can easily see it and in any case on the landing string and not
on the rotary table floor so that not feel the effect of the heave. Install the first
sheave to the loading cell so that the wire forms an angle as close as possible to
90°.
follow the wire until the string runs to the bottom thread protector. Bring the
lubricator onto the vertical axis of the well.
21) Insert the line in the groove of the sheave which is connected to the load cell of the
weight indicator.
22) Spool back the wire with the hoist until the string is no longer on the bottom thread
protector.
26) When the tool is at the rotary table level reset the odometer to zero.
28) Connect the lubricator to the BOP
29) Install onto the bleeder valve a proper scale gauge or the control line for the dead
weight tester.
30) Perform the lubricator pressure test to the Xmas Tree WP for 15mins by using
water or non-freezing fluid then bleed off pressure to zero.
31) The operator shall open/close the wellhead valves and count the revolutions. If the
Xmas tree is of a temporary type (LT-20), the DST contractor will open/close the
valves. Slowly open the swab valve until the fluid or gas fills the lubricator. When
the pressure is stable, completely open the swab valve.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
closing wheel.
34) The Rig Down procedure is the opposite to the above detailed procedure paying
c) Perform the same maintenance on the BOP.
8.3 RIGLESS OPERATIONS

Rigless Operations are the operations carried out without rigs, either onshore or offshore
by using equipment and Wireline Crews for HD (Heavy Duty) or LD (Light Duty) Jobs,
according to the type of equipment, completion and duration of the operation.
It is the responsibility of the Eni E&P Supervisor to give instructions and documentation
required for the operation and in particular:
• Operations Programme
• Completion Design
• Wellhead Tubing Hanger Design
• Last Wireline Report (ARPO-11)
• Last P&T Gradients Report (ARPO-12)
• Type and characteristics of the fluid present in the string.
The Wireline Programme shall report:

• Type of wellhead connections
• Wire type and size to be used
• Design of the workstring to be used
• Maximum expected BHP
• Type and position of the flow control equipment in the hole
• Type of running/pulling tools
• Type of pressure and temperature recorder
• Operation's summary.
It is the responsibility of the Eni E&P Supervisor for conducting operations.

It is the responsibility of the Wireline Chief Operator for the Wireline personnel and
management of the equipment.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
interruptions in the activity. It is the responsibility of the Wireline Superintendent for the
organisation of the Wireline Crew.
The Wireline Crew shall follow the general safety conditions dictated by the Responsible
Operation Manager, or by his substitute, according to both the logistics of the rig site or
platform and the possible dangerous fluids present on location. In the case of one or
more service companies on rig site, the responsibility also includes of safety, as per the
appropriate ‘Procedure for the Issue of Work Permits’ for the local area.
The control of the regulation's application for the Wireline Crew is the responsibility of the
Operations responsible or its substitute.
The Wireline Crew equipment shall include all equipment of individual protection and fire
fighting required to comply with the rules issued by the Operations Responsible.
8.3.1 Heavy Duty Land Operation

Operations defined as Heavy Duty Land Operation are those conducted on wells
completed with 31/2" tubing or higher size, or with surface equipment rated 15K psi or
higher.
The type of work depends on the necessity to perform the equipment rig up/down with a
crane.
The surface equipment shall be selected according to the following parameters:
a) WP and Xmas tree size
b) Max. size of the tools to be used according to the nipples present in the string
c) Characteristics of the fluids present in hole
d) The composition of the Wireline Crew and the type of unit shall be required by
HD type.

Devil wire cutters, impression block, etc.) and wireline string used (pulling
tools, fishing socket, etc.)
e) Amerada mechanical and/or memory gauges and relevant equipment.
Procedure
1) Remove from the area surrounding the wellhead all objects that can constitute
hitch/risk to the operation. Verify that the cellar is free from H2O and/or inflammable
material and the practicability of walkways and barriers.
2) Check the top flange of the wellhead and verify to be in possession of the adapter
required.
3) Close the swab valve and count the number of revolutions to make sure it has
completely closed.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
4) Position the crane laterally to the wellhead; position the wireline truck in the vicinity
of the wellhead and discharge BOP, lubricator, stuffing box, etc. by means of the
crane.
5) If the dimensions of the location allow, position the wireline truck, at 30m from the
wellhead.
7) Close the gauge cock on the top adapter, remove carefully the gauge, bleed off
pressure above the swab valve.
8) Disassemble the top adapter, verify and if necessary replace the ring joint, install
the wireline adapter.
9) Lift the BOP with the crane hooking it up to the eye of the lifting plug and installing it
10) Pull out from the unit the required joints of the lubricator leaning them on gantries.
Check the integrity of the ‘O’ Ring on the pin.
12) Make up the lubricator on the ground or on appropriate gantries without removing
the lower thread protector, by means of the crane. Install a bleeder valve on the
lower joint of the lubricator.
16) Insert the wire through the stuffing box seals and through the rope socket of a
suitable diameter.
17) Make up a ‘no knot’ type rope socket.
18) After assembling check that the rope socket is free to rotate round the wire.
19) Make up the rope socket onto the top of the string, block the wire in the groove of
the stuffing box sheave and pull back the wire until the string is set on top of the
lubricator
21) Apply the lifting eyebolt of the lubricator.
23) Slowly lift the lubricator with the hook of the crane. In this phase the helper shall
follow the wire until the string runs to the bottom thread protector. Bring the lower
connection to just above the top connection of the BOP.
24) Insert the wire into the groove of the sheave connected to the loading cell of the
weight indicator.
25) Lift the wireline workstring spooling back the wire with the draw works until the
string is no longer on the bottom thread protector.
26) Remove the bottom thread protector.
27) Lower the wireline string at the ground floor. The weight indicator should indicate
one calculated. If the check is negative clean the wire and/or manually operate on
the instrumentation as per manufacturer’s instructions.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
28) Lower the workstring at the ground floor and connect the required tool.
29) Bring the tool at the height of the reference flange and reset the depth indicator to
zero.
30) Retrieve the wireline string inside the lubricator, lower the lubricator by means of the
crane, connect the lubricator to the BOP, close the bleeder valve (for surface
assembly greater or equal to 10,000psi two bleeder valves in series are used).
(Refer to Figure 8-1).
31) Install a proper scale gauge or the control line for the dead weight tester onto the
bleeder valve.
32) Pressure test the lubricator with water or non-freezing fluid to the Xmas tree WP for
15mins then bleed off the pressure. If the programme entails several consecutive
runs, on several wells, without disassemble the surface facilities, the pressure test
will be performed only at the first installation.
33) Slowly open the swab valve until the fluid or gas fills the lubricator. Check that there
are no leaks on all the quick union and on the stuffing box.
34) When the pressure is stable complete the opening of the swab valve counting the
revolutions.
35) Perform the programmed wireline operation.
36) When the wireline string is completely pulled out, make sure that the wireline tool is
above the swab valve, close the swab valve and count the revolutions of the closing
wheel.
37) Bleed off lubricator pressure through the bleeder valve. In case of gaseous
38) In case of liquid hydrocarbon the lubricator discharge shall be performed in a
dedicated container; in case of presence of H2S the above procedure shall be
authorised by the Safety Expert and added to the operating programme.
39) Loosen the connection between lubricator and BOP, lift the lubricator by means of
the crane so that the lower connection of the lubricator remains just above the top
connection of the BOP.
40) Lower the wireline string until the wireline tool is placed at the height of the ground
floor, break off the wireline tool, lower the wireline string as stated above and break
off the jar.
41) Lower the wireline string, cut the line approx. 6ins above the rope socket; move
away from the lubricator and break off the remaining part of the wireline string on
the ground.
42) Spooling back the wire with the draw works, pull the wire out of the stuffing box.
When winding the wire onto the reel a man must keep it manually taking care not to
bend it.
43) Disassemble the lubricator, stuffing box and BOP with a procedure opposite to the
installation procedure.
44) Install the top flange on the wellhead; install the gauge, open the gauge cock, open
the swab valve counting the number of revolutions and check that no leaks occur on
the connections.
45) Abandon the location restoring its conditions.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 8-1 - Land Well Light Duty Rig-Up

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
8.3.2 Light Duty Land Operation

These are operations conducted on wells completed with a maximum tubing diameter of
27/8" and with surface equipment not exceeding the 10Kpsi.
The type of work depends on the necessity to perform the equipment rig up/down with a
gin pole.
a) WP and Xmas tree size
c) Characteristics of the fluids present in hole.
The composition of the Wireline Crew and the type of unit shall be required by LD type.
Devil wire cutters, impression block, etc.) and wireline string used (pulling
tools, fishing socket etc.)
Procedure
1) Remove from the area surrounding the wellhead all object that may constitute
having a hitch/risk to the operation. Verify that the cellar is free from H2O and/or
inflammable material and the practicability of walkways and barriers.
2) Check the top flange of the wellhead and confirm possession of the adapter
required.
3) Close the swab valve and count the number of revolutions to make sure it has
completely closed.
4) If the dimensions of the location allows position the wireline truck, at 30m from
wellhead.
7) Disassemble the top adapter, verify and if necessary replace the ring joint.
8) Install the wireline adapter.
9) If the installation of the gin pole is required, the use of protection cage for the
wellhead that should result in good safe working conditions (if the wellhead is not
provided with a protection cage the use of the crane is necessary: see HD
procedures).
10) Install the gin pole closed with chain and chain tightener, hoist the flag on the top of
the upper section of the gin pole.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11) Inspect the crown block, travelling block and rope; hook up the crown block to the
flag on top of the gin pole; extend the telescopic gin pole inserting pins into the
holes till to get to the desired height.
12) Lift the BOP with the gin pole travelling block, hooking it up to the eye of the lifting
plug and install it on the adapter flange. Some Surface Equipment for Light Duty
Jobs is equipped with a flanged BOP. In this case ignore step 8) of the procedure.
13) Pull out the required joints of the lubricator from the unit leaning them on gantries.
14) Remove the thread protectors and properly clean all sealing areas and threads.
Check the integrity of the ‘O’ring on the pin.
thread protector. Install a bleeder valve on the lower joint of the lubricator; screw an
aluminium plug on the thread of the lubricator lower section.
17) Check the stuffing box seals and, if required, replace them.
18) Extend the wire, visually check it and test the integrity by a torsion test.
suitable diameter.
20) Make up the standard rope socket with 15 turns.
21) After assembling check that the rope socket is free to rotate round the wire.
lubricator.
24) Apply the lifting eyebolt of the lubricator.
25) Install the load cell of the weight indicator in optimal position to the sight of the
26) With the gin pool travelling block slowly lift the lubricator. In this phase the helper
shall follow the wire until the string runs to the bottom thread protector. Block the
lifting rope so that the lubricator is on the vertical axis of the well.
27) Insert the wire into the groove of the sheave connected to the load cell of the weight
indicator.
28) Lift the wireline workstring spooling back the wire with the draw works until the
string is no longer on the bottom thread protector.
29) Remove the bottom thread protector.
30) Lower the wireline string at the ground floor. The weight indicator should indicate
calculated weight. If the check is negative clean the line and/or manually re-adjust
the instrumentation.
32) With the tool at the referenced flange level reset the odometer to zero.
35) Install a proper scale gauge or the control line for the dead weight tester onto the
bleeder valve.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
36) The operator shall open/close the wellhead valves and count revolutions. Slowly
open the swab valve until the fluid or gas fills the lubricator. Check that there are no
leaks on all the quick union and stuffing box. When the pressure is stable complete
to open the swab valve.
closing wheel.
39) Bleed lubricator pressure through the bleeder valve. In case of gaseous
40) In case of liquid hydrocarbons, the lubricator discharge shall be performed in a
dedicated container; in case of presence of H2S the above procedure shall be
authorised by the Safety Expert and added to the operating programme.
the travelling block so that the lower connection of the lubricator remains just above
42) Lower the wireline string until the wireline tool is placed at the height of the ground
off the jar.
43) Lower the wireline string, cut the wire approx. 6ins above the rope socket; move
the ground.
44) Spooling back the wire with the draw works, pull the wire out of the stuffing box.
When winding the wire on the reel a man must keep it manually taking care not to
bend it.
the connections.
47) Abandon the location restoring its condition.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 8-2 - Land Well Heavy Duty Rig-Up

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
8.3.3 Heavy Duty Offshore Operation

This is the definition of operations conducted on wells, located on production fixed
platforms, completed with 31/2” tubing or higher, or with 15Kpsi surface equipment or
higher.
The type of work depends on the necessity to perform the rig up/down of the equipment
with a crane.
a) WP and size of the Xmas tree
b) Max. size of the tools to be used according to the nipples present in the string.
c) Characteristics of the fluids present in hole.
The composition of the Wireline Crew and the type of unit shall be of type HD.
The wireline unit shall be equipped with a minimum equipment including:
b) Gauge cutter of a diameter suitable to the completion type
c) Wireline suitable to the characteristics of the fluid present in hole as well as
mechanical stress
d) Fishing equipment suitable to the completion type (e.g., Wireline grabs, wire
cutters, Go Devil, impression block, etc.) and wireline string used for pulling
Procedure
1) Position the wireline unit approx. 30m from wellhead, in front of the trap door of the
same.
2) Make sure that the wellhead is safe (derrick floor, barriers, etc.).
3) Position the crane in the best position in relation to the Xmas tree.
4) Make sure that the swab valve is completely closed and bleed off pressure through
gauge cock set on the top adapter.
5) Perform a function test on the BOP.
6) Close the swab valve and count the number of revolutions to make sure of the
complete closure of the same.
8) Disassemble the top adapter, verify and, if necessary, replace the ring joint, install
the adapter wireline.
9) Lift the BOP with the crane hooking it up to the eye of the lifting plug and install it on
the adapter flange.
10) Pull out the required joints of lubricator from the unit leaning them on gantries set on
the main deck.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
thread protector. Install a bleeder valve on the joint lower of lubricator.
13) Check, measure and mate each component of the wireline string and insert in
lubricator.
14) Heck the sealing status of the stuffing box, and if required replace it.
15) Extend the wireline, check it visually and test its integrity with a torsion test.
16) Insert the wireline inside the sealing of the stuffing box; slip it into the rope socket of
suitable diameter.
17) Make up a ‘no knot’ type rope socket.
18) Check that the rope socket is free to rotate on the line contained inside.
19) Make up the rope socket onto the top of the string, block the line in the groove of
the stuffing box sheave and pull back the line until the string is set on the top
lubricator.
21) Apply the lifting clamp of the lubricator + 2 steel ropes of equal lengths and relevant
eyebolts to about 2ft from the stuffing box.
22) Install the loading cell of the weight indicator so that the Wireline Operator can
easily see it. Install the first sheave to the loading cell so that the line forms an
angle as close as possible to 90°.
23) With the crane lift the lubricator slowly. In this phase the helper shall follow the line
until the string runs to the plug set on the bottom thread.
24) Insert the line in the groove of the sheave connected to the loading cell of the
weight indicator.
25) Recover the line with the draw works until the string weight is off the thread
protector of the bottom thread.
26) Remove the thread protector of the bottom thread.
27) Lean the wireline string on a piano. The weight indicator set in the unit shall indicate
zero. Lift the string and check that the recorded weight corresponds to the
calculated weight. If the check is negative clean the line and/or manually re-adjust
the instrumentation.
28) Connect the desired tool to the wireline string which has been already checked.
29) With the tool at the level of the referenced flange reset the odometer to zero.
30) Retrieve the wireline string inside the lubricator, lower the lubricator by means of the
crane, connect the lubricator to the BOP, close the bleeder valve (for surface
assembly greater or equal to 10,000psi, two bleeder valves are used).
31) Install a gauge of a proper scale or the control line for the dead weight tester on the
bleeder valve.
32) Pressure test the lubricator with water or non-freezing fluid to the WP of the Xmas
tree for 15mins; then bleed off pressure to zero. If the programme provides several
consecutive runs without disassemble of the surface facilities, then a pressure test
will be only performed at the first installation.
33) Slowly open the swab valve until the pressure fills the lubricator. Check that there
are no leaks on all the quick unions and stuffing box.
34) Completely open the swab valve counting the revolutions.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
higher than the swab valve, close the swab valve and count the revolutions of the
closing wheel.
37) Bleed off pressure of the lubricator through the bleeder valve. If the discharge
contains:
• Hydrocarbon without H2S: it can be released into the atmosphere
• Liquid hydrocarbons: it shall be performed into a proper container.
In case of H2S the discharge procedure shall be dictated by the Safety Expert and
set out in the operations programme.
the crane so that the lower connection of the lubricator remains just above the top
39) Lower the wireline string until the wireline tool is placed at the height of the derrick
off the jar.
away from the lubricator, and break off the remaining part of the wireline string on
the ground.
41) Pull out the line with the draw works out of the stuffing box, manually wind it onto
the reel keeping it tight and taking care not to bend it.
43) Install the top flange on the wellhead; install the gauge, open the gauge cock and
swab valve counting the number of revolutions. Check that no leaks occur on the
connections.
44) Leave the platform restoring its conditions.
8.3.4 Light Duty Offshore Operation

This is the definition of operations conducted on wells, located on production fixed
platforms, completed with 27/8” tubing or smaller, or with 10Kpsi surface equipment or
less.
The type of work depends on the necessity to perform the rig up/down of the equipment
with the gin pole.
The selection of the surface equipment shall be done according to the following
parameters:
a) WP and size of the Xmas tree
c) Characteristics of the fluids present in hole
The composition of the Wireline Crew and the type of unit shall be of type LD.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
The wireline unit shall be equipped with a minimum equipment and including:
b) Gauge cutter of a diameter suitable to the completion type
c) Wireline suitable to the characteristics of the fluid present in hole as well as
mechanical stress
d) Fishing equipment suitable to the completion type (e.g.: wireline grabs, wire
cutters go devil, impression block, etc.) and type of wire string used (pulling
Procedure
1) Remove from the surrounding area of the wellhead any objects that may constitute
a hitch/risk to the operation.
2) Check the top flange of the wellhead and verify possession of the adapter required.
3) Make sure that the swab valve is completely closed. Position the wireline skid, if the
dimensions of the platform allow it, 30m from wellhead. For particular applications,
on structures of small dimensions (e.g. monotubular), dispensation from the above,
is only allowed by the Well Area Manager.
5) Close the gauge cock on the top adapter, carefully remove the gauge, bleed off
6) Disassemble the top adapter, verify and if necessary replace the ring joint.
7) Install the wireline adapter.
8) Install an offshore type of gin pole and the flag onto the top of the first section of the
gin pole.
9) Inspect the crown block, travelling block and rope; hook up the crown block to the
flag on top of the gin pole; extend the gin pole telescopic inserting pins in the holes
till the desired height is obtained.
10) Lift the BOP with the gin pole hooking it up to the eye of the lifting plug and install it
onto the adapter flange. Some Surface Equipment for Light Duty Jobs is equipped
with a flanged BOP. In this case ignore step 7) of the procedure.
11) Pull out the required joints of lubricator leaning them on the gantries.
12) Remove the thread protectors and properly clean all sealing areas and threads.
thread protector. Install a bleeder valve on the lower joint of lubricator.
14) Check, measure, mate components and insert in the lubricator.
15) Check the sealing status of the stuffing box and, if required, replace it.
16) Extend the wireline, check it visually and test its integrity with a torsion test
17) Insert the wireline inside the sealing of the stuffing box, slip it into the rope socket of
a suitable diameter.
18) Make the rope socket standard with 15 turns.
19) Check that the rope socket is free to rotate on the line contained inside.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
20) Make up the rope socket on the top string, block the line in the groove of the sheave
of the stuffing box and pull back the line until the string is set on the top lubricator.
22) Apply the support eye of the lubricator.
23) Install the load cell of the weight indicator so that the Wireline Operator can easily
see it. Install the first sheave to the loading cell so that the line forms an angle as
close as possible to 90°.
24) With the gin pole, slowly lift the lubricator. In this phase the helper shall follow the
line until the string runs to the plug set on the bottom thread. Block the rope so that
the lubricator is on the vertical axis of the well.
25) Insert the line in the groove of the sheave connected to the load cell of the weight
indicator.
26) Recover the line with the draw works until the string weight is off the thread
protector of the bottom thread.
27) Remove the thread protector of the bottom thread.
28) Lay down the wireline string on the floor. The weight indicator set in the unit shall
indicate zero. Lift the string and check that the recorded weight corresponds to the
calculated weight. If the check is negative clean the line and/or the manually re-
29) Connect the desired tool to the wireline string.
30) With the tool at the level of the referenced flange reset the odometer to zero.
31) Retrieve the wireline string into the lubricator.
33) Install a gauge of a proper scale, or the control line for the dead weight tester, on
the bleeder valve.
34) The operator shall perform the operation of opening/closing the valves and count
revolutions. Slowly open the swab valve until the pressure fills the lubricator. Check
that there are no leaks on all the quick unions and on the stuffing box.
36) When the wireline string is pulled out completely, make sure that the wireline tool is
higher than the swab valve. Close the swab valve and count the revolutions of the
closing wheel.
37) Bleed off pressure of the lubricator through the bleeder valve. If the discharge
contains:
• Hydrocarbons without H2S: they can be released into the atmosphere.
• Liquid hydrocarbons: shall be performed into a proper container.
• In case of H2S the discharge procedure shall be dictated by the Safety
Expert and set out in the operations programme.
the gin pole so that the lower connection of the lubricator remains just above the top
39) Lower the wireline string until the wireline tool is placed at the height of the derrick
off the jar.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
the ground.
41) Pull out the line with the draw works out of the stuffing box, manually winding it on
to the reel, keeping it taut, and taking care not to bend it.
the connections.
44) Leave the platform restoring its conditions.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9. GENERAL WIRELINE PROCEDURES
9.1 SUMMARY OF GENERAL OPERATION

As General Operations are defined all the wireline operations that commonly are
performed during carrying out of Completion, Production & Workover on wells either
onshore or offshore.
They could be summarised as:
• Tubing Gauging: all the operations relevant to the control of the string
size of the completion tubing.
• Pressure & Temperatures Gradient Survey: all the operations that
regard recording of pressure and temperatures with the well in flowing
or static condition.
• Bailing: all the operations concerning removal of sand or scale from the
inside of the completion tubing string.
• Tubing Perforating: all the operations concerning perforating of
completion tubing.
• SSCSV Operation: all the operations concerning retrieving and
redressing of SSCSV Safety Valve.
• SCSSV Operation: all the operations concerning perforating and
redressing of SCSSV Safety Valve.
• Plugs: all the operations concerning running and retrieving of plugs
• Sliding Sleeve Operation: all the operations concerning opening and
closing of Sliding Sleeves.
• Packer Setting: all the operations relevant to packer setting
• Scratching: all the operations concerning deposit removal of asphaltene
and/ or paraffin.
• Impression Taking: all the operations of taking impressions.
• Hydrates Removal: all the operations concerning removal of hydrates
from tubing string.
• Running in Flowing Well: part of the up listed operations may be carried
out with the well flowing.
Depending on the type of the operation, Light Duty Operation or Heavy Duty Operation,
the surface equipment has different characteristics and different is the composition of the
Crew.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.2 TUBING GAUGING

Tubing gauging is defined the operation of tubing calibration, performed on drilling,
workover or production rigs, either onshore or offshore with use of equipment and
Wireline Crew for LD (Light Duty) or HD (Heavy Duty) job. The operation could be
performed during the completion or well production. During the running of the completion
it has the purpose to check the drift of the tubing, verifying the inside diameter of the
string in particular the threaded connections, and to be certain of the inside diameter and
the depth of those completion elements such as: Landing Nipples, Crossovers, SCSSV,
remarkable to the success of the completion operation. Different shape of caliper gauges
could be used: suggested is the use of ‘Paraffin Cutter Gauges’, because their shape is
such to allow a considerable speed also in fluid, and the possibility to remove possible
small obstructions.
The choice of the diameter and the metallurgy of the wireline is function of the completion
characteristics, the fluids in well and the producing zone temperatures.
The composition of the Wireline Crew must be such to perform all the foreseen
operations without giving place to interruptions in the activity. Wireline Superintendent is
responsible on wireline Crew organisation.
The equipment of the Wireline Crew must include all those individual and fireproof
protection equipment necessary as support to the normative issued by the job Manager.
The wireline unit must be equipped with:
a) Wireline tools enough to rig up two strings
b) Gauge cutters OD suitable to the type of completion
c) Wireline suitable to the possible well fluids as well as to the mechanical stress
d) Fishing tools suitable the type of completion (Wireline Grabs, Wire Cutters,
Go Devil, Impression Blocks etc.), and to the type of wireline string used
(Pulling Tools, Fishing Socket etc.).
9.2.1 Gauging During Well Completion

It is responsibility of the Company Supervisor to furnish the dispositions and the
necessary documentation to the carrying out of the operation, and particularly:
• The programme of the operations
• The completion profile with depth and size of the Completion Equipment
• The height of the rotary table from the reference point (Basic flange or
upper flanges of the Tubing Spool)
• Type and characteristics of the fluids present in the string.
It is responsibility and care of the Chief Operator to furnish to the Company Supervisor,
during the operation all the information inherent the carrying out and the result of the
same. At the end of the operation, the Chief Operator will give the Company Supervisor a
Rig Site Report. The operation of Tubing Gauging during the completion doesn't origin a
self report, but will be reported by the Company Supervisor, on the ARPO_02/B.
The actions to undertake for the solution of the problems that could emerge during the
carrying out of the operation must be approved by Company Supervisor.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-1 - Typical Gauge Cutter
Formality of Execution:
a) Perform the assembly procedure of the surface equipment.
b) The wireline string will be made up according to the well size, preferably 11/2"
and composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar
Proper gauge cutter size for the purpose.
c) For particularly deviated wells and/or presence of dog legs the maximum
rigidity will be not more than 6ft. The presence in string of an Up-stroke jar o
Hydraulic jar will be agreed with the Wireline Superintendent.
d) Assemble the Gauge Cutter to the wireline String and make the zero of
reference for the measurements.
e) Run in well to limited speed (not more than 10m/min) for the first 2-3 joints.
Running ahead at a moderate speed, paying attention to the pull on the wire.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
f) Perform a weight indication pull at least every 500m before reaching the no-
go depth. If the well profile and/or the completion profile require it, perform
weight indication pulls even at preceding and intermediate depth. Perform the
last weight indication a few meters before reaching the scheduled depth.
g) Reach the locating depth very slowly, without performing jar down action.
h) Perform the exact measure of depth pulling out, repeating the operation at
least two times.
i) Pull out to surface the Gauge Cutter to a compatible speed with the tension
on the wire and the type of fluid in well.
j) With the tool at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero meters.
k) Slow down to a minimum speed, pull out the wireline string from the
completion string.
l) Repeat the operation when necessary. If the programme foresees only one
series of calibration, at the end of the completion string running, the gauging
of the landing nipples in the string is performed with a Gauge Cutter having
the maximum OD 1/10 millimetre less than the ID of the first Completion Tool,
and at least 1/10 millimetre more than the ID of the Landing Nipple to be
verified. In this case have particular attention during the crossing of the
restrictions of the completion (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slow
down to 10m/min.
m) If no more operations are to be performed, rig down the surface equipment.
9.2.2 Gauging During Production

The tubing gauging operation, or more frequently, Landing Nipple Gauging, on a well in
production always precedes another ‘Specific Wireline Operation’ and must be done with
well closed.
It is allowed the gauging operation with well flowing only after Wireline Superintendent
authorisation.
For the choice of the surface equipment, type of unit and the Wireline Crew members, will
be considered as per ‘Specific Wireline Operation’ that will follow the calibration.
necessary documentation to the carrying out of the operation, and particularly:
• Programme of the operations.
• Design of the completion with depth and diameters of the Completion
Equipment.
• Height of the rotary table from a point of reference (basic flange or
upper flanges of the Tubing Spool).
• Type and characteristics of the present fluid in the string.
• Copy of last operation report and possible former.
It is responsibility and care of the Chief Operator to furnish, to the Company Supervisor,
during and at the end of the operation, all the relevant information of the execution and
the result of the same.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
It will be responsibility and care of the Company Supervisor filling the ARPO-11
containing the chronology of the operations and all the information regarding:
• TBG and annulus pressure
• Well depth
• Type of bottom sample
• Indications on possible over pull.
Possible variations to the programme are agreed between Wireline Superintendent and
Company Supervisor that will give immediate communication to the Chief Operator.
The actions to undertake for the problems solution that could emerge during the carrying
out of the operation must be approved by Company Supervisor.
Formality of Execution
1) The wireline string will be made up according to the well size, preferably 11/2" and
composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• Proper size gauge cutter for the purpose.
For particularly deviated wells and/or presence of dog legs the maximum rigidity will
be not more than 6ft. The presence in string of an Up-stroke jar o Hydraulic jar will
be agreed with Wireline Superintendent.
2) Connect the Gauge Cutter to the wireline string and pull in lubricator.
3) Perform the assemble procedure of the lubricator and open the well head valves.
4) Run in the well. Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger with very limited
speed (not more than 5m/min). Running ahead in with limited speed, to avoid an
accidental expansion of the slips, having particular care to cross the completion
restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slowing down to 10m/min.
5) Perform a weight indication pull at least every 1,000m before reaching the no-go
depth. If the well profile and/ or the completion profile require it, perform weight
indication pulls even at preceding and intermediate depth. Perform the last weight
indication a few meters before reaching the scheduled depth.
6) Reach the locating depth very slowly, without performing jar down action.
7) Perform the exact measure of depth pulling out, repeating the operation at least two
times.
8) Pull out to surface the gauge cutter to a compatible speed with wire tension and
type of fluid in well. Have particular care to cross the completion restrictions
(Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slow down to 10m/min.
9) With the tool at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero meters.
10) Slow down to a minimum speed, the Operator, placing himself between the unit and
the load cell of the weight indicator, will practice a pressure on the wire, with both
arms, such to perceive and reduce the shot between the rope socket and the
stuffing box, advising immediately and without doubt of such contact to the Chief
Operator.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11) The Operator is responsible for closing/ opening of well head valves counting their
turns. Slowly close the swab valve.
12) Bleed off the pressure of lubricator through the needle valve.
13) Perform the recovering procedure of the tool from lubricator.
14) Carry on with the operations.
9.3 PRESSURE & TEMPERATURE GRADIENT SURVEY

Pressure & Temperature Gradient Survey is defined as the operation of recording
pressure and/or temperature gradient by means of Mechanical Gauge (Amerada) or
Electronic Memory Gauges, performed on drilling, workover rigs, or production wells,
either onshore or offshore, with use of equipment and Wireline Crew for LD (Light Duty)
or HD (Heavy Duty) job.
The operation could be done at the end of the completion phase, or during the well
production. The scope of operation is to obtain the reservoir pressure and/or the
temperature, and the distribution of the fluids in well. During the static profile recording it
is recommended to perform the second last step at the bottom of perforations and the last
step 10m under the bottom of perforations. Recording of steps under the tubing shoe of
the short string in a double completion must be planned in the programme and confirmed
by the Wireline Superintendent.
The composition of the wireline string for dynamic profiles recording must be programmed
as said in section 12 and in any case the OD must not overcome 11/4” for tubing ID up to
31/2".
The gradient survey operation will be performed always after the operation of sample
bailing to obtain an analysis of the sample on site, for the water quality and salinity
determination.
The choice of size and metallurgy of the wireline is taken according to the completion
characteristics, fluids in well and reservoir temperatures.
The composition of the Wireline Crew must be considered to perform all the operations
foreseen without any to interruption in the activity. The Wireline Superintendent is
responsible on Wireline Crew organisation.
The Wireline Crew must have all the individual fireproof and protective equipment, as per
the normative issued by Job Manager.
1) Components of the wireline string enough for two strings.
2) Sample bailer of the size as same as the wireline string.
3) Wireline fit to the fluids present in well and mechanical stress as well.
4) Fishing equipment fit to the type of completion (e.g. Wireline Grabs, Wire Cutters go
devil, Impression Blocks etc.), and to the type of wireline string used (Pulling Tools,
Fishing Socket etc.).
5) Equipment for salinity and pH of the recovered sample determination.
6) Right range Gauges.
7) Crossover: Amerada x Wireline string thread.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.3.1 With Amerada Gauge

The Amerada (Figure 9-2) is a mechanical gauge, consisting of two parts: sensor and
recording section. Sensors could be Pressure sensing or Temperature sensing, with
range up to 30,000psi or 370°C. A recording section could be joined with only one sensor.
Recording duration depends on the type of clock used; the sample rating is fixed; data
are recorded on a 5" x 2" chart; for chart reading a scanner is necessary.
Company Supervisor is responsible for dispositions and the necessary documentation to
the carrying out of the operation, and particularly:
• Operating programme.
• Design of the completion with depths and size of the Completion
Equipment
• Height of the rotary table from the reference point (Basic flange or upper
flanges of the Tubing Spool).
• Type and characteristics of the fluid in the string.
• Type and range of the gauge/gauges to be used.
• Number and depth of the steps to be performed.
• Steps duration.
during the operation, all information suitable to the execution of the operation and its
result.
Eni E&P Supervisor is responsible for data reliability control and for ARPO-12
compilation.
Actions to undertake for the solution of the problems that could arise during the execution
of the operation must be approved by the Company Supervisor.
1) Perform the assembling procedure of the surface equipment.
2) Perform the Sample Bailing operation up to the well depth determination, as per
procedure.
3) Wireline string will have the same size and length of that one used for the Sample
Bailing operation, eliminating any type of Jar. For operations on HP- HT wells, use
of an up-stroke jar is recommended. For particular deviated wells and/ or presence
of dog legs, the maximum rigidity will be not more than 6ft. For operations in HP-HT
wells, recording is performed by two tools together.
4) Make up Amerada Gauge as per manufacturer manual, being sure of stylus and
clock functionality, and interpretation of reference base line for reading.
5) Screw the Amerada Gauge with wireline string and perform the zero reference
depth.
6) Pull the wireline string into lubricator. Perform the procedure for connection with the
well head and the well head valves opening.
7) Run the tool down in well, position it at the ‘zero reference’ depth and perform the
first step. At the same time record STHP by a Dead Weight Tester.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
8) Run in ahead. Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger at very limited
speed (not more than 5m/min). Running ahead with a speed that could be up to
100m/min, depending on the type of wire used, fluid in well, well deviation, having
particular care to cross the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing
Nipples), slow down to 10m/min.
9) Slow down gradually until the depth of the second step, stop for the time planned of
the programme, recording STHP with Dead Weight Tester. Resume running-in
increasing the speed gradually.
10) Repeat step 9 for all the steps foreseen by the programme.
11) Pull out of hole the Amerada Gauge at a speed compatible with the wire tension,
and type of fluid, having particular care while crossing of the completion restrictions
(Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples).
12) With the tool at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero m.
13) Slow down to a minimum speed; the Operator will place himself between the unit
and the load cell of the weight indicator, he will practice a pressure on the wire, with
both the arms, such to perceive and reduce the shot between the rope socket and
the stuffing box, advising immediately and without doubts of such contact to the
Chief Operator.
14) The operator is responsible for closing/opening of well head valve, counting the
turns. Close the swab valve slowly.
15) Bleed off the lubricator pressure through the needle valve.
16) Perform the procedure to extract tools from the lubricator.
17) Unscrew the Amerada Gauge, check recorded chart and verify the interpretation.
18) Rig down the surface equipment if no other operations are planned.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-2 - Amerada Pressure/Temperature Gauge

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.3.2 With Memory Gauge

Memory Gauge is an electronic recording tool, composed of two parts: sensor-recorder
and battery housing.
Sensors can record both Pressure and Temperature, with range that could reach
20,000psi and 200°C. They are classified as ‘Crystal Gauge’, ‘Strain Gauge’ and
‘Capacitance Gauge’, depending on the type of sensing element. The memory is
EEPROM type, and may store, as per last models, hundred of thousand data.
Memory Gauge could be equipped with different types of batteries to work up to 6 months
with temperatures around 100°C.
It could have up to 16 sections of acquisition, programmed with different sampling rate
and duration rate. For gradients acquisition use of a low-time stabilisation type Memory
Gauge, of 11/4" diameter is recommended.
Company Supervisor is responsible for dispositions and necessary documentation to
carry out the operation, and particularly:
Equipment.
• Type and rating of the gauge/gauges to be used.
• Number and depth of the steps to be performed.
• Steps duration.
result.
Company Supervisor is responsible for data reliability control and for ARPO-12
compilation.
2) Perform the operation of Sample Bailing up to the determination of the well depth,
as per procedure.
3) Wireline string will have the same size and the same length of that one used for the
Sample Bailing operation, eliminating any type of Jar. For operations on HP-HT
wells use of an up-stroke jar is recommended. For particular deviated wells and/or
presence of dog legs, the maximum rigidity will be not more than 6ft.
4) For operations in HP-HT wells, the recording is performed by two tools together.
5) Make up the Memory Gauge as per Manufacturer manual, performing the
procedure for programming. Make sure of the recording start using the appropriate
tool.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
6) Screw the Memory Gauge with the wireline string and perform the zero reference
depth.
7) Pull the wireline string into lubricator. Perform the procedure for connection with the
well head and well head valves opening.
8) Run the tool down in well, positioning it at the ‘zero reference’ depth and perform
the first step. At the same time record STHP by a Dead Weight Tester.
9) Run in ahead. Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger to very limited
speed (not more than 5m/min). Run in ahead whit a speed that could be also
100m/min, depending on the type of wire used, fluid in well, well deviation, having
particular care to cross of the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing
10) Slow down gradually until the depth of the second step, stop for the time planned on
the programme, taking a STHP with Dead Weight Tester. Resume running in
increasing the speed gradually.
11) Repeat point 9 for all the steps foreseen by the programme.
12) Pull out of hole Amerada Gauge at a compatible speed with wire tension, and the
type of fluid, having particular care to cross the completion restrictions (Crossovers,
SCSSV, Landing Nipples).
13) With the tool at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero m.
the stuffing box, advising immediately and without doubts such contact to the Chief
Operator.
15) The operator is responsible for closing/opening of the well head valves, counting
the turns. Close the swab valve slowly.
16) Bleed off the pressure in the lubricator through the needle valve.
18) Unscrew the Memory Gauge, check recorded chart and verify the interpretation.
19) Rig down the surface equipment, if no other operations are planned.
Note: In case of operations in heavy oil wells, recording the gradient

pulling out of the hole is advisable.
9.4 BAILING
‘Bailing’ operations are defined as the operations of collecting and/or cleaning the string,
carried on drilling, workover and production wells either onshore or offshore, with the use
of equipment and Wireline Crew for HD (Heavy Duty) or LD (Light Duty) Job, in function
of completion type and programmed operating time, in order to get the evaluation of the
bottom hole fluids and sediments, or the re-establishment of fundamental depths like:
• Top mandrel SSCSV (for SSCSV redressing and top sediments
evaluation)
• Landing nipple (for plugs or slim pack screens setting)
• SSD (for level change).
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
and all the operations that allow to release at the bottom hole or at the top of flow control
equipment fluids like:
• Glycol (for equalising operations)
• Solvent (for particular pulling operations)
• Acid (for partial acid washings).
In detail bailing operations could be performed through the use of:

• Sample bailing
• Sand bailing
• Hydrostatic bailing
• Drive down bailing.
All these operations must be performed with the well shut in. Operation of Sample Bailing
with well flowing is allowed only upon authorisation of the Wireline Superintendent.
The surface equipment is composed by lubricator, stuffing box, BOP and by adapter
flange. These elements must be suitable to the operation to be performed in function of
the following criteria:
a) ID suitable to the well equipment size
b) WP same or higher than that one of X-mass tree
c) Material compatible with the well fluids.
Use of additional equipment, like Injection Nipple and Safety Check Union could be
decided in relationship to the operation type and to the well conditions.
The choice of the reel unit type must be taken in function of the completion type and
maximum operating depth. The choice of size and metallurgy of the wireline is taken
according to the completion characteristics, fluids in well and reservoir temperatures.
foreseen without any to interruption in the activity. Wireline Superintendent is responsible
on wireline Crew organisation.
• Operating programme
Equipment
• Height of the rotary table from the reference point (basic flange or upper
flanges of the Tubing Spool)
• Type and characteristics of the fluid in the string
• Copy of the last operation report.
result.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Company Supervisor is responsible for ARPO-11 compilation, containing the operations

chronology and all the information regarding:
• Well depth
• Type bottom sample
• Indications of possible over pull.
Possible variations to the programme are agreed between the Wireline Superintendent
and The Company Supervisor that will give immediate communication to the Chief
Operator.
9.4.1 Sample Bailing

Are defined in this way the operations of bottom hole depth verification and bottom hole
sample collecting.
a) Components of the Wireline string enough for two string
b) Gauge cutters OD suitable to the completion design
c) Wireline fit to the fluids present in well and mechanical stress as well
d) Fishing equipment fit to the type of completion (e.g. Wireline Grabs, Wire
Cutters go devil, Impression Blocks etc.), and to the type of wireline string
used (Pulling Tools, Fishing Socket etc.)
e) Sample bailer of proper size to the operations to be performed. (Figure 9-3)
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-3 - Sample Bailer

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• Sample bailer of proper size and type for the job.
For particularly deviated wells and/or in presence of dog legs the maximum rigidity
will be not more than 6ft.
3) Screw the sample bailing to the wireline string and pull it up in the Lubricator.
4) Perform the lubricator assembling procedure and the Well Head valves opening
procedures.
5) Run in the well. Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger at very limited
speed (not more than 5m/min). Running ahead with limited speed, to avoid an
restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slow down to 10m/min.
6) Perform a weight indication pull every 1,000m before reaching the estimated depth
of the well. If the well profile and/or of the completion requires it, perform more
weight indication pulls. Perform the last weight indication pull 10-20m before
reaching the estimated depth.
7) Reach the bottom hole very slowly, without any jar down action.
8) Perform the exact measure of Bottom Hole pulling out; repeat the operation at least
two times.
9) Take a bottom hole sample with jar down action.
10) Pull out the sample bailer in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension and
type of fluid in well, having particular care to cross the completion restrictions
11) With the wireline string at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero m.
Chief Operator.
16) If no more operations are planned, perform the rig down procedure.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.4.2 Sand Bailing

Are defined in this way, the operations of string cleaning from sediments (sand). The
sand bailing is defined Heavy Duty operation. Use of sand bailer is possible only in
presence of liquid column above the top sediments.
a) Components of the wireline string enough for two strings.
b) Gauge cutters OD suitable to the completion design.
c) Wireline fit to the fluids present in well and mechanical stress as well.
used (Pulling Tools, Fishing Socket etc.).
e) Two Sand Bailers with size suitable to the completion type (Figure 9-4).
It is suggested to perform equalisation of the pressure in the lubricator, before the
opening of the swab valve, especially if the programme foresees the removal of ‘sand
bridges’ in the string.
composed by:
• ‘No knot’ Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• 1.5ft Stroke mechanical jar
• Suitable sand bailer.
2) Screw the sand bailer to the wireline string and pull it up in the Lubricator.
procedures.
4) Run in hole. Cross well head valves and tubing hanger at very limited speed (not
more than 5m/min). Running ahead at maximum possible speed, depending on the
type of wire used, fluid in well, well deviation, having particular care to cross the
completion restrictions(Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slow down to
10m/min.
5) Perform a weight indication pull every 1,000m before reaching the estimated bottom
hole depth. If the well profile and/ or of the completion requires it, perform more
weight indication pulls. Perform the last weight indication pull 10-20m before
reaching the estimated depth.
7) Perform the exact measure of bottom hole pulling out, repeat the operation at least
two times.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
8) With SB at Bottom Hole release the weight and begin the sand bailing action having
care not to lift the wireline string, acting on the SB piston run, and in function of
penetration rate and presumed recovery, perform weight indication pull and pull out
above the initial top of sediment.
9) Pull out of hole: With the wireline string at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero
m.
Chief Operator.
14) For an effectiveness action evaluation, compare permanence time at bottom hole,
recovered volume and penetration rate, as per the results obtained, set in system
for the operations carrying out until it gets to the desired depth.
15) Clean and redress the sand bailer. Before performing other runs, verify the state of
the wire above the rope socket. In case of long operations due to difficult
advancements, every once in a while cut a few meters of wire.
16) If no more operations are planned, perform the rig down procedure.
Figure 9-4 - Typical Sand Bailer

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.4.3 Hydrostatic Bailing

In this way are defined the operations performed to clear the fishing neck partially
obstructed from sediments, when the sand bailing loses of effectiveness. The possibility
to jar down on a solid surface like the fishing neck of a Lock Mandrel is essential, in order
to shear out the shear disk.
e) Hydrostatic Bailer suitable for the operation type (Figure 9-5)
f) Sufficient spare Shear Discs.
1) The wireline string will be made up according to the well profile, preferably 11/2" and
composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• Hydrostatic bailer of proper size and type.
2) Screw the hydrostatic bailer to the wireline string, making sure that the Shear Disk
thickness is compatible with the max. differential pressure expected, and pull it in
the Lubricator.
procedures.
10m/min.
5) Perform a weight indication pull every 1,000m and the last 50m before reaching the
estimated bottom hole. If the well profile and/or of the completion requires it,
perform more weight indication pulls. .
7) Release the wireline string weight being sure to be to the desired depth. Jar down
once to shear the shear disk. (Figure 9-6)
8) Wait the necessary time for the Hydrostatic Bailers chamber filling. (Figure 9-6)
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9) Pull out of hole: with the wireline string at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero m.
Chief Operator.
14) Before unscrewing the Housing for the cleaning, manipulate the Manual Pressure
Relief; open it with caution, to prevent a possible malfunction of the Automatic
Pressure Relief. (Figure 9-6).
15) For an effectiveness action evaluation, compare permanence time at bottom hole,
recovered volume and penetration rate, as per the results obtained, set in system
for the operations carrying out until it gets to the desired depth.
16) If a single run is not enough to solve the problem, redress hydrostatic bailer and
repeat the operation.
17) At the operations end, perform the rig down procedure.
Figure 9-5 - Hydrostatic Bailer

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-6 - Hydrostatic Bailer Operation

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.4.4 Drive Down Bailing

Drive Down Bailing is defined as the releasing of fluid (solvent, glycol, acid, etc.) suitable
to the dissolving/breaking up of paraffins, asphaltenes, scale or hydrates, onto the top of
a Lock Mandrel. Essential is the possibility to jar down on of a solid anchored surface, to
shear a pin. It is suggested to operate in absence of liquid in the well, if it is not possible.
• Analyse the bottom liquid sample
• The Well Area Engineering in collaboration with the Wireline
Superintendent will decide on the effectiveness and/or possible
interactions between the fluids and the feasibility of the operation.

e) Dump Bailer suitable for the operation.
f) Sufficient spare Pins.
g) Proper containers and equipment for the handling and/or transferring of
dangerous substances.
It is suggested to equalise the pressure in the lubricator, before the opening of the swab
valve, especially if the programme foresees the removal of hydrates or asphaltenic
bridge.
composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• Dump bailer suitable for the operation.
For particularly deviated wells and/ or in presence of dog legs the maximum rigidity
2) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter size same to the tubing drift or having a
diameter of 0.1mm smaller than the ID of the Landing Nipples that will be crossed,
and in each case not smaller than the OD of the Dump Bailer, up to the depth
decided.
3) Redress and revise a Dump Bailer with diameter and dimensions suitable to the
purpose, replacing ‘O’rings or sealing parts, verifying the shearing parts, remove the
Top Sub.
4) Complying with the laws in force on the subject and making uses of all the personal
clothes foreseen, fill the Dump Bailer. Re-screw the Top Sub to the Dump Bailer
being careful not to warp the Body.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
5) Screw the Dump Bailer to the wireline string, doing attention to the possible leak of
fluid from the Equalising Port of the Top Sub, and pull it in the Lubricator.
procedures.
10m/min.
8) Perform a weight indication pull every 100m and the last 50m before reaching the
estimated bottom hole depth. If the well profile and/or of the completion requires it,
perform more weight indication pulls.
10) Begin a careful control of tubing pressure.
11) Release the weight being sure to be to the desired depth. Jar down once to shear
the shear pin.
12) Wait the necessary time for the output of the fluid from the dump bailer.
13) Pull out of hole: With the wireline string at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero
m.
Chief Operator.
18) Redress the Dump Bailer and repeat the necessary runs.
19) At the operations end, perform the rig down procedure.
9.5 TUBING PERFORATING

Tubing perforating is defined as the operation of tubing perforation, performed on drilling,
workover or production rigs, either onshore or offshore with the use of equipment and
Wireline Crew. Due to the delicacy of the operation, it is considered like HD (Heavy Duty)
job.
The use of a mechanical perforator allows to perform only a 3/8" hole for each run and
requires setting, as a support, of a Tubing Stop or a Collar Stop. The field experience has
carried out the separation of the Tbg stop setting, from the running of Perforator, and to
the use of a perforated Tubing Stop. The mechanical perforator is a jar-up tool that
allows, in case of difficulty, jar-down release. In case of multiple operation, it is suggested
the application of a spacer to the bottom of the Perforator, such to use the same Tubing
Stop as a support.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
a) ID suitable to the well equipment size.
foreseen without any interruption in the activity. The Wireline Superintendent is
responsible on wireline Crew organisation.
Equipment
flanges of the tubing spool)
• The Wireline Crew must have all the individual fireproof and protective
equipment, as per the normative issued by Job Manager.

a) Components of the wireline string enough for two strings
b) Gauge cutters OD suitable to the completion design
c) Wireline fit to the fluids present in well and mechanical stress as well
used (Pulling Tools, Fishing Socket etc.)
e) Perforator fit to the Tubing size
f) Proper type and size Tubing Stop or Collar Stop
g) Proper type and size Running Tool
h) Proper type and size Pulling Tool.
result.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1

• Well depth
Operator.
These operations must be performed with well shut in.
Setting Tubing Stop

The Tubing Stop is used as a Tubing Perforator support in wells completed with metal
seal tubing where the completion string doesn't have discontinuity in the inside diameter.
composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• Proper size Otis type ‘SB’ or Camco ‘JDC’ jar down pulling tool
• Proper type and size TBG Stop, it is suggested perforated (Figure 9-7).
will be no more than 6.
3) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter of the same diameter to the tubing drift or
having a diameter of 0.1mm smaller than the ID of the Landing Nipples that will be
crossed, and in each case not smaller than the OD of the same Perforator, up to the
depth decided for making hole.
4) Redress a jar down Pulling Tool Otis type ‘SB’ or Camco JDC of proper size to
engage the Tubing Stop, pinning it with brass shear screws.
5) Redress a Tubing Stop (possible light pinning of reservedness).
6) Assemble the wireline string, and a 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar.
7) Screw the Pulling Tool-Tubing Stop assembly to the wireline string.
procedures.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9) Run in the well. Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger at very limited
restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slow down to 10m/min.
10) Perform a weight indication pull at least 50m before reaching the setting depth. If
the well profile and/or of the completion requires it, perform more weight indication
pulls.
11) Reached the setting depth, with a sudden acceleration of the wireline string run-in
speed, free the slips and engage them to the TBG.
12) With jar down action complete the setting and shear the Pulling Tool shear pin.
13) Pull out the wireline string in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension and
Chief Operator.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-7 - Tubing Stop
Setting Collar Stop

The Collar Stop is used as a Tubing Perforator support in wells completed with tubing API
External upset or non upset, where the completion string does not have Landing Nipples.
Otis ‘F’ is the most used.
composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• Proper size of type ’C‘ Otis Running tool
• Proper size and type of Collar Stop (Figure 9-8).
For particularly deviated wells and/ or presence of dog legs, the maximum rigidity
2) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter same to the drift of the Tubing to the setting
depth were the holes are to be performed.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
3) Redress a Collar Stop Otis type ‘F’ crossing the Release Spring between them and
pinning it to the Collet (Figure 9-9).
4) Redress the Running Tool type ’C’ that will properly engage the Collar Stop, pinning
it with aluminium shear screws to the Collar Stop (Figure 9-10).
5) Assemble the wireline string, and a 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar.
6) Screw the Running Tool-Collar Stop assembly to the wireline string.
procedures.
8) Run in the well. Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger to very limited
accidental expansion of the springs.
9) Reached the setting depth, go a few meters below the coupling were the Collar
Stop will be set, pull the wireline String above the selected coupling releasing the
dogs, run-in again locating the coupling of the Tubing.
10) With jar down action, complete the setting and shear the pin of the Running Tool.
Chief Operator.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-8 - Collet Stop Figure 9-9 - Set the Collet Figure 9-10 - Pinning the Collar
Stop Stop
Tubing Perforating
composed by:
• ‘No knot’ Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• Upstroke or hydraulic jar
• 3ft stroke mechanical jar
• Proper size tubing perforator to the diameter and weight tubing.
be not more than 6ft.
2) Redress the Tubing Perforator and make sure of its perfect functionality on surface.
Pin it following the manufacturer operating instructions (Figure 9-11).
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
3) Assemble the wireline string, make up an Up-Stroke Jar in sequence (or a Hydraulic
Jar), and a 3ft stroke mechanical Jar.
4) Make up the Tubing Perforator to the wireline string.
5) Make sure that the pressures are balanced at the depth to which the tubing will be
perforated. If not, provide for the pressures equalisation.
procedures.
10m/min.
pulls.
9) Reach the Tubing Stop depth slowly without jar down action.
10) Verify the exact depth.
11) Check tubing and annulus pressures.
12) Stop on the Tubing Stop and with jar down action ‘arm’ the Tubing Perforator
shearing the restraining shear pin.
13) Lift the wireline string making ‘Body’ move towards the top, causing the Perforator
anchor slips expansion and the exit of the ‘Puncher’.
14) With jar up action, provoke the progressive moving out of the ‘punch’ and
consequent perforation of the tubing wall, privileging the upstroke/hydraulic jar
action, made up on the wireline string (Figure 9-12).
15) After the tubing perforation the Tubing Perforator disengages automatically.
16) A J55 or N80 tubing, in a vertical well, could be perforated with ten jar up hits. If a
prolonged action of jar up does not perform any effects, or slips are sliding on the
tubing wall, suspend the operation.
17) In case of difficulty, it is possible, with jar down action, to ‘disarm the shearing
system by shearing a safety pin that allows the interruption of the operation for the
extraction in surface of the wireline string.
Chief Operator.
24) If necessary repeat the procedure for the following runs.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-11 - Otis Tubing Perforator

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Pulling Tubing Stop/ Collar Stop

composed by:
• ‘No not’ rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• 3ft stroke mechanical jar
• Proper size jar up pulling tool type Otis ‘RB’ or Camco ‘JUC‘.
For particularly deviated wells and/ or presence of dog legs the maximum rigidity
2) Redress jar up Pulling Tool Otis type ‘RB’ or Camco JUC of proper size to engage
the Tubing Stop.
3) Assemble the wireline string, screw an Up-Stroke Jar in sequence (or a Hydraulic
Jar), and a 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar.
4) Screw the jar up Pulling Tool to the wireline string
procedures.
10m/min.
pulls.
8) Reach the Tubing Stop depth slowly without any jar down action.
9) Verify the depth.
10) With jar down action engage the Tubing Stop. Verify if engaged.
11) With jar up action ‘release’ the Tubing Stop.
12) In case of difficulty in releasing the Tubing Stop privilege the upstroke/ hydraulic jar
up action.
13) Pull out of hole the Tubing Stop at a speed compatible with wire tension, and type
of fluid, having particular care to cross the completion restrictions (Crossovers,
Chief Operator.
19) Perform the rig down procedure.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-12 - Perforating Sequence

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.6 SUB SURFACE CONTROLLED SAFETY VALVE OPERATION

Sub Surface Controlled Safety Valve (SSCSV) Figure 9-13. Operations are defined as the
operations of setting, fishing, redressing, calibration of ‘Storm Choke’ or ‘Ambient Type’
Safety valves, performed on drilling, workover and production rigs either onshore or
offshore, by using equipment and Wireline Crew for HD (Heavy Duty) or LD (Light Duty)
Job, in function of the completion type and operation time.
‘Storm Choke’ type valve is a safety valve normally open, operated by means of a closing
mechanism, activated by the force resulting from the pressure drop (ΔP) due to well fluid
passage through a choke inside the valve. In Normal Flowing conditions the differential
pressure through the choke will be balanced by the opposite force of a calibrated spring;
but in case of a substantial increase of the flowing rate, due to wrong manoeuvres in
surface and/or well head damage, the greater differential force releases the closing
mechanism.
‘Ambient type’ valve is sensitive to the well pressure at setting point: when the pressure
goes under the calibration value, the valve closes.
Re-opening these valves requires the pressures equalising across the same: it can be
carried out by pressurising the string, or mechanically, by opening an equalising valve (
Figure 9-14) that must always be present between the valve body and Lock Mandrel
used for the setting in well. The selection of the Lock Mandrel will be made in function of
the completion profile, using the Landing Nipple fitter to the purpose.
b) WP same or higher than that one of X mass tree
The choice of the unit must be taken in function of completion type and maximum depth
of the well. The choice of size and metallurgy of the wireline is taken according to the
completion characteristics, fluids in well and reservoir temperatures.
foreseen without any to interruption in the activity. The use of Heavy Duty Crew or Light
Duty Crew depends on the completion size, surface equipment working pressure,
programmed operation time. Wireline Superintendent is responsible on wireline Crew
organisation.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1

Equipment
result.
• Size and type of Lock Mandrel
• Size and type of equalising valve
• Type size and setting parameters of safety valve
• Indications of possible over pulls.
Operator.
The actions to undertake for the solution of the problems that could arise during the
execution of the operation must be approved by the Company Supervisor.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-13 - Typical SSCSV Types

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.6.1 Setting
Are defined in this way the operations of setting a Lock Mandrel fit to undertake a Tubing
Safety Valve. Operation shall be performed exclusively with well in static conditions.
e) Pulling and Running Tool suitable to the scheduled Lock Mandrel
f) Pulling and Running Prong suitable to the scheduled Equalising Valve
g) Scheduled Safety Valve
h) Chokes of different diameter and spare spacers
i) Spare ’O’rings, ’V’packing or sealing parts for the Lock Mandrel
j) Shear pins fit to the type of Pulling and Running Tool
Figure 9-14 – Typical Equalising Valves

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar, (the running of a hydraulic/ upstroke jar will
be agreed with the Company Supervisor)
• Proper size and type of running tools
• Lock mandrel, equalising valve and safety valve of proper size and type.
3) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter with diameter at least equal to the ID of the
scheduled Landing Nipple, up to the depth of the same Landing Nipple.
4) Select the Lock Mandrel of proper type and size for the Landing Nipple scheduled,
controlling the dimensional characteristics.
5) Redress the Lock Mandrel replacing eventually sealing parts (‘O’rings, ’V’ packing
etc.)
6) Check, redress and fix the Safety Valve setting parameters replacing eventually the
sealing parts.
7) Check and redress the Equalising Valve replacing eventually the sealing parts.
8) Redress a Running Tool of proper type to engage the Lock Mandrel, having
particular care to the cutting areas.
9) Assemble Lock Mandrel, Equalising Valve, and Safety Valve.
10) Pin the Running Tool to the Lock Mandrel as per manufacturer ‘Tech. Manual’.
11) In presence of fluid with density and/or particular viscosity in well, foresee if
possible, the Running Prong so that the Equalising Valve acts like an open ‘By
pass’.
12) Assemble the wireline string and a 3ft Stroke Mechanical Jar.
13) Screw the Running Tool-Lock Mandrel assembly to the wireline string and pull it in
the Lubricator.
procedures.
10m/min.
16) Perform a weight indication pull 50m at least before reaching the Landing Nipple
depth. If the well profile and/or the completion requires, perform more weight
indication pulls.
17) Set the Lock Mandrel following the instructions of the ‘Manufacturer Manual’.
18) Pull the Running Tool in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension and type of
fluid in well, having particular care to cross the completion restrictions (Crossovers,
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
19) With the tool at 100m, slow down to 10m/ min until zero meters.
Chief Operator.
24) If other operations are not scheduled, perform surface equipment rigging down
procedure.
9.6.2 Pulling
Are defined in this way the operations of retrieving a Lock Mandrel fit to undertake a
Tubing Safety Valve. The operation must be performed exclusively with well in static
conditions.
e) Pulling and Running Tool suitable to the scheduled Lock Mandrel.
f) Pulling and Running Prong suitable to the scheduled Equalising Valve.
g) Scheduled Safety Valve.
h) Chokes of different diameter and spare spacers.
i) Spare ’O’rings, V packing or sealing parts for the Lock Mandrel.
j) Shear pins fit to the type of Pulling and Running Tool.
1) The wireline string will be made up according to the size of the well, preferably 11/2”
and composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar, (the running of an hydraulic/ upstroke jar will
be agreed with the Company Supervisor)
• Right size and type of pulling tool fit for the purpose.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
2) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter size at least equal to the OD of the Lock
Mandrel, up to the top of the same Lock Mandrel.
3) Redress a proper size and type Jar up Pulling Tool fit to the Lock Mandrel to fish,
giving particular care to the cutting areas. Use a brass Shear Pin.
4) Make sure that the pressure across the Lock Mandrel are equalised, if not provide
for the pressurising.
5) For isolated well jobs, or in case of doubts on the real STHP, make up on Pulling
Tool the Pulling Prong for the Equalising Valve, foreseeing if necessary, to pump or
release with Dump Bailer, hydrates inhibitor to the top of the Mandrel in well.
6) Assemble the wireline string and a 3ft Stroke Mechanical jar.
7) Make up the Pulling Tool to the wireline string and pull it in the Lubricator.
procedures.
10m/min.
10) Perform a weight indication pull 50m at least before reaching the depth of the
Landing Nipple. If the well profile and/or the completion requires, perform other
weight indications at preceding depths.
11) Perform the procedure of retrieving the Lock Mandrel as per ‘Constructor Manual’.
12) In case of fishing with Pulling Prong, run Top Mandrel depth, inserting the P.P. in
the Equalising Valve, without Jar down action to engage the Lock Mandrel, verifying
with care the equalisation; certain of the correct operation done, engage, release
and pull out the Lock Mandrel.
13) Pull Running Tool and SSCSV to surface at a speed compatible with wire tension
and type of fluid in well, having particular care to cross the completion restrictions
14) With the tool at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero meters.
Chief Operator.
19) If other operations are not scheduled, perform surface equipment rigging down
procedure.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.7 SURFACE CONTROLLED SUBSURFACE SAFETY VALVE OPERATION

Surface Controlled Subsurface Safety Valve (subsequently said: SCSSV) are defined the
Wireline retrievable Safety valves controlled from the surface through a control line and a
hydraulic panel to automatically shut the Safety Valve if necessary.
b) WP same or higher than that one of X-mas tree
Figure 9-15 - Typical SCSSV Hydraulic Landing Nipple
The surface equipment must include the BOP, the Lubricator, the Stuffing Box and the
Adapter Flange adequate to the diameter of the equipment to be used in well and the
same or higher working pressure to that of the Well-Head.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
The use of ‘Light Duty’ or ‘Heavy Duty’ equipment is decided in relationship to well profile,
type of SCSSV and well head working pressure;
The necessary equipment must also include:

• Manual hydraulic pump having suitable working pressure
• Hydraulic pump for SCSSV functional test
• Running tool and running prong specific for the SCSSV
• Pulling tool and pulling prong specific for the SCSSV
• Hydraulic hoses having suitable working pressure
• Air compressor to feed the hydraulic pomp for the SCSSV tests.

Equipment
• Actual flow rate of the well
• Scheduled flow rate at the end of operation
• Copy of the last operation report and possible previous accidents.
result.
• Well depth
and the Eni E&P Supervisor that will give immediate communication to the Chief
Operator.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.7.1 Setting SCSSV

The wireline string to set the SCSSV is composed by:
• Rope socket
• Tungsten filled stem
• 5ft Spang Jar
• Running tool + prong.
The wireline string OD must not be smaller than 11/2", the use of bigger diameters must
be reported on operating programme and in agreement with the Wireline Superintendent.
The running prong must have the lower end, which is positioned through the flapper/ ball
valve, preferably brass made, in order to prevent damages in the sealing parts of the
SCSSV.
Figure 9-16 - Typical SCSSV Assembly

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
1) Perform the assembly procedure of the surface equipment.
2) Redress the Running Tool.
3) Check the status of the SCSSV to run in the well, in particular the chevron packing.
Acquire Part Number and Serial Number of the SCSSV that will be reported again
on the ARPO-11.
4) Pin Running Tool + Running Prong to the SCSSV.
5) Assemble the wireline string, with running tool + prong + SCSSV in the lubricator.
6) Connect a manual hydraulic pump to the needle valve on the well head that controls
the SCSSV, excluding the hydraulic panel for the automatic control.
procedures.
8) Flush the control line.
9) Run in the well the SCSSV Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger at
very limited speed (not more than 5m/min). Running ahead at maximum possible
speed, depending on the type of wire used and fluid in well. If problems are verified
during the production head and tubing hanger crossing, like obstructions or jar
down action necessity, pull out of hole and check the status of the SCSSV.
10) Perform the setting procedure of the SCSSV as per Tech manual procedure of the
manufacturer, pressurise the control line to be sure that the SCSSV is held opening.
11) Pull out of hole the running tool at the maximum compatible speed with wire tension
and type of fluid in well. Care must be taken when crossing the well head valves,
slow down to 10m/min until zero m.
Chief Operator.
16) Rig up the lubricator, open 50% the well head swab valves, perform the test
procedure of the SCSSV as per document STAP M-1-S-5010E “DEFINITION OF
SCSSV PERIODIC TEST CRITERIA”.
17) Rig down wireline equipment, re-connect the hydraulic control panel to the SCSSV,
restore the well flowing conditions as before the wireline operation
18) The Company Supervisor will take care of the ARPO-11 compilation.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-17 - Typical Running Tool
9.7.2 Pulling SCSSV

The wireline string to retrieve the SCSSV is composed by:
• Rope socket
• Tungsten Filled Stem
• 5ft Spang Jar
• Pulling tool + prong.
The up-stroke jar or hydraulic jar may only be used if planned for the job and authorised
by the Wireline Superintendent. The pulling prong must have the lower end, which is
positioned through the flapper/ ball valve, preferably made of brass to prevent damages
to the sealing parts of the SCSSV.
2) Redress the suitable Pulling Tool for the SCSSV in the well, preferably jar down
operating.
3) Assemble the wireline string, with pulling tool + prong in the lubricator.
4) Connect a manual hydraulic pump to the needle valve on the well head that controls
the SCSSV, excluding the hydraulic panel for the automatic control.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
procedures. With the manual pump bring the SCSSV in open position. If the valve is
a Non-Equalising type, proceed to equalise pressures above and below the SCSSV
before pressurising the control line.
6) Run in the well the pulling tool. Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger at
speed, depending on the type of wire used and fluid in well. At the SCSSV setting
depth, engage the valve releasing the wireline string weight and eventually with a
light jar down action; unseat the SCSSV with jar up action and retrieve paying
particular care to possible over pulls and to cross the well head valves. Verify that
the SCSSV was retrieved, checking the pressure loss at the control line pressure
gauge.
7) The operator is responsible for closing/opening of well head valves, counting the
10) Rig down the wireline equipment; re-connect the SCSSV hydraulic control panel.
The well without Safety Valve must be left with all the well head valves in closed
position. If the SCSSV retrieving is not immediately followed by the redressed valve
installation, it is suggested foresee the planning of a Back Pressure Valve in the
Tubing Hanger.
11) It will be care of the Company Supervisor take note again of the Part Number and
Serial Number of the SCSSV that will be reported on the ARPO-11.
Figure 9-18 - Typical Pulling Tool

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.7.3 Installation During Completion

This operation is performed during the final phase of the completion operation and is
performed with the well killed.
The operation is defined Heavy Duty Operation or Light Duty Operation depending to well
configuration, type of equipment and operation time; in relationship to the above
statement, the equipment and the Wireline Crew must be suitable to the type of
operation.
The necessary equipment must include:
• Top Pulley for the right size wireline.
• Intermediate Pulley for the right size wireline with suitable length weight
indicator hydraulic hose.
• Three way nipple with connection for the kill line, flange for wireline BOP
and thread to be connected on the tubing string of the completion.
• Wireline BOP with ID suitable to the wireline equipment programmed.
• Manual hydraulic pump for the control line test.
• Hydraulic Pump for SCSSV test.
• Connecting hydraulic hoses with suitable working pressure.
• Hoses for compressed air supply.
• Dummy valve.
• Running tool + Proper Running prong.
• Pulling tool + Proper Pulling prong.
The wireline string must be composed by:

• Rope socket
• Tungsten filled stem
• 5ft Spang jar
• Running Tool or Pulling Tool.
The up-stroke jar or hydraulic jar may only be used if planned for the job and authorised
by the Wireline Superintendent.
1) Perform assembling procedures for the surface wireline equipment to be used
during the completion.
2) As per completion procedures make up the landing nipple and perform the
connection of the control line.
3) Set the dummy valve in the landing nipple and record the control line connection
and seal bore hydraulic test, to well head working pressure value,
4) Rig down the surface wireline equipment.
5) As per completion procedures continue to run the tubing string until the tubing
hanger is made up.
6) Perform the control line to tubing hanger connection; record the tubing hanger-
control line connection hydraulic test, to the well head working pressure value.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
7) As per completion procedures go on and set the tubing hanger in the tubing spool.
8) If planned on the completion programme, repeat the control line test with the BOP
stack lifted to uncover the extended neck of the tubing hanger, and record it.
9) As per completion procedures go on and set the tubing hanger in the tubing spool.
10) With the well head rigged up, perform the assemblage procedure of the wireline
surface equipment and connect a manual hydraulic pump to the SCSSV needle
valve.
11) Open the well head valves, run in well the pulling tool. Have particular care to cross
production head and tubing hanger (max. 5m/min). Running ahead at maximum
possible speed, depending on the type of wire used, fluid in well. Engage and
retrieve the dummy valve.
12) Perform the programmed clean up and well testing operations.
13) Redress the Running Tool.
14) Check the status of the SCSSV to run in the well, in particular the chevron packing.
Acquire Part Number and Serial Number of the SCSSV that will be reported again
on the ARPO-11.
15) Pin Running Tool + Running Prong to the SCSSV.
16) Assemble the wireline string, with running tool prong SCSSV in the lubricator.
17) Connect a manual hydraulic pump to the needle valve that controls the SCSSV.
procedures.
19) Flush the control line.
20) Run in the well the SCSSV Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger at
speed, depending on the type of wire used and fluid in well. If problems are verified
during the production head and tubing hanger crossing, like obstructions or jar
down action necessity, pull out of hole and check the status of the SCSSV.
21) Perform the setting procedure of the SCSSV as per Tech manual procedure of the
manufacturer, pressurise the control line to be sure that the SCSSV is held opening.
22) Pull out of hole the running tool at the maximum compatible speed with wire tension
and type of fluid in well. Care must be taken when crossing the well head valves,
slow down to 10m/min until zero m.
Chief Operator.
27) Rig up the lubricator, open 50% the well head swab valves, perform the test
procedure of the SCSSV as per document STAP M-1-S-5010E ’DEFINITION OF
SCSSV PERIODIC TEST CRITERIA’.
28) The Company Supervisor will take care of the ARPO-11 compilation.
29) Rig down wireline equipment. Rig up Extractor to set the BPV.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
30) Run and set the right type and size of BPV in the Tubing Hanger.
31) Bleed off STHP to zero. Close all the well head valves. Be sure that the control line
pressure was bled off to zero.
32) Rig down Extractor.
Figure 9-19 - Typical Dummy Valve

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.8 PLUGS
Wireline Plugs are tools that, run in with a Lock Mandrel, once in there profile, perform a
hydraulic seal in the tubing. They are used to have the well in safety conditions, to isolate
two productive zones in a selective completion, to test the completion string etc.
They could be classified, in relationship to the construction and to the function in:
• Plug Bean (Figure 9-20) / Circulating plug (Figure 9-21) (with hydraulic
seal from the bottom towards the top)
• Check Valve (Figure 9-22) / Standing Valve / Testing Tool (Figure 9-23)
(with hydraulic seal from the top towards the bottom )
• Blanking Plug (Figure 9-24) / Plug Choke (Figure 9-25) (with hydraulic
seal in both ways).
They can also be classified in relationship to the type of operation necessary:

• One run to set- one run to pull
• One run to set- two runs to pull
Two runs to set- two runs to pull.
Figure 9-20 - Typical Plug Bean Figure 9-21 - Typical Circulating Plug
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-22 - Typical Check Valve Figure 9-23 - Typical Test Tool
An equalising valve must always be present between the wireline Plug and the Lock
Mandrel used for the setting in the well. The choice of the Lock Mandrel will be made in
function of the completion profile. The use of equipment and Wireline Crew for HD (Heavy
Duty) or LD (Light Duty) Job is decided in function of completion type and operation time.
The pulling operation of a wireline Plug is only possible after having equalised the
pressures equalisation through the plug. This could be dictated from the same tool sketch
(Plug Choke, two runs to pull), or by means of a proper prong to run together with the
pulling tool, or otherwise, when possible, equalising from surface.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-24 - Typical Blanking Plug Figure 9-25 - Typical Plug Choke
b) WP same or higher than that one of X-mas tree
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Choice of reel unit is take in relationship to completion type and maximum operating
depth. The choice of size and metallurgy of the wireline is taken according to the
completion characteristics, fluids in well and reservoir temperatures.
Duty Crew depends on completion size, surface equipment working pressure, planned
operating time and operation type. Wireline Superintendent is responsible on wireline
Crew organisation.
Equipment
result.
• TBG and annulus pressures
• Size and type of Lock Mandrel
• Size and type of equalising valve
• Type and size of wireline Plug.
• Indications on possible over pulls.
• Plug pressure test data.
Operator.
9.8.1 Setting
Are defined in this way the operations of setting a Lock Mandrel fit to undertake a wireline
Plug. Operation to be performed exclusively with well shut in.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
For the setting of Plug Bean or Circulating Plug, the running tool must be equipped with
the proper running prong.
e) Pulling and Running Tool suitable to the type of scheduled Lock Mandrel
f) Pulling and Running Prong suitable to the scheduled Equalising Valve
g) Scheduled wireline Plug
h) Spare seals for the wireline Plug.
i) Spare ‘O’rings, ‘V’packing or sealing parts for Lock Mandrel and Equalising.
Valve.
j) Shear pins fit to the type of Pulling and Running Tool.
composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• Up stroke/Hydraulic jar (for operations less than 1,000m the decision is
up to the Wireline Supervisor )
• 3ft stroke mechanical Jar
• Running tool (with running prong) fit for the purpose
• Lock mandrel, equalising valve and plug of right size and type.
3) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter to the planned landing nipple. The gauge
cutter size will be same to the Landing Nipple ID.
4) Choose the Lock Mandrel of right type and size for the Landing Nipple scheduled.
Check the dimensional characteristics.
5) Redress the Lock Mandrel replacing eventually sealing parts (‘O’rings, ‘V’ packing,
etc.)
6) Check and redress the wireline Plug replacing eventually the sealing parts.
7) Check and redress the Equalising Valve replacing eventually the sealing parts.
8) Redress a Running Tool of proper type to engage the Lock Mandrel, having
particular care to the cutting areas. Choose the running prong, check dimensions,
compatibility and functionality with running tool and equalising valve.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9) Assemble the Lock Mandrel, the Equalising Valve and the wireline Plug.
10) Pin the Running Tool to the Lock Mandrel as per manufacturer ‘Tech. Manual’.
11) Assemble the wireline string and a 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar.
12) Screw the Running Tool-Lock Mandrel assembly to the wireline string and pull it in
the Lubricator.
procedures.
10m/min.
pulls.
16) Set the Lock Mandrel following the instructions of the ‘Constructor Manual’.
17) Pull out the Running Tool in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension and
Chief Operator.
23) If the wireline Plug run is ‘Two runs to set’ type, repeat the procedure above
described setting inside the wireline Plug the relative Equalising Prong.
24) Bleed of STHP to value pointed out in the programme, check for 15 minutes.
25) If other operations are not scheduled, perform rig down procedure.
9.8.2 Pulling
Are defined in this way the operations to retrieving a Lock Mandrel fit to undertake a
wireline Plug. Operation to perform exclusively with well shut in.
e) Pulling and Running Tool suitable to the scheduled Lock Mandrel.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
f) Pulling and Running Prong suitable to the scheduled Equalising Valve.

g) Spare ’O’ rings, ’V’ packing or sealing parts for the Lock Mandrel.
h) Shear pins fit to the type of Pulling and Running Tool.
Formality of Execution (one run to pull )

composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar, (the running of a hydraulic/upstroke jar will be
agreed with the Company Supervisor).
• Right size and type pulling tool fit for the purpose.
2) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter to the planned Lock Mandrel. The gauge
cutter size will be equal to the Lock Mandrel OD.
3) Redress a Jar up Pulling Tool fit to the Lock Mandrel to retrieve, giving particular
care to the cut areas. Use a brass Shear Pin.
4) Make sure that the pressures across the Lock Mandrel are equalised, if not, provide
for the pressurising.
5) For isolated well jobs, or in case of doubts on the real STHP, make up the Pulling
Prong for the Equalising Valve on to the Pulling Tool, foreseeing if necessary, to
pump or release with Dump Bailer, hydrates inhibitor to the top of the Mandrel.
6) Assemble the wireline string and a 3ft Stroke Mechanical jar.
7) Screw the Pulling Tool to the wireline string and pull it in the Lubricator.
procedures.
10m/min.
pulls.
11) Perform the retrieving procedure of the Lock Mandrel as per ‘Constructor Manual’.
12) In case of fishing with Pulling Prong, run to the Lock Mandrel depth, insert the P.P.
in the Equalising Valve, without Jar down action to engage the Lock Mandrel, verify
with care the equalisation; certain of the correct operation done, engage, release
and pull out the Lock Mandrel.
13) Pull out the Lock Mandrel in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension and
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Chief Operator.
19) If other operations are not programmed, perform the rig down procedure.
Formality of Execution (two runs to pull )

This series of operations is necessary when a wireline Plug having two independent
assemblies: Lock Mandrel & Valve and Equalising Prong must be retrieved from a well.
These types of Plug are exclusively type ‘Plug Choke’.
In the programme must be noted the maximum differential pressure to retrieve the
Equalising Prong.
composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem,
• Knuckle joint
• 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar, (the running of an hydraulic/ upstroke jar will
be Agreed with the Company Supervisor)
• Pulling tool fit for the purpose.
2) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter to the planned Lock Mandrel. The gauge
cutter size will be equal to the Lock Mandrel OD.
3) Redress a Jar up Pulling Tool fit to the equalising prong to retrieve, giving particular
4) Assemble the wireline string with a Mechanical 3ft Stroke jar and an upstroke jar.
procedures.
10m/min.
pulls.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9) Engage the equalising prong and pull it from the lock mandrel equalising the
pressures. The differential pressure allowed to perform the operation depends on
type of fluid in well and Valve and Equalising Prong design, and in each case must
be underlined in the programme.
10) Pull out the Equalising Prong in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension and
Chief Operator.
16) Disengage Pulling Tool and Equalising Prong from the wireline string.
17) Redress a Jar up Pulling Tool fit to the Lock Mandrel to retrieve, giving particular
procedures.
10m/min.
pulls.
22) Perform the Lock Mandrel & Valve retrieving procedure as per ‘Constructor
Manual’.
23) Pull out the Lock Mandrel & Valve in surface to a compatible speed with wire
tension and type of fluid in well, having particular care to cross the completion
restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples).
Chief Operator.
29) If other operations are not programmed, perform rig down procedure.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.9 SLIDING SLEEVE OPERATION

Sliding sleeves operation are defined operations of opening and/or closing circulating
valves with inner sleeves, performed on drilling or workover rigs or on production well,
either onshore that offshore with use of equipment and Wireline Crew for HD (Heavy
Duty) or LD (Light Duty) Job, in function of the completion type and time for the operation
carrying out.
Most of the circulating valves found on the fields, are:
Otis - ‘A’ simple circulating valve (Figure 9-28)
- ‘A’ with the possibility to have the profile of a Landing Nipple type ‘X’ from
which the denomination ‘XA’ (Figure 9-29)
- ‘A’ with the possibility to have the profile of a Landing Nipple type ‘R’, from
which the denomination ‘RA’.
These types of valves have elastomeric seals and are equipped with an intermediate
equalising position, Upshift to Open and Downshift to Close (it is possible to find the
reverse configuration Downshift to Open, Upshift to Close with denomination ‘O‘, ‘XO‘,
‘RO‘) (figure 9-28). They are operated in opening and/or closing with a Shifting Tool type
‘B‘ (BO Down Shift to Open) (Figure 9-31).
Baker - ‘L’ Sliding sleeve with ‘F’ profile Seating Nipple (Figure 9-32).
This type of valve has an elastomeric seal and is not equipped with intermediate
equalising position, Upshift to Open and Downshift to Close. This sleeve is operated in
opening and/or closing with a Shifting Tool type ‘D2’(Figure 9-33).
Baker - ‘CM’. Is a circulating valve with the possibility to have in the upper part, a
landing nipple profile as Customer request.
This valve is a non elastomeric seal type and is equipped with intermediate equalising
position, Upshift to Open and Downshift to Close from which - CMU. The reverse
configuration Downshift to Open and Upshift to Close from which - CMD (Figure 9-34).
These valves are operated with a Shifting Tool type ‘B’ (BO Down Shift to Open ).
Better tools will be developed to the traditional Shifting Tool, able to allow opening of
circulating valves, provided of Equalising Position, in safety, maintaining the Tool
engaged, not allowing the shifting sleeve to move further than the equalising position
while Equalising. It is suggested the use of these tools as soon as the market will have
furnished the necessary guarantees of effectiveness and reliability of the same, to avoid
those drawbacks/accidents more frequently due to a wrong equalisation of the Tubing-
Annulus pressures.
The surface equipment is composed by the lubricator, the stuffing box, the BOP and by
the adapter flange. These elements must be suitable to the operation to be performed in
function of the following criteria:
a) ID adequate to the equipment size to be used in the well
b) WP same or higher to that of X-mass tree
c) Material compatible to the present fluids in well.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
The use of additional equipment, like Injection Nipple and Safety Check Union could be
The choice of diameter and metallurgy of the wireline is decided in function of the
completion characteristics, of the fluids in well and of the field temperatures.
The Wireline Crew composition must be such to be able to run all the operations foreseen
without giving place to interruptions in the activity. The organisation of the Wireline Crew
for such job is a responsibility of the Wireline Superintendent.
Figure 9-26 - Otis Type ’A’ Sliding Sleeve Figure 9-27 - Otis type ’XA’ T Sliding Sleeve
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-28 - Otis Type ’XO’ Sliding Sleeve Figure 9-29 - Otis Type ’B’ Shifting Tool
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-30 - Baker Type ’L’ Sliding Sleeve Figure 9-31 - Baker Type ‘D2’ Shifting Tool
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1

necessary documentation to carrying out the operation, and particularly:
• The programme of the operations
• The completion profile with depth and diameters of the Completion
Equipment
• The height of the rotary table from a point of reference (basic flange or
upper flanges of the Tubing Spool)
• Type and characteristics of the fluids present in the string.
• Theoretical pressure behind the Sliding Sleeve
The Wireline Crews equipment must include all those individual protection equipment and
fireproof necessary to support the normative issued by Job Director.
Figure 9-32 - Baker ’CMD’ Type Sliding Sleeve

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
It is responsibility and care of the Chief Operator to furnish, to the Company Supervisor,
during and at the end of the operation, all the inherent information of the carrying out and
the result of the same. It will be responsibility and care of the Company Supervisor
compile the ARPO-11 containing the operations chronology and all the information
regarding:
• Bottom hole depth
• Bottom hole sample
• Indications on possible over pulls.
Operator.
The actions to undertake for the solution of the problems that could emerge during the
carrying out of the operation must be approved from the Company Supervisor.
9.9.1 Open Up SSD

Open up SSD are defined the opening operations of a ‘Upshift to Open’ type circulating
valve with inner sleeve, independently from the model and the manufacturer, being the
operating principal the same.
This operation can be performed only with the well in static conditions. The tools that
manipulate (opening and closing) the circulating valves are:
Shifting Tool Otis type ’B’ for valves - Otis ’A’
- Otis ’XA’
- Otis ’RA’
- Baker ’CMU’
Shifting Tool Baker ’D2’ for valves - Baker ’L’
b) Gauge cutters OD adequate to the completion type
c) Wireline suitable to the possible well fluids, as well as to the mechanical
solicitations
d) Fishing tools suitable to the completion type (Wireline Grabs, Wire Cutters go
devil, Impression Blocks etc.), and to the type of wireline string used (Pulling
Tools, Fishing Socket etc.).
e) Shifting Tool right type and size.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Shifting Tool Otis type ’BO’ (no Selective Shifting Keys)

Verify on the completion profile that the Sliding Sleeve to open is not below a Landing
Nipple Otis series ‘S pos. 1’, with the same diameter of the valve to operate, and/or of
another valve of the same type and diameter, since, in these cases, the ‘Shifting keys’ of
the Shifting Tool Otis ‘BO’ would engage the profile ’S 1’ of the Landing Nipple, or the
‘Sleeve’ profile of the upper valve, without the possibility to go below (during the closing
procedure), or opening the upper Sliding Sleeve (during the opening procedure).
In these cases a Shifting Tool Otis Selective is needed.
1) The wireline string will be made up in function of the well size, preferably ∅ 11/2”
and composed by:
• ‘No knot’ rope socket
• Stems
• Knuckle joint
• 3ft Stroke mechanical jar
• Shifting Tool type ‘BO‘ fits to the tubing diameter and valve to be
opened.
2) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter having same diameter of the Tubing drift or
having a diameter 0.1mm less than the Landing Nipples ID that will be crossed, and
in each case not less than the OD of the same Shifting tool, up to the depth of the
valve.
3) Redress a Shifting Tool type’ B’ and make sure of the perfect functionality on
surface, verifying attentively: cutting area, diameter and integrity of the ‘Shifting
Keys’ profile. Pin the tool with a brass shear pin.
Jar), and a 3ft Stroke Mechanical Jar.
5) Screw the Shifting Tool to the wireline string, being sure that the ‘Top Sub’ is turned
towards the bottom, otherwise (top sub screwed on the wireline string), the tool is in
closing position.
6) Make sure that the Tubing - Annulus pressures are equalised at the SSD depth,
before and after the opening. Otherwise provide for the equalisation.
speed (not more than 5m/min). Go on running in at the maximum speed possible in
function of the type of wire, type of fluid in the well and deviation. Have particular
care the crossing of the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing
9) Perform a weight indication pull 50m at least before reaching the depth of the valve.
If the well profile and/or the completion requires, perform other weight indications at
preceding depths.
10) Reach the depth of the valve slowly without practising jar down action.
11) Verify the engaging depth of the sleeve with the ‘Shifting Keys’, in positive case
their will be the indication of an over pull.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
12) Control with attention the Tubing-Annulus pressures.

13) With a vigorous jar up action shift the sleeve towards the top provoking the
progressive opening of the valve, privileging, if necessary, the action of the
Upstroke/Hydraulic jar present in the wireline string. Reached the intermediate
Equalising position, there where it is possible to identify it, stop the jar up action,
having under control tubing-casing pressure (Figure 9-35)
14) Continue jar up action completing the opening of the sleeve (Figure 9-35).
15) Once opened, the sleeve will have done the full run, provoking the shifting tool to
release from the same. The releasing of the tool is possible only if the sleeve is fully
open.
16) In case of difficulty in operating the valve, the jar up action, instead of relieving on
the sleeve, will beat on the shifting tool safety shear pin, shearable in jar up, getting
loose the tool.
17) Pull the Running Tool to surface to a compatible speed with the tension on the wire,
and the type of fluid, have particular attention crossing the completion restrictions
18) Perform the procedure of closing well.
19) Perform the procedure of extraction tool from the lubricator.
20) Verify the integrity of the shear pin in surface, to prove the good result of the
operation, otherwise, repeat the procedure, because the sleeve has not shifted all
the way.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-33 - SSD Upward Opening Procedure

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
In case of closing operation, refer to the procedure of ’Opening Down SSD’ or to the
procedure of ‘Selective Shifting type X’.
Shifting Tool Baker Type ’D 2’

The Baker Type ’D 2‘ shifting tool is the tool that allows to operate (opening and closing)
the Baker ‘L‘ type circulating valve in any number and sequence. One of the
characteristics, in addition to the ‘selectivity’, is also its resistance against the differential
lift during the opening operation, (the differential pressure entering in the tubing pushes
the ‘skirt’ towards the top, keeping the dogs of the tool engaged to the opening sleeve,
always that the operator maintains tension on the wireline string).
1) The wireline string will be made up in function of the size of the well, preferably ∅
11/2” and composed by:
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• Shifting Tool Baker type ‘D-2’ fit to the tubing diameter and to the valve
to be opened.
be not more than 6'.
2) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter having same diameter than the Tubing drift
or having a diameter 0.1mm less than the Landing Nipples ID that will be crossed,
and in each case not less to the OD of the same Shifting tool, up to the depth of the
valve.
3) Redress a Shifting Tool Baker type ‘D-2’ and make sure of the perfect functionality
on surface, verifying attentively: cutting area, diameter and integrity of the ‘Collet’
profile and ‘Shifting Dogs’. Give the tool the ‘Upshift to Open’ configuration (Collet in
upper position). Pin the tool with brass shear pins.
5) Screw the Shifting Tool to the wireline string.
care during the crossing of the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV,
Landing Nipples), slowing down to 10m/min. If necessary, perform jar down action
to go through completion equipment where Collet hangs up.
preceding depths.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10) Reach the depth of the valve slowly without practising jar down action. If the
completion profile foresees the crossing of other valves of the same type, the
‘Collet’ will engage the profile ‘F’ in the upper part of the valve, go through it with
light jar down action.
11) Reached the valve to operate, the ‘Collet’ will engage the profile ’F’, unload the
weight of the wireline string slowly, compressing the main spring that will spread out
the ‘Shifting Dogs’. A pull on the wireline string will confirm that the sleeve is
engaged.
progressive opening of the valve privileging, if necessary, the action of the
Upstroke/Hydraulic jar present in the wireline string (Figure 9-36).
14) Opened the SSD, the Sleeve will have done all its run, continue with jar up action
will release the Tool. The tool will disengage only if the sleeve is totally open.
Figure 9-34 - Baker ’D’ Shifting Tool Operation

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
the sleeve, will beat on the shifting tool safety shear pins, shearable in jar up,
getting loose the tool.
16) Pull the Shifting Tool to surface to a compatible speed with the tension on the wire,
and the type of fluid, have particular attention during the completion restrictions
crossing (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples).
19) Verify the integrity of the shear pins in surface, to prove the good result of the
operation, otherwise, repeat the procedure, because the sleeve has not shifted all
the way.
20) For closing procedure, refer to the exact contrary of the procedure above described,
having care to run the Shifting Tool with the ’Collet’ in lower position.
9.9.2 Open Down SSD

Open down SSD are defined the operations of opening a circulating valve with shifting
sleeve type Downshift to Open, independently from the model and the Manufacturer,
being the operational beginnings the same. This operation is executable only with the well
in static conditions. The tool that operates (opening and closing) the circulation valves
are:
Shifting Tool Otis type ’BO’ for valves - Otis ‘O’
- Otis ‘XO’
- Otis ‘RO’
- Baker ‘CMD’
Selective Positioning Tool Otis ‘142BO’ for valve - Otis ‘O’
- Otis ‘XO’
- Otis ‘RO’
- Baker ‘CMD’
One of the principal characteristics of the Selective Positioning Tool Otis ‘142BO’ (Figure
9-34) is the selectivity given from a similar Lower Body to that of the Running Tool Otis ’X’
that allows the opening of an any present valve in the completion. This tool is not
provided of a safety release system, because it is possible to retrieve it in any moment,
without interfering during the crossing of other valves at higher depths.
b) Gauge cutters OD adequate to the completion type
c) Wireline suitable to the possible well fluids, as well as to the mechanical
solicitations
d) Fishing tools suitable to the completion type (Wireline Grabs, Wire Cutters go
devil, Impression Blocks etc.), and to the type of wireline string used (Pulling
Tools, Fishing Socket, etc.).
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.9.2.1 Formality of Execution
Selective Positioning Tool Otis ‘142BO’

11/2” and composed of:
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• Shifting Tool type ‘142BO’ fit to the tubing diameter and to the valve to
be opened.
Figure 9-35 - Otis Selective ’B’ Shifting Tool

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
and in each case not less to the OD of the same Shifting tool, up to the depth of the
valve.
3) Redress a Shifting Tool type ‘142BO’ and make sure of the perfect functionality on
surface, verifying attentively: mechanism of the ‘Selective Keys’, diameter and
integrity of the ‘Shifting Keys’ profile.
4) Assemble the wireline string and a 3ft Stroke Mechanical Jar.
5) Screw the Shifting Tool to the wireline string.
care crossing of the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples),
slowing down to 10m/min. When crossing completion equipment of the same ID of
the Sliding Sleeve to be operated, it could be necessary to lightly jar down so that
the ‘Selective Dogs’ of the Shifting Tool will retract and be able to run through.
preceding depths.
10) Reach the depth of the valve slowly without practising jar down action and run
below it.
11) Pull the wireline string, the ‘Selective Dog’ will engage the lower part of the valve,
with light over pull (∼ 150lbs) the Shifting Keys will arm themselves.
12) Run in again slowly to valve depth, to a correct operation will correspond the
engagement of the ‘Shifting Keys’ to the sleeve with loss of the weight.
14) With a vigorous jar down action shift the sleeve towards the bottom provoking the
progressive opening of the valve. Reached the intermediate Equalising position,
where it is possible to identify it, stop the jar down action, having under control
tubing-casing pressure.
15) Continue jar down action completing the opening of the sleeve.
16) Once opened, the sleeve will have done the full run, provoking the shifting tool to
release from the same. The releasing of the tool is possible only if the sleeve is fully
open.
17) In case of difficulty in operating the valve, it is possible to extract to surface without
interfere with other valves present in the completion string.
18) Pull the wireline string to surface to a compatible speed with the tension on the wire,
21) For a possible closing operation, refer to the procedure of ’Open Up SSD’ or to the
‘Selective Shifting’ procedure.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.9.3 Selective Shifting

For operations of opening and/or closing ‘Upshift to Open’ type valves in ‘Selective’
completions it is not possible to operate with Type ‘B’ Shifting Tool, because the ‘Shifting
Keys Non Selective’ would engage the upper Sliding Sleeves and/or the profile of the
Landing Nipple series ‘S pos. 1’. The solutions of the problem could be represented by:
• Shifting Tool Otis type ’B’ with ‘Selective Keys’(Figure 9-36) for Upshift
operations
• Shifting Tool Otis type ’X’ (Figure 9-37) for Upshift and/or Downshift
operations.
Figure 9-36 -’B’ Selective Shifting Tool Figure 9-37 -’X’ Selective Shifting Tool
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
9.9.3.1 Formality of Execution
Shifting Tool Otis type ’BO ‘(Selective Shifting Keys)

The peculiarity of this configuration is the particular design of the ’Shifting Keys’ that
make possible the crossing of all the valves and the profiles of Landing Nipples ‘on risks’,
when pulling out of hole, without engaging them. Once gone below the depth of the said
valve, the pulling out of the ‘Selective Shifting Keys’ will allow engaging the sleeve. The
releasing of the tool will not be automatic with the full motion of the sleeve, but will require
the shearing of the Shear Pin.
The wireline string will be made up in function of the size of the well, preferably ∅ 11/2”
and composed by:
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• 3 ft Stroke mechanical jar
• Shifting Tool type ‘BO’ fit to the tubing diameter and to the valve to be
opened.
For particularly deviated wells and/ or presence of dog legs the maximum rigidity will be
not more than 6ft.
or having a diameter 01mm less to the Landing Nipples ID that will be crossed, and
in each case not less to the OD of the same Shifting tool, up to the depth of the
valve.
2) Redress a Shifting Tool type ’BO‘ and make sure of the perfect functionality on
surface, verifying attentively: cutting area, diameter and integrity of the ‘Selective
Keys’ profile. Pin the tool with a brass shear pin.
4) Screw the Shifting Tool to the wireline string, being sure that the ’Top Sub‘ is turned
towards the bottom, otherwise (top sub screwed on the wireline string), the tool is in
closing position.
care the crossing of the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing
preceding depths.
9) Reach the depth of the valve slowly without practising jar down action.
10) Verify the engaging depth of the sleeve with the ‘Selective Shifting Keys’, in positive
case their will be the indication of an over pull.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1

progressive opening of the valve privileging, if necessary, the action of the
Upstroke/Hydraulic jar present in the wireline string; reached the intermediate
having under control tubing and casing pressure. If the Upshift action is performed
for closing of an ‘Open Down Sliding Sleeve’, it is not necessary to individuate the
equalising position.
13) Once opened the SSD, the ‘Selective Shifting Keys’ will remain engaged to the
sleeve; continue the jar up action to shear the Shear Pin, releasing the tool.
the sleeve, will beat on the shifting tool safety shear pin, shearable in jar up, getting
loose the tool.
18) The tool with this configuration does not give any indications to the opening of the
Sliding Sleeve. Only with other operations (flowing of the well, circulation tubing-
casing), the opening could be ascertained.
19) In case of Downshift operation, refer to the procedure of ‘Open Down’ or to the
procedure ‘Selective Shifting ‘X’ type’.
Selective Shifting Tool Otis Type ’X’

For opening and/or closing Upshift to Open or Downshift to Open, it is possible to operate
in any situation with a Selective Shifting Tool Otis Type ‘X’.
A moving part of the ‘Shifting Keys’ acts as locator, moving on a ‘J-Slot’, arming and
disarming the Tool alternatively; the operation of ‘Locating/Unlocating’ of the tool is
possible thanks to the Drag between the tubing and the ‘Locating’ part of the ‘Shifting
Keys’. For Upshift operations the tool will be run with a ‘Suspension Tool’(Figure 9-40)
placed under the ‘Shifting’, such to allow the suspension of the wireline string during the
closing of the jar, preventing that the wireline string goes under the valve, giving origin to
a ‘cycle’ of the tool, not wanted. The Suspension Tool is designed to support the weight of
a wireline string with 8 ft of stem, without jar down action. The presence of the
‘Suspension Tool’ for Downshift operations is optional. The tool is not provided with a
safety Shear Pin, because the releasing is always possible cycling the same in position of
‘Unlocating’ in any moment.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-38 - Suspension Tool
Upshift Operations
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• Shifting Tool type ‘X’ fit to the diameter tubing and of the valve to be
opened.
and in each case not less to the OD of the same Shifting tool, up to the depth for
the opening of the valve.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
3) Redress a Shifting Tool type ’X’ and make sure of the perfect functionality on
surface of the Locating part on the ’J-Slot’, diameter and integrity of the ‘Shifting
Keys’ profile. Verify the efficiency of the’ Suspension Tool’, in particular way the
tenacity of the ‘Spring Keys’.
5) Screw the Shifting Tool in ‘Unlocating’ position, and the Suspension Tool, to the
wireline string, being sure that the ‘Top Sub’ is turned towards the bottom,
otherwise (top sub screwed on the wireline string), the tool is in closing position.
care crossing the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples),
slowing down to 10m/min.
10) Go below the valve depth slowly, without practising jar down action.
11) Cycle the tool in Locating position, lifting the wireline string and releasing the weight
in sequence.
12) Perform the verification of the engaging depth of the Shifting to the ‘sleeve’. If OK
there will be an over pull indication.
14) With a vigorous jar up action shift the sleeve towards the top, provoking the
progressive opening of the valve, privileging, if necessary, the action of the
Upstroke/Hydraulic jar present in the wireline string. Reached the intermediate
having under control tubing-casing pressure. Have particular attention during the
releasing of the wireline string weight after the jar up action, to not extrude the
Suspension Tool. If the Upshift action is performed for closing of an ‘Open Down
Sliding Sleeve’, it is not necessary to individuate the equalising position.
15) Go on with the jar up action completing the opening of the ‘sleeve’.
16) After the opening/closing operation, the ‘sleeve’ will have done his full run,
provoking the self releasing of the Shifting from the same. The releasing will be
possible only if the sleeve has done all the run. It is good rule of thumb before
pulling the wireline string out of hole, cycle the tool N° 2 times and repeat the
release test.
17) In case of difficulty in operating the valve, or in case the tool engages sleeves or
nipples coming out of the hole, cycle the tool in ‘Unlocating’ position releasing the
weight of the wireline string and lifting in sequence.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Operations in Downshift
The use of the ‘Suspension Tool’ is considered optional.
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• Shifting Tool type ‘X’ fit to the tubing diameter and to the valve to be
opened.
or having a diameter 0.1mm less to the Landing Nipples ID that will be crossed, and
in each case not less than the OD of the same Shifting tool, up to the depth for the
opening of the valve.
3) Redress a Shifting Tool type ’X’ and make sure of the perfect functionality on
surface of the Locating part on the ’J-Slot’ diameter and integrity of the ‘Shifting
Keys’ profile. Verify the efficiency of the ’Suspension Tool’ in particular way the
tenacity of the ‘Spring Keys’
5) Screw the Shifting Tool in ‘Unlocating’ position, and the Suspension Tool, to the
wireline string, being sure that the’ Top Sub’ is turned towards the top, otherwise
(bottom sub screwed on the wireline string), the tool is in Upshift position.
care crossing the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples),
slowing down to 10m/min. It is possible to cross with this tool also a Landing Nipple
Otis type ‘S’ position ‘1’ with the same nominal diameter of the Sliding Sleeve to
operate.
10) Go below the depth of the valve slowly without practising jar down action (if the
Suspension Tool is on the wireline string, jar down action must be performed).
11) Cycle the tool in Locating position, lifting the wireline string and releasing the weight
in sequence.
12) Perform the verification of the engaging depth of the Shifting to the’ sleeve‘; if OK
there will be the loss of weight of the wireline string.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1

14) With a vigorous jar down action shift the sleeve towards the bottom provoking the
progressive opening of the valve; reached the intermediate Equalising position,
there where it is possible to identify it, stop the jar up action, having under control
tubing-casing pressure. Have particular attention during the pull on the wireline
string after the jar down action, to not extrude the Suspension Tool. If the Downshift
action is performed for closing of an ’Open Up Sliding Sleeve’, it is not necessary to
individuate the equalising position.
15) Go on with the jar down action completing the opening of the ‘sleeve’
16) After the opening/closing operation, the ’sleeve’ will have done his full run,
provoking the self releasing of the Shifting from the same. The releasing will be
possible only if the sleeve has done all the run.
17) In case of difficulty in operating the valve, cycle the tool in ‘Unlocating’ and lift
wireline string.
9.10 PACKER SETTING

Packer Setting Operation is defined the operation of setting one or more packers,
hydraulic or hydrostatic, performed on drilling or workover rigs, either onshore or offshore
with use of wireline equipment and Wireline Crew for HD (Heavy Duty) or LD (Light Duty)
Job, in function of the completion type and operation time.
The surface equipment is composed by: lubricator, stuffing box, BOP and flange adapter.
These elements must be suitable for the operation to be performed in function of the
following criteria:
The choice of the unit is taken according of completion type and maximum working depth.
foreseen without any interruptions in the activity. The use of Heavy Duty Crew or Light
Duty Crew depends on completion size, surface equipment working pressure, time and
type of operation. The Wireline Superintendent is responsible of Wireline Crew
organisation.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1

Equipment
It is also assignment of the Company Supervisor to give instructions to the Rig Contractor
for wireline Unit positioning on the Rig site and for Wireline Crew assistance during the
various operation steps.
The components of the Wireline Crew must follow the general safety conditions given by
the Job Manager in function of the rig logistics and possible dangerous fluids present on
the site.
The Drilling Contractor is responsible to the general safety conditions application by the
Wireline Crew.
The packer setting operation could be performed with one or two wireline runs in
relationship to the completion type and to the tool used, for which they are defined:
• One Trip Check Valve Operation
• Two Trip Check Valve Operation.
Where with Check Valve it is indicated a wireline Plug that hydraulically seals off pressure
from above once landed in the appropriate Landing Nipple.
The setting packer operation is performed contemporary using more service companies
under the direct responsibility of the Company Supervisor.
The setting packer operation does not origin a specific report, but must be described
reporting the packer characteristics, the setting depth and all the tests performed, on the
ARPO_2/B.
9.10.1 One Trip Check Valve Operation

In this way is defined the operations of setting hydraulic or hydrostatic packers, on single
completions, selective individuals, multiple, selective multiples, performed with only one
wireline run.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
e) Right type and size Check Valve.
composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• Upstroke or Hydraulic jar
• Mechanical Jar ( 3ft Stroke )
• Jar-Up Pulling Tool Otis type ’RB’(Figure 9-40) or Camco ’JUC’(Figure
9-41) of proper size
• Check Valve.
will be no more than 6ft.
Only in case of a completion that foresees the presence of the 1.9” ID it is
compulsory the use of 11/4” wireline string.
2) Perform a calibration with a gauge cutter with diameter at least equal to the ID of
the Landing Nipple where the Check Valve will be set, up to the depth of the same
Landing Nipple.
3) Choose the right Check Valve type and size to land in the scheduled Landing
Nipple below the packer. Check the dimensional characteristics of the Check Valve.
The most common Check Valves run in completions are: Baker mod. FB-2 Check
Valve (Figure 9-42) and the Otis Testing Tool Otis type ’S’ (Figure 9-43) and ’N’
(Figure 9-44).
4) Redress the Check Valve replacing, in case, the elastomeric parts (‘O’rings, V-
Packing, etc.)
5) Assemble the wireline string, make up the Up-Stroke Jar in sequence (or a
Hydraulic Jar), and a 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar.
6) Redress a Jar-Up Pulling Tool Otis type ’RB’ or Camco ’JUC’ of proper size to run
the Check Valve, giving particular care to the shearing areas .
7) Slide the Pulling Tool over the Check Valve
8) Screw Check Valve-Pulling Tool to the wireline string and pull it in the Lubricator.
procedures.
10m/min.
pulls.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
12) Set the Check Valve in its Landing nipple reaching the depth very slowly, without jar
down action.
13) Release the tension on the wire in the measure of 50% of the weight of the wire in
well.
14) Perform the setting procedure for the packer, pressurising the string, checking the
tubing and casing pressure as per completion programme.
15) At the end of the procedure, before bleeding off the setting pressure, apply an over
pull on the wire in the measure of the 50% of the weight of the wire in the well.
16) Bleed off setting pressure slowly through the lubricator needle valve, checking the
tension on the cable.
Figure 9-39 - Otis Type ’RB’

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-40 - Camco ‘JUC’
Figure 9-41 - Baker ‘FB-2’

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-42 - Halliburton/Otis ‘S’ Selective Test Tool
Figure 9-43 - Halliburton/Otis ‘N’ Test Tool
17) When the pressures are equalised above and below the Check Valve, some types
of check valve can at this point come out spontaneously from their landing nipple.
Check that this happens controlling the tension on the wire.
18) Maintaining the pressures equalised across the Check Valve, pull out the Check
Valve from its own profile with jar up action if necessary, being aware of differential
pressure.
19) In case of difficulty in releasing the Check Valve, prefer jar up action with upstroke
jar or hydraulic jar made up on the wireline string.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Chief Operator.
26) If no other operations are programmed, rig down wireline surface equipment.
9.10.2 Two Trip Check Valve Operation

In this way is defined the operations of setting hydraulic or hydrostatic packers, on single
completions, selective individuals, multiple, selective multiples, performed with two
wireline runs:
• Setting
• Pulling.

e) Right type and size Check Valve.
Setting
composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• Mechanical Jar 3ft Stroke
• Jar-Down Pulling Tool type Otis ’SB’ (Figure 9-46) or Camco ‘JDC’
(Figure 9-47) of proper size
• Check Valve.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
For particularly deviated wells and/ or in presence of dog legs, the maximum rigidity
will be 6’ or less.
Only in case of a completion that foresees the presence of the 1.9” ID it is
compulsory the use of 11/4” wireline string.
2) Perform a calibration with a gauge cutter of diameter at least equal to the ID of the
Landing Nipple where the Check Valve will be set, up to the depth of the same
Landing Nipple.
3) Choose the right type and size Check Valve to land in the scheduled Landing
Nipple below the packer. Check the dimensional characteristics of the Check Valve.
The most common Check Valves run in completions are: Baker mod. ‘HRT-2’
Check Valve (Figure 9-46).
4) Redress the Check Valve replacing in case, the elastomeric parts (‘O’rings, ‘V’
Packing etc.)
6) Redress a Running Tool of proper size suitable to run the Check Valve, giving
particular care to the shearing areas. In this case it is correct to use a jar down
pulling tool in substitute of a running tool.
7) Pin the Running Tool on the Check Valve.
8) Screw Check Valve and running Tool to the wireline string and pull it in the
Lubricator.
procedures.
10m/min.
pulls.
12) Set the Check Valve in its Landing nipple reaching the depth very slowly, verify the
exact depth.
13) Perform the procedure of setting the Check Valve as per Technical Manual of the
Supplier, leaving the check valve in its profile.
Chief Operator.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
20) Perform the procedure to set the packer, pressurising the string, controlling
pressure changes in the tubing and in the casing as per completion programme.
Figure 9-44 - Otis ’SB’

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-45 - Camco ‘JDC’

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 9-46- Typical Two Trip Check Valve

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Pulling
composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• Upstroke or Hydraulic jar,
• Mechanical Jar ( 3ft Stroke )
• Jar-Up Pulling Tool Otis type ‘RB’ or Camco ‘JUC’ of proper size.
For particularly deviated wells and/ or presence of dog legs, the maximum rigidity
3) Redress a jar up pulling tool type Otis ‘RB’ or Camco ‘JUC’ of proper size suitable
to pull the Check Valve, giving particular care to the shearing areas. Use a brass
shear pin.
4) Make up pulling tool to wireline string and pull in lubricator.
5) Bleed off slowly the packer setting pressure, till the pressure is equalised.
procedures.
10m/min.
pulls.
9) Reach the landing nipple very slowly. With jar down action engage the fishing neck
of the Check Valve to the Pulling Tool.
10) Pull the Check Valve from landing nipple with jar up action if necessary, doing
attention to the equalising position, in case of differential pressure.
11) In case of difficulty in pulling the Check Valve privilege the upstroke or Hydraulic jar
up action.
12) In case Pulling Tool releases due to shearing the pin, a possible wireline string
design variation, or shear pin material variation, or Pulling Tool type variation, is
responsibility of the Company Supervisor that will give immediately communication
to the Chief Operator.
Chief Operator.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
19) If no other operations are programmed, rig down wireline surface equipment
9.11 SCRATCHING
Scratching operation is defined as the cleaning of the tubing from paraffins or asphaltene,
performed with well in spontaneous flowing or during fluids or solvents injection. Due to
the particular commitment required, this operation is classified as HD (Heavy Duty) Job,
independently from the completion type.
It is suggested the use of an Injection Nipple in the part of the Lubricator immediately
under the Stuffing box. The use of a Safety Check Union could be decided in relationship
to operation type and to well conditions.
The choice of the wireline unit type is made in function of the completion type and
maximum planned operating depth. The choice of size and metallurgy of the wireline is
taken according to the completion characteristics, fluids in well and reservoir
temperatures.
foreseen without any to interruption in the activity. It is scheduled the use of Heavy Duty
Crew. Wireline Superintendent is responsible on wireline Crew organisation.
Equipment
• Actual well flow rate
• Scheduled flow rate at the end of operation
• Copy of the last operation report and possible previous accidents.
It is responsibility and care of the Chief Operator to furnish to the Eni E&P B.V
Supervisor, during the operation, all information suitable to the execution of the operation
and its result.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1

• Well depth
Operator.
The wireline Unit must be equipped with:
1) Components of the wireline string enough for two strings.
2) Paraffin cutters of various diameters, the biggest of which must be equal to the
tubing drift.
3) Wireline fit to the fluids present in well and mechanical stress as well.
4) Fishing equipment fit to the type of completion (e.g. Wireline Grabs, Wire Cutters go
devil, Impression Blocks etc.), and to the type of wireline string used (Pulling Tools,
Fishing Socket etc.).
5) Scratchers with maximum OD equal to the tubing drift.
Well Flowing Procedures

composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem
• Sample bailer 11/2".
The paraffins and asphaltene deposition, is located preferably in the part of tubing
nearest to surface. In order to this consideration is suggested do not insert any
Knuckle Joint or Upstroke jar in the wireline string.
3) The weight of the wireline string must be heavier than the weight calculated by
knowing flow rate, pressure and ID of tubing, because the ID of the restriction due
to paraffin deposit, and fluid velocity at that point are unknown.
4) Make up the sample bailer to the wireline string and pull it in the Lubricator.
procedures.
6) Run in the well. Go through well head valves and the tubing hanger to a very limited
speed (not more than 5m/ min) .Running ahead to a maximum speed of 10m/ min.
7) A diminution of running speed and tension on wire indicates that the wireline string
is going through an ID similar to the Sample Bailer OD. Decrease the flowing rate
acting on the adjustable choke on the well head, pull out of hole with care, therefore
run in again at a lower speed than the previous.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
8) Run in hole to a depth where paraffin deposition is over, or, if this datum unknown,
proceed for 100-200m without noticing variations on the run in hole parameters.
9) Pull out the Sample Bailer in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension and
Chief Operator.
15) Maintaining unchanged the wireline string, replace the Sample Bailer with a Paraffin
Scratcher having the finger diameter bigger than 11/2", but smaller than the tubing
drift. (Figure 9-49).
Figure 9-47 - Typical Tubing Scratcher
16) Repeat the procedure like to the points 5 and 6.

17) Run in hole the Paraffin Scratcher through the length of tubing interested by the
paraffin deposit, applying up & down action on the Wire by hand. Pay much care on
the wire tension behaviour: blocks of paraffin that fall from the tubing ID could, with
piston action, push the wireline string upward, breaking the Wire. In this
circumstance the Operator must act on the adjustable choke on the well head to
avoid that the well plugs because of paraffin blocks.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
18) Go ahead with the action of scratching to a depth where loss of speed due to
paraffin restriction is not noticed.
19) Repeat the procedure like points 9 to 14.
20) Maintaining unchanged the wireline string, replace the Paraffin Scratcher with a
Paraffin Cutter having the same external diameter of the Scratcher fingers used
previously.
21) Run in hole the Paraffin Cutter through the length of tubing interested by the
paraffin scratcher action, applying up & down action on the wire by hand. Pay much
care on the wire tension behaviour: blocks of paraffin that fall from the tubing ID
could, with piston action, push the wireline string upward, breaking the Wire. In this
circumstance the Operator must act on the adjustable choke of the well head to
avoid that the well plugs because of paraffin blocks.
22) Go ahead with the action of Paraffin Cutting to a depth where loss of speed due to
paraffin restriction is not noticed.
23) Repeat the procedure like to the points 9 to 14.
24) Repeat all operation sequence, running in hole alternately a Paraffin Scratcher and
the relative Paraffin Cutter, with diameters always greater, until the Paraffin Cutter
with diameter equal to the tubing drift, freely passes through the length of tubing
previously interested from the paraffinic deposit.
25) Pull out the Paraffin Cutter with tubing drift OD in surface to a compatible speed
with wire tension and type of fluid in well, having particular care to cross the
completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples).
Chief Operator.
31) Perform the rig down procedure.
In case that scratching operation must be performed on wells that do not flow
spontaneously, the wireline Scratching operation must be run alternatively to the solvent
injection operation.
9.12 IMPRESSION TAKING

It is defined in this way the operation of Impression Taking at the top of a wireline tool in a
well, on drilling, workover rigs or production wells, either onshore or offshore with use of
equipment and Wireline Crew for LD (Light Duty) or HD (Heavy Duty) job.
The operation is usually performed during the well production, and precedes a lock
mandrel pulling operations or a fishing job. The tool used, ‘Impression Block’ (Figure
9-48) is made out of a steel housing with the bottom part in tender material, lead or
leagues of lead, connected in a sure way to the housing.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
The material of the Impression Block bottom sub, capable of being deformed, is able to
give an impression, in negative, of the wireline tool in the well. The Impression Block
diameter must be such to not allow lead part deformations during the running-in, rubbing
on the tubing wall, or crossing the completion equipment, but at same time must be big
enough to get a better reading of the impression.
The wireline Crew must have all the individual fireproof and protective equipment, as per
e) Impression Block fit to the completion type.
The operation must be performed with the well shut in.

The choice of the surface equipment, type of unit and the Wireline Crew members will be
considered as per ‘Specific Wireline Operation’ that will follow the calibration.
Equipment.
• Copy of last operation report and possible previous accidents.
• Depth of the tool on which the impression must be taken.
result.
• Well depth
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Operator.
Figure 9-48 - Impression Block
composed by:
• Rope socket
• Stem
• Knuckle joint
• 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar.
• Proper impression block size.
will be no more than 6'; the presence in string of an Up-stroke jar o Hydraulic jar will
be agreed with Wireline Superintendent.
3) Connect the Impression Block to the wireline string and pull it in the Lubricator.
procedures.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
more than 5 m/min). Running ahead at maximum possible speed, depending on the
10m/min.
pulls.
7) Reach the locating depth very slowly, without performing jar down action.
8) Open the mechanical jar and perform only one heavy jar down action.
9) Pull out the Impression Block in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension
and type of fluid in well, having particular care to cross the completion restrictions
Chief Operator.
15) Carry on with the operations.
9.13 HYDRATE REMOVAL

In this way are defined the hydrates removal operations along the tubing string and/or at
the top of a lock mandrel, performed on drilling, workover and production wells, either
onshore or offshore, using equipment and Wireline Crews for HD (Heavy Duty) or LD
(Light Duty) Job, in relationship to completion type and operation time. The operations will
foresee a mechanical/chemical combination, of a Star Bit and methanol. For this purpose,
it is suggested to verify in advance the presence of fluid in the well.
b) WP same or higher than that one of Xmas tree
Choice of unit type must be taken in relationship to completion type and maximum
operating depth. The choice of size and metallurgy of the Wireline is taken according to
the completion characteristics, fluids in well and reservoir temperatures.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Duty Crew depends on completion size, surface equipment working pressure, job time
and operation type. Wireline Superintendent is responsible on wire line crew organisation.
The Company Supervisor is responsible for dispositions and the necessary
documentation to the carrying out of the operation, and particularly:
• Operating program.
• Design of the completion with depths and size of the completion
equipment
• Copy of the last operation report and possible previous accidents

• Components of the wireline string enough for two strings.
• Gauge cutters OD suitable to the completion design.
• Wire line fit to the fluids present in well and mechanical stress as well.
• Fishing equipment fit to the type of completion (e.g.: Wireline Grabs,
Wire Cutters, Go Devil, Impression Blocks etc.), and to the type of
wireline string used (Pulling Tools, Fishing Socket etc.).
• Star Bit fit to the tubing size.
result.
The Eni E&P Supervisor is responsible for the ARPO-11 compilation, containing the
operations chronology and all the information regarding:
• Well depth
• Indications of possible overpull.
It is suggested to perform well head greasing before and after the use of the methanol.
Provide to pumping, or to ‘trap injection’ of methanol (in absence of fluid), to facilitate the
mechanical action of star bit. Make sure that the pressures are equalised across the
hydrates plug, in other case provide to pressurising the tubing. It is suggested to equalise
pressure in the lubricator, before opening the swab valve.
and the Company Supervisor that will give immediate communication to the Chief
Operator.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
If methanol is not available and fluids are presents in well, it is suggested the use of
glycol, and eventually of a Drive Down Bailer.
2) The wireline string will be made up according to the well size, preferably 11/2” and
composed by:
• ‘no knot’ rope socket
• stem
• knuckle joint
• 3 ft stroke mechanical jar
• star bit of size, dimension and design suitable for the purpose
3) Make up the star bit to the wireline string and pull it in the lubricator.
4) Perform the methanol injection in quantity depending on tubing size and hydrates
plug depth
procedures.
more than 5 m/min). Running ahead at maximum possible speed, depending on the
completion restrictions(Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slow down to 10
m/min.
7) Perform a weight indication pull at least 50 m before reaching the setting depth. If
pulls.
8) Reach the planned depth very slowly, without performing jar down action.
9) Perform, pulling out, the exact measure of bottom hole, repeating the operation at
least two times.
10) Start the tubing pressures control with care.
11) Begin a strong jar down action, verifying the possible advancement, checking the
wire line string weight pulling out, bringing it above the initial depth. Check
continuously the behaviour of the STHP.
12) Go ahead till the complete hydrates removal or till the Star Bit action is over.
14) With the Wire Line String at 100 m, slow down to 10 m/min until zero m.
Chief Operator.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
19) If the first run is not enough to complete the operation, change type and size of Star
Bit and repeat the procedure from steps 3 to 18.
20) For an evaluation of the action effectiveness, compare size and design of the star
bit, time at the bottom, penetration rate; in relationship of the results obtained, set
the system for the operations carrying on until the depth desired is reached.
21) If necessary verify the tubing inside diameter with a gauge cutter and/or reaching
the top of the Lock Mandrel with an Impression Block.
22) At the end of the operations, perform the rig down procedure.
Figure 9-49 - Star Bit

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10. SPECIFIC FLOW CONTROL PROCEDURES
This section contains the procedures for preparation, installation and retrieval of the most
common flow controls used in Eni E&P’s wireline activities.
Note: As the manufacturers make alterations to equipment designs and

the tools used for running and pulling flow control devices, it is
essential that the latest manufacturer’s data sheets are used
otherwise serious problems may arise.
10.1 OTIS ’W’ LOCK MANDREL

The Otis ‘W’ slip lock is normally used in wells completed without modern day landing
nipples. It is set in the well by gripping the tubing wall and has a relatively low pressure
differential rating, i.e. maximum 1,500psi from below only.
It is used in conjunction with a variety of flow control devices attached to the bottom of the
lock mandrel but is mainly used with a plug as a plugging assembly or with a SSCSV as a
sub-surface controlled safety valve system.
Although there is a selection of devices which can be attached to a ‘W’ lock with various
equalising subs, the running and pulling procedures are the same for both plugs and
SSCSV assemblies.
10.1.1 Equipment Required

The following equipment is required for running and pulling a ‘W’ lock:
a) ‘W’ lock mandrel
b) Equalising device
c) Specific flow control
d) ‘W’ running tool
e) ‘RB’ pulling tool
f) Equalising prong.
The following Table 10-a shows the most common sizes of locks and the corresponding
running and pulling tools.
Part No: Tubing OD Slips Slips Min ID Fish Neck Running Pulling P/T Thread
Expanded Retracted Tool Tool
10WO18 2.375 2.062 1.859 0,4770833 1.375 41WO13 40RB17 3
1 /16 x 14
10WO22 2.875 2.530 2.296 0,6076389 1.750 41WO14 40RB18 9
1 /16 x 12
10WO23 3.500 3.080 2.834 1.375 2.318 41WO22 40RB19 2 x 12
10WO34 4.000 3.500 3.281 1.750 2.750 41WO30 40RB30 1
1 /4 x 12
All dimensions are in inches.
Table 10-a - Otis ‘W’ Lock Mandrel Equipment
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.1.2 Redressing/Preparation
Refer to Figure 10-1.
1) Disassemble both the lock and running tool, inspect and refurbish in accordance
with the manufacturer’s technical instructions.
2) Clean all components and lubricate the thread connections.
3) Re-assemble the lock mandrel and running tool.
4) Attach the appropriate equalising sub.
5) Attach the assembly to the flow control.
6) Check the running tool collet is free to move. Ensure the old shear pins are
removed.
7) Install the collet into the lock’s internal fish neck.
8) Move the core down behind the collet and install two shear pins.
9) Rotate the shear pin cover to prevent the broken shear pins falling onto the lock
mandrel after setting.
10.1.3 Running Procedure

Note: The slips slide down the wall of the tubing as the lock is run in the
hole.
1) When the anchoring depth is reached, pull back upwards to engage the slips to the
tubing wall and then jar upwards to fully make the taper bite the slips into the tubing.
2) Continue upward jarring to shear the pins between the mandrel body and the taper
allowing the body to move upwards expanding the packing element.
3) Continue jarring upwards shearing the pins in the running tool, releasing it from the
lock.
4) Pull out of the well.
Caution: Do not allow the toolstring to sit back down on the lock otherwise it
may accidentally release the lock.
10.1.4 Pulling Procedure

1) Attach the appropriate equalising prong to the pulling tool. The prong size depends
upon the type of flow control attached to the ‘W’ lock being pulled.
2) Run in the hole until just above the lock then run in gently to engage the pulling tool
into the lock which will open the equalising valve.
3) Wait until the equalisation has been completed then jar downwards to move the
taper from behind the slips and the cone from behind the sealing element. During
this the pulling tool will engage the external pulling fishing neck.
4) Pull up gently to ensure the lock is free and then pull out of the hole.
Note: Never use a ‘RS’ pulling tool as the reach will allow contact of the
skirt on the fishing neck further tightening the slips on the tubing.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Note: As the mandrel must be able to move downwards to release the

taper from behind the slips, never set a collar or any other device
below a ‘W’ lock.
Figure 10-1 - ‘W’ Lock Mandrel

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.2 OTIS ‘D’ COLLAR LOCK MANDREL

The ‘D’ collar lock has been designed to lock into collar recesses in, either, API external
upset or non-upset tubing. It is not able to be set inside any tubing which does not have a
recess such as premium tubing.
The collar lock has the following features:
• Can set in any collar recess.
• Will hold 5,000psi from above or below.
• Contains a pressure set and pressure balanced element.
• The element expansion can be adjusted to seal in varying tubing
weights. (Achieved by varying the number of spacers beneath the
expander element).
It is Eni E&P’s policy to pre-install a collar lock or tubing stop on joint below the setting
depth for the ‘D’ lock mandrel in order to prevent accidental dropping of the mandrel.
The pressure set and balanced design includes ‘O’ rings on each side of the packing
element which are forced by pressure from above or below against split rings which in
turn energise the element. These rings must be inserted on the element side of the ‘O’
ring. This enables the ‘O’ rings to act as one way seals allowing pressure to reach the
centre of the element but be contained by the downstream ‘O’ ring. On release of
pressure it is able to release and, therefore balance the pressure through the same
manner.
Similar to the ‘W’ lock, many different flow controls can be attached to the bottom of the
lock which also requires the use of an equalising valve. Using the manufacturer’s
technical literature, the appropriate running/pulling tools and prongs can be selected.
10.2.1 Equipment Required

The following equipment is required for running or pulling a ‘D’ lock mandrel assembly:
a) Collar or tubing stop.
b) Collar or tubing stop running tool.
c) Collar or tubing stop pulling tool.
d) ‘D’ lock mandrel
e) Equalising sub
f) Flow control
g) ‘DO’ running tool
h) ‘GRL’ pulling tool
i) Equalising prong.
The following Table 10-b gives the mot common sizes of locks and the corresponding
running and pulling tools.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Lock Dog Element Tubing OD OD Dogs Inside Fish Bottom Running Pulling P/T Thread
Part No. Part No. Retracted Neck Adapter Tool Tool
310DO37 310DO47 2.375 1.843 310DO83 310DO144 41DO10 40GR1 3
1 /16 x 14
pin
310DO30 310DO49 2.875 2.281 310DO75 310DO145 41DO11 40GR4 9
1 /16 x 12
pin
310DO58 310DO57 3.500 2.844 310DO129 310DO126 41DO09 40GR14 2 x 12 pin
310DO67 310DO68 4.500 3.800 310DO163 None 41DO15 40GR26 3 /16 x

1
12SLB Box

Table 10-b - Otis ‘D’ Lock Mandrel Equipment
10.2.2 Redressing/Preparation
1) Disassemble both the lock and running tool, inspect and refurbish in accordance
with the manufacturer’s technical instructions.
2) Clean all components and lubricate the thread connections.
3) Re-assemble the lock mandrel and running tool.
4) Attach the appropriate equalising sub.
5) Attach the assembly to the flow control.
6) Check the running tool collet is free to move. Ensure the old shear pins are
removed.
7) Install the collet into the running recess below the ‘locking sleeve’ in the lock.
8) Move the core down behind the collet and install the shear pin.
9) Rotate the shear pin cover to prevent the broken shear pin pieces falling onto the
lock mandrel after setting.

1) Pre-install a tubing or collar stop one joint depth below the planned setting depth of
the ‘D’ lock mandrel (refer to section 9).
2) Pull the collar or tubing stop running tool.
3) Pick up and make up the ‘D’ lock mandrel assembly to the toolstring.
4) Run the assembly in the hole and stop approximately one joint above the desired
setting depth.
5) Pull the assembly back up slowly until a collar recess is located. Do not pull more
than 75 to 100lbs at this stage.
6) Record the depth at this point and then again at the ‘target collar’. This ensures that
the target collar depth is never being exceeded.
7) Tap gently with the jars to move the lock back downwards to approximately three
meters below the desired setting depth then pull back up to locate the setting collar
and pull 200 to 300lbs to cause a friction bite in the lock.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
8) Close the jars slowly without jarring.

9) Jar upwards now to fully lock the collet into the recess and expand the element.
10) Before shearing off the running tool, jar down slightly to ensure the lock is properly
set. If not properly set, repeat the steps above.
11) Jar upward to shear the running tool shear pin and release from the lock. Do not tag
the lock again as there is still a risk of releasing the lock.

1) Select the appropriate equalising prong to suit the flow control attached to the lock
and attach it to the pulling tool.
2) Run in the hole to just above the lock and then gently lower into the lock causing
the equalising valve to open.
3) Wait until the pressure is equalised then jar downwards so the core extension on
the ‘GLR’ knocks the locking sleeve downwards releasing the element and collet.
4) Pull out of the hole.
Figure 10-2 - ‘D’ Lock Mandrel

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.3 OTIS TYPE ‘S’ & ‘T’ LOCK MANDREL

The Otis type ‘S’ and ‘T’ lock mandrels are installed in respective ‘S’ and ‘T’ Landing
Nipples installed in the tubing string.
The system is limited to a maximum of seven landing nipples of the same diameter seal
bore within one tubing string. The difference in each is the location profile of the individual
nipple.
Any combination of position numbers may be used provided they are installed in
numerical sequence, with the lowest position number being placed deepest in the well
The ‘S’ & ‘T’ lock mandrels consists of two basic sub-assemblies, the lock assembly and
the locator assembly.
The lock assembly consists of the locking dogs which are mounted around the tapered
mandrel and which are suspended from the dog carrier. The dogs and dog carrier are
retained on the mandrel by the carrier mandrel.
The lower end of the mandrel provides a place for the packing assembly to be installed,
and internal thread which is used to attach the locator assembly to the lock assembly.
The locator assembly consists of two locator keys mounted around a locator mandrel.
Each key is outwardly spring loaded from the mandrel by an individual spring mounted
between the key and the mandrel. The upper and lower key retainers keep the keys
linked together as a unit on the mandrel, the lower ring is used to retain the unit on the
mandrel.
The ‘S’ & ‘T’ lock mandrels are run on ’either’ a type ‘T’ or type ‘SP’ running tool. If the
device being run requires a running prong to provide fluid bypass then the type ‘T’
running tool must be used as the type ‘SP’ running tool does not have a threaded
receptacle for the running prong.
Note: If running a ‘PS’ plug (an integral ‘S’ lock mandrel with a prong type
equalising device), the ‘SP’ running tool must be used.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 10-3 - Mandrel Positions
10.3.1 Disassembly Procedure

1) Move the dog carrier to its uppermost position and grasp the lock mandrel
horizontally in the round jaws of the vice. Be careful to avoid vice damage to the
packing or the dogs.
2) Unscrew and remove the ring this allows the lower key retainer to slide off the lower
end of the mandrel and allows the keys and key springs to fall of the mandrel.
3) Place a wrench on the key mandrel and remove it from the lock mandrel. The upper
key retainer will slide off the upper end of the key mandrel.
4) The packing assembly can now be removed from the locking mandrel.
Note: Disassembly of the locking section should not be done at field

locations. The thread joint between the carrier mandrel and lock
mandrel is made up tight with Loctite compound.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.3.2 Assembly/Preparation
1) Thoroughly clean and inspect all parts for wear or damage.
2) Move the dog carrier to its uppermost position and grip the lock mandrel horizontally
in the round jaws of the vice. Be careful to avoid vice damage to the packing or the
dogs.
3) Install the packing stack and pick up the locator mandrel and slide the upper key
retainer slotted end first, onto the upper end of the locator mandrel. Note that the
upper key retainer is shorter that the lower key retainer. The upper key retainer will
not fit onto the lower end of the locator mandrel.
4) With the upper key retainer on the locator mandrel, screw the locator mandrel onto
the lock mandrel and tighten.
5) Note that both the upper and lower key retainers each have two deep slots and two
shallow slots facing the keys. Each key has one wide lug and two narrow lugs.
6) When assembling the locator assembly, the single wide lug must always be
installed in the deepest slot in each key retainer.
7) Position a key spring in each key; be sure that the both free ends of each spring are
in the holes provided in the key. With the springs in place in the keys place the keys
onto the locator mandrel and slide the upper ends of the keys into the slots of the
upper key retainer. Make sure that the 90° locating shoulder on each key is facing
the lower end of the mandrel assembly.
8) While holding the keys in the collapsed position against the springs, slide the lower
key retainer over the lower end of the locator mandrel and onto the lower end of the
keys.
9) Screw the retainer ring onto the locator mandrel and tighten lightly, do not over-
tighten.

1) Make up the appropriate equalising assembly and flow control device onto the lock
mandrel.
2) Attach the type ‘T’ or ‘SP’ running tool to the lock mandrel.
3) Lower the lock mandrel into the well until it reaches the nipple with the locator
recess that matches the profile of the keys.
4) At this point, the spring loaded keys will move outwardly and select the recesses in
the lower portion of the nipple, causing the assembly to stop.
5) Jar downward to shear the top pin in the running tool. After the top pin is sheared,
the sleeve on the running tool moves down and allows the collet to open and
release from the fishing neck on the lock mandrel.
6) The dog carrier and dogs on the lock mandrel drop down to a position adjacent to
the locking grove in the nipple.
7) Pull a 250lb overpull above toolstring weight. If the lock mandrel remains in place,
the upward pull moves the tapered portion of the lock mandrel will push the locking
dogs out into the locking grove in the nipple to lock the assembly in place.
8) Jar upwards to shear the lower pins in the running tool to release it from the running
neck of the lock mandrel; pull out of hole.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1

1) Prior to pulling the flow control device, ensure the correct equalising assembly is
made up for the flow control device.
2) Attach the type ‘RS’ pulling tool to the regular wireline tool string and lower it into
the well until the mandrel assembly is contacted opening the equalising path.
3) Allow time for equalisation.
4) Jar down lightly to unlock the assembly and to engage the pulling tool onto the
fishing neck.
5) Jar upwardly to remove the lock assembly from the landing nipple.
Note: The fishing neck cannot be engaged by the pulling tool until the
mandrel assembly is forced down to the unlocked position.
Figure 10-4 - ‘S’ and ‘T’ Lock Mandrel

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.4 OTIS TYPE ‘X’ & ’XN’ LOCK MANDRELS

The ‘X’ lock mandrel is a selective type lock mandrel designed to locate and lock in a
compatible Otis ‘X’ nipple. This lock mandrel can be run in selective or non-selective
modes, determined prior to running by the position of the running tool. This lock mandrel
is run with the type ‘X’ running tool and normally pulled with the type ‘GR’ pulling tool.
When combined with an equalising assembly and valve cap, this lock mandrel can be
used as a tubing plug capable of holding a pressure differential from either direction. The
‘X’ lock mandrel can also be used as a locking medium for various flow control devices
such as chokes, check valves, pack-offs, instrument hangers etc. When the ‘X’ lock is
used with a wireline retrievable sub-surface safety valve, the lock mandrel can be
modified to allow a small shear pin to be installed between the expander mandrel and the
main body of the lock. This shear pin is held in place with a leaf spring and an Allen cap
screw. This modification prevents flow vibrations from vibrating the expander mandrel
upwards and thus unlocking the mandrel.
By simply changing the keys in the ‘X’ lock mandrel, it can be converted into a type ‘XN’
(No-Go) lock mandrel (Refer to section 10.4.5). The Eni E&P- policy for pulling ‘XN’ lock
mandrels is to use the type ‘GS’ pulling tool.
10.4.1 ‘X’ and ‘XN’ Disassembly Procedure

1) Place the upper portion of the key retainer sleeve in a vice.
2) Remove the packing mandrel and place a pipe wrench on the shear pin section of
the packing mandrel and remove it.
3) Place the fishing neck and expander sleeve in an unlocked position by pulling them
away from the key retainer sleeve.
4) Remove the locking keys by slipping them from the ends of the springs and working
them through the bore of the key retainer sleeve.
5) Place the fishing neck in a vice and remove the expander sleeve.
6) Push the expander sleeve out of the lower end of the key retainer sleeve and the
springs will fall out.
7) Clean and inspect all parts.
10.4.2 ‘X’ and ‘XN’ Assembly Procedure

1) Place the expander sleeve inside the key retainer sleeve, lining up the spring slots.
Leave approximately 1/2“ of spring slots on the expander exposed. Insert springs in
the slots with hook ends out and towards the top of the expander sleeve. Engage
the hooks on the springs in the holes provided in the key retainer sleeve.
2) After all springs are in place, push the expander sleeve into the key retainer sleeve
and move it to its uppermost position.
3) Screw the fishing neck onto the expander sleeve. Place the fishing neck in a vice
and tighten the connection.
4) Slide each key through the bore in the key retainer sleeve and onto a spring. Make
certain the spring is properly installed in the locking key. The springs should pass
through a slot inside the keys, with the lower end over a shoulder near the slot
bottom.
5) Replace the packing mandrel by screwing it into the bottom of the key retainer
sleeve.
6) Install the packing mandrel.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.4.3 ‘X’ Running Procedure

If there is one or more type ‘X’ nipples in the string and the flow control device is to be
installed in the lowermost ‘X’ nipple, the running tool must be placed in the selective
position.
1) Make up the type ‘X’ lock mandrel, ‘X’ equalising valve, desired flow controls and ‘X’
running tool on a standard wireline tool string.
2) Lower the tool string into the tubing until the required ‘X’ nipple is located.
3) Let the tool string pass through the ‘X’ nipple and stop. Raise the tools slowly until
the weight indicator shows that the tool string has stopped.
4) This indicates that the locating dogs on the running tool are in position against the
lower end of the nipple. An upward pull is required to trip the locating dogs, placing
the running tool in a control position.
5) Lower the tool string until the 90° profile on the keys locate the profile of the ‘X’
nipple.
6) With the tool string resting on the nipple profile, downward jar action will shear the
upper pin in the running tool and allow the expander sleeve to be driven behind the
keys, locking the mandrel in the nipple.
7) Test the lock mandrel by applying an upward strain on the wireline. If the mandrel is
properly locked in the nipple, upward jarring will shear the lower pin in the running
tool and allow the tool string to be returned to the surface.
8) If the mandrel is not properly locked in the nipple, it will jar loose before the lower
pin is sheared. If this happens, lower the mandrel back into the nipple and repeat
steps 6 and 7.
10.4.4 ‘X’ Pulling Procedure

The type ‘GR’ pulling tool is used to pull the ‘X’ lock mandrel.
Note: The proper equalising prong must be used with the pulling tool and
adequate time for equalisation allowed before jarring upwards on
the lock mandrel.
1) Make up the proper size prong into the bottom of the ‘GR’ pulling tool and attach the
pulling tool to a standard wireline tool string.
2) Lower the tool string into the bore of the tubing until the lock mandrel is located and
latched.
3) As the pulling tool enters the lock mandrel the prong will shift the equalising valve
open (slight downward jar action may be necessary to shift the valve).
4) The weight of the tool string should be allowed to rest on the lock mandrel while
pressure across the control device is being equalised.
5) After equalisation has been confirmed, an upward strain on the wireline will indicate
whether or not the pulling tool is latched into the fishing neck of the lock mandrel.
6) Jar downward at least one firm stroke on the lock mandrel to loosen the lock
mandrel in the nipple.
7) Place an upward strain on the wireline. In some cases this is all that is required to
move the expander sleeve up, allow the keys to retract and release the lock
assembly.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
8) In most cases upward jar action may be necessary to cause the unlocking and
release.
9) Retrieve tool string, pulling tool and released lock assembly with equalising valve
and flow control devices to surface.
Figure 10-5 - Otis ‘XN’ and ‘X’ Lock Mandrel

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.4.5 ‘XN’ Lock Mandrel

The ‘XN’ lock mandrel is a non-selective lock mandrel designed to land and lock sub-
surface flow control devices in a type ‘XN’ nipple profile. It is a bottom No-Go type lock
with No-Go shoulder machined into the equalising valve, below the packing section. The
locking shoulders on the keys are chamfered to prevent them locating in the type ‘X’
landing nipple. This lock mandrel is run with the type ‘X’ running tool and pulled with the
type ‘GS’ pulling tool.
The type ‘XN’ lock mandrel can be used in the same manner as the type ‘X’ lock mandrel,
the only difference being the key profile.
Generally a ‘XN’ plug assembly has a higher pressure rating from above than a ‘X’ plug
the same size because it incorporates a No-Go shoulder. Since the No-Go shoulder
provides positive location, this lock is easy to locate and lock into its nipple. By changing
the keys the ‘XN’ lock mandrel can be converted into a type ‘X’ lock mandrel.
10.4.6 ‘XN’ Disassembly Procedure

1) Place the assembly in the vice, gripping on the fishing neck and loosen the packing
mandrel.
2) Insert a steel rod through the shear pin holes in the packing mandrel.
3) Using the rod as handles, pull the packing mandrel away from the vice. This will
move the key retainer sleeve away from the fishing neck and expose the expander
sleeve.
4) Place a pipe wrench on the expander sleeve and remove it from the fishing neck.
5) Place the key retainer sleeve in the vice.
6) Remove the packing mandrel from the key retainer sleeve.
7) With the expander sleeve in the up or unlocked position, the keys may be removed
from the slots.
8) Pull the expander sleeve out of the bottom of the key retainer sleeve. This will allow
the springs to fall free.
9) Clean and inspect all parts thoroughly, looking closely at springs and packing.
10.4.7 ‘XN’ Assembly Procedure

1) Place the key retainer sleeve in a vice, taking care not to damage the slots.
2) Insert the springs into their proper holes and slots, align the grooves in the
expander sleeve with the springs and insert as far as possible into the retainer
sleeve.
3) Put the keys in their proper slots making sure to engage the springs and push the
expander sleeve back far enough to hold them in place.
4) Make up the fishing neck on the expander sleeve.
5) Insert the packing mandrel into the expander sleeve and make it up on the retainer
sleeve.
6) Install the packing, adapters and back-up rings in proper order.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.4.8 ‘XN’ Running Procedure

If there is one or more ‘X’ nipples above the ‘XN’ nipple, the running tool may be placed in
the non-selective position for the deepest ‘X’ nipple.
1) Make up the type ‘XN’ lock mandrel, ‘X’ equalising valve, desired flow controls and
‘X’ running tool on a standard wireline tool string.
2) Lower the tool string into the tubing until the deepest ‘X’ nipple is located.
3) Let the tool string pass through the ‘X’ nipple and stop. Raise the tools slowly until
5) Lower the tool string back through the ‘X’ nipple (the keys on the lock mandrel are
chamfered which allows them to pass through the ‘X’ nipple in the non-selective
control position). Continue lowering the tool string until the No-Go shoulder on the
equalising valve contacts the No-Go shoulder in the ‘XN’ landing nipple.
6) With the tool string resting on the No-Go shoulder, downward jar action will shear
the upper pin in the running tool and allow the expander sleeve to be driven behind
the keys, locking the mandrel in the nipple.
pin is sheared. If this should happen, lower the mandrel back into the nipple and
repeat Steps 6 and 7.
If there is no compatible ‘X’ nipple in the tubing string, the running tool must be placed in
the non-selective position by hand prior to running.
1) Make up ‘XN’ lock mandrel with ‘X’ equalising valve, desired flow control and ‘X’
running tool to a standard wireline toolstring.
2) Place the ‘X’ running tool and lock mandrel in the non-selective position by hand. To
do this, pull the outer sleeve of the running tool downward until the upper dogs fall
into the recess on the inner mandrel, and the keys of the lock mandrel will move
from a retracted to an expanded position.
3) The lock mandrel may be run directly to the landing nipple and set, in the same
manner as described in steps 6 and 7 of the above procedure.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.4.9 ‘XN’ Pulling Procedure

The type ‘GS’ pulling tool is used to pull the ‘XN’ lock mandrel.
adequate time for equalisation allowed before jarring upward on the
lock mandrel.
1) Make up the proper size prong into the bottom of the ‘GS’ pulling tool and attach the
latched.
open (slight downward jar action may be necessary to shift the valve.)
assembly.
release.
10.5 OTIS TYPE ‘R’ & ‘RN’ LOCK MANDRELS

The Otis ‘R’ and ‘RN’ are the equivalent of the ‘X’ and ‘XN’ system but used with ‘R’ and
‘RN’ nipples in heavy weight tubing sizes and, therefore, have higher pressure ratings.
The ‘R’ lock mandrel is a selective type lock mandrel designed to locate and lock in a
compatible Otis ‘R’ nipple. This lock mandrel can be run in the selective or non-selective
mode, determined prior to running by the position of the running tool. This lock mandrel is
run with the type ‘R’, ’RX’ or ‘RXN’ running tool and pulled with the type ‘GR’ pulling tool.
When combined with an equalising assembly and valve cap this lock mandrel can be
used as a tubing plug capable of holding a pressure differential from either direction. The
‘R’ lock mandrel can also be used as a locking medium for various flow control devices
such as chokes, check valves, pack-offs, instrument hangers etc. When the ‘R’ lock is
used with a wireline retrievable sub-surface safety valve, the lock mandrel can be
modified to allow a small shear pin to be installed between the expander mandrel and the
main body of the lock. This shear pin is held in place with a leaf spring and an Allen cap
screw. This modification prevents flow vibrations from vibrating the expander mandrel
upwards and thus unlocking the mandrel.
Simply by changing the keys the ‘R’ lock mandrel can be converted into a type ‘RN’ lock
mandrel. The ‘RN’ lock mandrel is pulled by the type ‘GS’ pulling tool.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.5.1 ‘R’ Disassembly Procedure

1) Place the upper portion of the key retainer sleeve in vice.
2) Remove the packing mandrel and place a pipe wrench on the shear pin section of
the packing mandrel and remove it.
3) Place the fishing neck and expander sleeve in an unlocked position by pulling them
away from the key retainer sleeve.
4) Remove the locking keys by slipping them from the ends of the springs and working
them through the bore of the key retainer sleeve.
5) Place fishing neck in a vice and remove the expander sleeve.
6) Push the expander sleeve out of the lower end of the key retainer sleeve and the
springs will fall out.
7) Clean and inspect all parts.
10.5.2 ‘R’ Assembly Procedure

1) Place the expander sleeve inside the key retainer sleeve, lining up the spring slots.
Leave approximately 1/2’ of spring slots on the expander exposed. Insert springs in
the slots with hook ends out and towards the top of the expander sleeve. Engage
the hooks on the springs in the holes provided in the key retainer sleeve.
2) After all springs are in place, push the expander sleeve into the key retainer sleeve
and move it to its uppermost position.
3) Screw the fishing neck onto the expander sleeve. Place the fishing neck in a vice
and tighten the connection.
4) Slide each key through the bore in the key retainer sleeve and onto a spring. Make
certain the spring is properly installed in the locking key. The springs should pass
through a slot inside the keys, with the lower end over a shoulder near the slot
bottom.
5) Replace packing mandrel by screwing it into the bottom of the key retainer sleeve.
6) Install packing mandrel.
10.5.3 ‘R’ Running Procedure

If there is more than one ‘R’ nipple in the string and the flow control device is to be
installed in the lowermost ‘R’ nipple, the running tool must be placed in the selective
position.
1) Make up the type ‘R’ lock mandrel, equalising valve, desired flow controls and ‘R’
2) Lower the tool string into the tubing until the required ‘R’ nipple is located.
3) Let the tool string pass through the ‘R’ nipple and stop. Raise the tools slowly until
5) Lower the tool string until the 90° profiles on the keys locate the profile of the ‘R’
nipple.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
6) With the tool string resting on the nipple profile, downward jar action will shear the
upper pin in the running tool and allow the expander sleeve to be driven behind the
keys, locking the mandrel in the nipple.
repeat steps 6 and 7.
10.5.4 ‘R’ Pulling Procedure

The type ‘GR’ pulling tool is used to pull the ‘R’ lock mandrel.
lock mandrel.
1) Make up the proper size prong into the bottom of the ‘GR’ pulling tool and attach the
latched.
open (slight downward jar action may be necessary to shift the valve.)
assembly.
release.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 10-6- Otis ‘R’ and ‘RN’ Lock Mandrel
10.5.5 ‘RN’ Lock Mandrel

The ‘RN’ lock mandrel is a non-selective lock mandrel designed to land and lock sub-
surface flow control devices in a type ‘RN’ nipple profile. It is a bottom No-Go type lock
with No-Go shoulder machined into the equalising valve, below the packing section. The
locking shoulders on the keys are chamfered to prevent them locating in the type ‘R’
landing nipple. This lock mandrel is run with the type ‘R’ ’RX’ or ‘RXN’ running tool and
pulled with the type ‘GS’ pulling tool.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
The type ‘RN’ lock mandrel can be used in the same manner as the type ‘R’ lock mandrel,
the only difference being the key profile.
In general an ‘RN’ plug assembly has a higher pressure rating from above than an ‘R’
plug of the same size because it incorporates a No-Go shoulder. Since the No-Go
shoulder provides positive location, this lock is easy to locate and lock into its nipple. By
changing the keys the ‘RN’ lock mandrel can be converted into a type ‘R’ lock mandrel.
10.5.6 ‘RN’ Disassembly Procedure

1) Place the assembly in the vice, gripping on the fishing neck and slacken the
packing mandrel.
2) Insert a steel rod through the shear pin holes in the packing mandrel.
3) Using the rod as handles, pull the packing mandrel away from the vice. This will
move the key retainer sleeve away from the fishing neck and expose the expander
sleeve.
4) Place a pipe wrench on the expander sleeve and remove it from the fishing neck.
5) Place the key retainer sleeve in the vice.
6) Remove the packing mandrel from the key retainer sleeve.
7) With the expander sleeve in the up or unlocked position, the keys may be removed
from the slots.
8) Pull the expander sleeve out of the bottom of the key retainer sleeve. This will allow
the springs to fall free.
9) Clean and inspect all parts thoroughly, looking closely at springs and packing.
10.5.7 ‘RN’ Assembly Procedure

1) Place the key retainer sleeve in a vice, taking care not to damage the slots.
2) Insert the springs into their proper holes and slots, align the grooves in the
expander sleeve with the springs and insert as far as possible into the retainer
sleeve.
3) Put the keys in their proper slots making sure to engage the springs and push the
expander sleeve back far enough to hold them in place.
4) Make up the fishing neck on the expander sleeve.
5) Insert the packing mandrel into the expander sleeve and make it up on the retainer
sleeve.
6) Install the packing, adapters and back-up rings in proper order.
10.5.8 ‘RN’ Running Procedure

If there are one or more type ‘R’ nipples above the ‘RN’ nipple, the running tool may be
placed in the non-selective position in the deepest ‘R’ nipple.
1) Make up the type ‘RN’ lock mandrel, equalising valve, desired flow controls and ‘R’
2) Lower the tool string into the tubing until the deepest ‘R’ nipple is located.
3) Let the tool string pass through the ‘R’ nipple and stop. Raise the tools slowly until
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
5) Lower the tool string back through the ‘R’ nipple (the keys on the lock mandrel are
chamfered which allows them to pass through the ‘R’ nipple in the non-selective
control position). Continue lowering the tool string until the No-Go shoulder on the
equalising valve contacts the No-Go shoulder in the ‘RN’ landing nipple.
6) With the tool string resting on the No-Go shoulder, downward jar action will shear
the upper pin in the running tool and allow the expander sleeve to be driven behind
the keys, locking the mandrel in the nipple.
repeat steps 6 and 7.
If there is no compatible ‘R’ nipple in the tubing string, the running tool must be placed in
the non-selective position by hand prior to running.
1) Make up ‘RN’ lock mandrel with equalising valve, desired flow control and ‘R’
running tool to a standard wireline toolstring.
2) Place the ‘R’ running tool and lock mandrel in the non-selective position by hand.
To do this, pull the outer sleeve of the running tool downward until the upper dogs
fall into the recess on the inner mandrel, and the keys of the lock mandrel will move
from a retracted to an expanded position.
3) The lock mandrel may be run directly to the landing nipple and set, in the same
manner as described in steps 6 and 7 of the above procedure.
10.5.9 ‘RN’ Pulling Procedure

The type ‘GS’ pulling tool is used to pull the ‘RN’ lock mandrel.
lock mandrel.
1) Make up the proper size prong into the bottom of the ‘GS’ pulling tool and attach the
latched.
open (slight downward jar action may be necessary to shift the valve).
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
assembly.
release.
10.6 OTIS ‘X’ AND ‘R’ PLUG CHOKES

The Otis ‘X’ and ‘R’ plug chokes consists of two main components, an equalising
assembly and a valve cap (Refer to Figure 10-7). The ‘X’ and the ‘R’ plug chokes are
similar in design and differ only in pressure rating. The ‘X’ plug choke is used with the ‘X’
or ‘XN’ lock mandrels, the ‘R’ plug choke is used with the ‘R’ or ‘RN’ lock mandrel.
The ‘X’ and ‘R’ equalising assemblies provide a means of equalising pressure differential
across wireline set plug assemblies. The ‘X’ and ‘R’ allow the plug assemblies to be run
and set in one operation and equalised and pulled in one operation. The valve cap is
simply a blanking plug, attached to the equalising sub, to prevent flow through the plug
choke until the equalising melon has been moved off seat. It is sometimes replaced by an
extended version to act as a sump for scale etc. or to catch gas lift valves.
The equalising-sub consists of a multi-ported outer housing and an inner melon
incorporating two ‘O’rings. When the melon is in the running/setting position, the two ‘O’-
Rings are below the equalising ports allowing fluid by-pass through the plug choke
assembly. Once the plug choke assembly is locked and set the action of shearing and
pulling the running tool out of the choke assembly moves the melon upwards. This places
the ‘O’-rings across the equalising ports packing them off.
Caution: It is important not to attempt to pull the choke assembly until

equalisation has been achieved or the toolstring will be blown up the
hole. The equalising subs must be checked and redressed every
time they are used as the ‘O’rings on the melon can be exposed to
flow cutting.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 10-7- Otis ‘X’ and ‘ R’ Plug Chokes

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.6.1 ‘PX’ and ‘PR’ Plug Chokes

The Otis ‘PX’ and ‘PR’ plug chokes consist of three main components: a prong,
equalising sub and valve cap (Refer to Figure 10-8). The ‘PX’ and the ‘PR’ plug chokes
are similar in design and differ only in pressure rating. The ‘PX’ plug choke is used with
the ‘X’ or ‘XN’ lock mandrels, the ‘PR’ plug choke is used with the ‘R’ or ‘RN’ lock
mandrel.
The ‘PX’ and ‘PR’ equalising assemblies provide a means of equalising pressure
differential across wireline set plug assemblies. The ‘PX’ and ‘PR’ plug assemblies
require two wireline runs to set and two wireline runs to pull. The first run would be to set
the plug body and the second to set the prong in the plug body. Retrieval of the plug is
the reverse of the previous. The valve cap is simply a blanking plug, attached to the
equalising sub, to prevent flow through the plug choke until the equalising prong has been
moved off seat.
The equalising-sub consists of a multi-ported outer housing. These ports are packed off
with a prong which has two sets of ‘V’ packing, one sitting above the ports and one sitting
below. The ‘P’ or ‘PR’ type plug choke used where there is a likelihood of sand or scale
being present in the tubing string. This plug choke incorporates a long equalising prong
which extends out above the top of the lock mandrel and has an external fishing neck.
Depending on the length of the equalising prong, a fair amount of sand or scale can fall
on the top of the plug choke assembly without covering the prong fishing neck. The prong
is run on a shear down type running tool i.e. ‘SB’ or ‘JDC’ and is pulled on a shear up or
down pulling tool, i.e. ‘RB’, ‘JUC’, ‘SB’ or ‘JDC’.
The seals on the prong assembly should be inspected and replaced if necessary after
each run. The choke body may be disassembled by removing the valve housing and cap;
this will allow the packing section of the lock mandrel to be replaced as required. Inspect
lock mandrel springs and packing after each run.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 10-8 - Otis ‘PX’ and ‘PR’ Plug Chokes

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.7 BAKER ‘W’ & ‘Z’ LOCK MANDRELS

The Baker models ‘W2’ and ‘Z2’ locks (Refer to Figure 10-9) are generally used in ‘FWG’
and ‘RZG’ bypass blanking plugs with removable mandrels but can be used with other
devices such as bottom-hole pressure gauges, etc., (Refer to section 10.7.3).
The ‘FWG’ and ‘RZG’ are positive blank-off devices designed to seal of pressure from
above and below. The ‘FWG’ blanking plug is for top No-Go landing in Model ‘F’ non-
ported seating nipples. The model ‘RZG’ blanking plug is for bottom No-Go landing in
Model ‘R’ non-ported seating nipples. The plugs are compatible with normal wireline
equipment and procedures.
While running in the hole, the removable mandrel is in the down position (bypass port
open) to allow fluid bypass during setting procedure.
When the plug is set in the nipple, locked in the locking grove, and the lower shear pins
are sheared, the mandrel is pulled up via the upper shear pin in the running tool, closing
the port and sealing off pressures from above and below. Upward motion positions the
grove in the mandrel under the lock ring segments and prevents the mandrel from being
moved down.
The ‘W2’ and ‘Z2’ locks are run on the baker ‘C-1’ Running tool, and retrieved with, either,
the ‘JDC’/’SB’ pulling tools in combination with the ‘B’ probe.
Note When running the ‘W’ and ‘Z’ lock mandrels particular attention
must be paid to the well conditions (sand, scale, etc.) as any debris
collecting behind the keys will result in the keys failing to retract
completely and removal from the well impossible.
10.7.1 Running Procedures

1) Make up the appropriate plug to a standard wireline toolstring.
2) Run in the well until the required landing nipple is reached.
3) Locate the nipple by setting down weight to ensure locking on.
4) Pick up until the upstrain indicates that the upward facing locks are engaged.
5) Jar-up shearing the lower shear pin in the running tool, closing the bypass port,
shearing the upper shear pin in the running tool and leaning the plug in place.
10.7.2 Pulling Procedures

1) Make up the proper size pulling tool to a standard wireline tool string.
2) Lower the tool string into the bore of the tubing until the pulling tool latches the
equalising mandrel.
3) Jar up to shear the lower pins in the removable mandrel, and pull the removable
mandrel.
4) When the removable mandrel is removed from the plug the equalising ports are
open thus allowing pressures to equalise above and below plug body prior to
retrieving.
5) Pull removable mandrel from well.
6) After equalisation has been confirmed, make up the ‘B’ probe onto standard pulling
tool (‘JDC’/’SB’).
7) Lower the tool string into the bore of the tubing until the pulling tool locates the plug
body.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
8) As the ‘B’ probe enters the lock it collapses the dogs allowing the plug to be pulled
free from the nipple.
9) In most cases upward jar action may be necessary to pull the packing from the seal
bore.
10) Retrieve tool string, pulling tool and released lock assembly to surface.
Figure 10-9 - ‘W2’ and ‘Z2’ Lock Mandrels

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.7.3 Baker Bomb Hanger

The ‘RZB’ and ‘FWB’ Instrument hangers are manufactured Baker and are designed for
hanging bottomhole pressure and temperature instruments in the Baker ‘R’ and ‘F’
landing nipples respectively.
The ‘RZB’ and ‘FWB’ Instrument Hangers are set by standard wireline methods. No jar
action is required to set or release the Hangers from the landing nipples.
The ‘RZB’ and ‘FWB’ Instrument hangers are designed to be run with the Baker Soft
Release Running Tool. The instrument hangers must be run with the dogs trailing.
10.7.4 Bomb Hanger Running Procedure

1) Prepare the Baker soft release running tool and the ‘RZB’ or ‘FWB’ instrument
hanger by latching the running tool onto the fishing neck of the lock mandrel.
2) Make up the running tool and bomb hanger complete with pressure temperature
gauges onto a standard wireline toolstring.
3) Run in the well with the assembly until the desired landing nipple is reached.
4) Lower the instrument hanger assembly into the landing nipple. The spring loaded
keys will locate the profile of the landing nipple.
5) Apply an upward strain on the wire to release the soft set running tool. Retrieve the
toolstring and running tool to surface.
10.7.5 Bomb Hanger Pulling Procedure

Prepare a shear down pulling tool (‘JDC’/’SB’) suitable for the fish neck on the bomb
hanger, make up a ‘B’ probe onto pulling tool.
Run in the well with pulling assembly until the required depth is reached.
Lower the pulling tool slowly and latch the fishing neck of the instrument hanger, during
this process the ‘B’ probe will retract the keys.
Apply an upward strain on the wire to confirm that the pulling tool has latched the
instrument hanger.
Increase the strain on the wire to pull the instrument hanger from the nipple and pull to
surface.
Tool Type Nominal Size Length (Ins) No-Go OD (Ins) Fishing Neck
ODD
(Ins)
FWB 2 1/2” 14.21 2.365 1.375
FWB 3” 14.62 2.802 1.750
FWB 4” 16.90 3.864 2.312
RZB 2 1/2” 12.51 2.302 1.375
RZB 3” 12.40 2.740 1.750
RZB 4” 14.78 3.802 2.312
Table 10-c - Baker ‘FWB’, ‘ZB’ Instrument Hanger Data
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.8 CAMCO LOCK MANDRELS
10.8.1 ‘DB-6’ Lock Mandrel

The ‘DB-6’ lock mandrel is a non-selective type lock designed to locate and lock in the
type ‘DB-6’ series landing nipple and Camco ‘DB-6’ hydraulic safety valve landing nipple
(Refer to figure 10-10). The ‘DB-6’ is a No-Go type lock with the No-Go shoulder located
between the locking dogs and the packing section.
The ‘DB-6’ lock mandrel is run on the ‘Z-6’ running tool with the expander tube located in
the upper position and the dogs free to retract. On location of the No-Go shoulder, the
running tool core is released from the lock by downward jarring to break some shear pins
and drives the expander tube down behind the locking dogs into the nipple recess. The
expander is held down by a collet type latch and shear pins which locate a groove in the
upper end of the expander. The shear pins locate the groove and are held in by a retainer
spring. At the same time a tattle tale spring locates the upper groove in the lower core of
the running tool. Upward jarring then breaks the releasing shear pins allowing the running
tool to be retrieved. On retrieval at surface location of the ‘tattle-tale’ spring in the lower
groove would indicate that full travel of the expander had not been achieved and that the
lock should be pulled and re-run.
The ‘DB-6’ lock is pulled with the ‘PRS’ series pulling tool. After locating the mandrel and
pressure equalisation, upward jarring through the pulling tool's dogs, shears the releasing
pins in the lock and drives the expander up from behind the dogs, releasing the lock from
the nipple. Further pulling, pulls the lock from the nipple.
The ‘DB-6’ lock mandrel can be used to locate and lock various flow control devices in the
tubing string e.g. surface controlled sub surface safety valves direct controlled safety
valves, plugs, chokes, check valves, and instrument hangers.
The ‘DB-6’ is a No-Go type lock, making nipple location and lock setting simple. When
this lock is pinned to the ‘Z-6’ running tool its locking dogs are fully retracted reducing the
chance of the assembly hanging up while running in the hole.
10.8.2 ‘Z-6’ Running Tool

The Camco 'Z-6' running tool is a wireline tool used to install the 'DB-6' lock mandrel into
the 'DB-6', 'B-6' or 'BA-6' landing nipples. The 'Z-6' running tool comprises a fishing neck,
plunger, garter spring and a lock pin retainer. Two sets of shear pins attach the running
tool to the lock. The lower set of shear pins holds the plunger in the running position. The
upper set of shear pins, when sheared, releases the running tool from the lock. The
running tool is threaded internally to receive a running prong for special operations. The
'Z-6' running tool has a 'tell tale' device which gives positive indication that the lock has
been set. The running tool shear pin hole design allows it to be pinned to suit the
operation to be performed e.g. two shear pins to set a shallow plug, four pins to set a
deep plug. The 'Z-6' running tool is non-selective.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 10-10 - Camco Type ‘DB-6’ Lock Mandrel

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.8.3 ‘DB-6’ Running Procedure

1) Install the 'Z-6' running tool in a large vice. Clamp the vice on the fishing neck of the
running tool.
2) Remove the ring retainer from the position indicator housing of the 'DB' lock.
3) Place the ring retainer over the lower end of the running tool and move it up over
the shear pin holes in the plunger of the running tool.
4) Align the lower two shear pin holes of the ring retainer with the two pin holes of the
running tool plunger.
5) Insert two steel shear pins through the aligned holes of both the ring retainer.
6) Move the plunger ring of the running tool down to meet the lock retainer ring.
7) Align the upper shear pin holes of the plunger ring with the upper shear pin holes of
the retainer ring. Install two brass shear pins and tap them down firmly.
Note: When the 'DB' Lock is attached to a subsurface control device which
entails a flapper, use the designated running prong in conjunction
with Install the small garter spring on the end of the running tool
plunger. There is a shallow groove for this purpose provided
between the two deeper grooves at the end of the plunger.
8) Remove the running tool from the vice.

9) Make up and tighten the running tool and ring retainer onto the position indicator
housing the 'DB' Lock.
Note: Exercise care so that the garter spring is not rolled back during this
step.
10) Attach the running tool to the wireline tool-string.

11) Run the wireline tool-string into the well. When the lock reaches the 'DB' landing
nipple, the no-go shoulder of the valve/lock assembly will locate the no-go ring of
the landing nipple.
12) Jar downward on the running tool to shear the pins holding the running tool plunger
in the running position. Continue jarring downward until a solid blow is encountered
indicating that the lock has seated in the landing nipple.
13) Jar upward to break the shear pins attaching the plunger ring to the lock retainer
ring.
14) Retrieve the running tool from the well. Examine the garter spring for proper
positioning to indicate positive setting of the lock.
Note: The garter spring serves as a 'tell tale' to verify proper setting of the
lock. When the running tool is returned to the surface, after running
the lock, the garter spring will have shifted position. If the garter
spring is in the deeper groove below the shallow groove, the lock
will not have been set properly in the looking recess.
15) When the garter spring is located in the deeper groove above the shallow groove,
proper setting of the lock is assured.
16) The 'tell tale' garter spring indicates the length of travel of the collet within the lock
housing. The collet must move down fully in order for the fingers to engage in the
lock housing collet recess and assure positive locking.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
17) Prior to resuming normal well operation, conduct tests to confirm that the lock is
securely seated in the landing nipple.
10.8.4 'PRS' Pulling Procedure

1) Ensure that the 'PRS' series pulling tool is fully assembled and in proper working
order. Make up the pulling tool onto the wireline tool-string.
2) Run the tool-string into the well until the collet fingers of the pulling tool lock into the
locking recess of the internal fishing neck of the retrievable subsurface device.
3) Jar upward on the wireline.
Note: If the sub-surface device does not dislodge from the well, the 'PRS'
pulling tool can be disengaged from the device and recovered to the
surface with downward jarring. The 'PRS-2' through 'PRS-6' pulling
tool can be released from the device with upward or downward
jarring, depending on the position of the compression core spring in
the spring housing.
4) Retrieve the wireline tool-string with the subsurface device and close the master
valve.
5) Bleed the lubricator pressure off and remove the tools from the well.
Release from Subsurface Devices

1) Place a pin punch or rod of the appropriate size in the hole of the collet.
2) Retract the collet against the collet spring.
3) Rotate the punch or rod in the circumferential slot in the collet housing.
4) Separate the pulling tool from the device.
Aborting the Pulling Operation

The 41/2", 51/2" or 6" 'PRS' Pulling Tool can be released from the subsurface device
without pulling the device by downward jarring. Downward jarring brings the collet
housing of the pulling tool in contact with the top of the subsurface device, causing the
shear pin holding the spring housing and the inner mandrel together to shear. Continued
downward jarring moves the inner mandrel downward, engaging the buttress threads on
the inner mandrel with the buttress threads in the ratchet sleeve. The ratchet sleeve holds
the inner mandrel in a downward position. As the inner mandrel travels downward, the
collet core moves out from under the collet fingers. The collet fingers move inward into
the reduced diameter of the collet core, at which time the pulling tool can be separated
from the device. Redress the pulling tool each time a pulling operation is aborted.
10.9 BAKER TYPE ‘B’ AND ‘B1’ LOCK MANDREL

The ‘B’ lock Mandrel is a top No-Go type lock mandrel designed specifically to land and
lock SCSSVs in a type ‘B’ landing nipple profile. The ‘B’ lock is run and pulled on a type
‘GS’ running/pulling tool fitted with a ‘BT’ probe.
The top No-Go shoulder on the ‘B’ lock ensures positive landing in the SSSV landing
nipple. The spring loaded plunger inside the lock ensures that the running tool will not
release until the lock assembly is fully secured in the nipple.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
The plunger also presents a large smooth bore for well fluid. This combined with the
internal fishing neck makes the ‘B’ lock mandrel ideal for high volume applications.
The ‘B-1’ lock mandrel is a derivative of the ‘B’. The ‘B-1’ has an additional debris barrier
on the top of the fishing neck for use in wells where debris or sediment are present which
may collect around the outside of the lock and cause problems in retrieval.
Refer to. Figure 10-11.
Figure 10-11 - Baker ‘B’ and ‘B1’ Lock Mandrel

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10.10 SURFACE CONTROLLED SUBSURFACE SAFETY VALVES
Note: As the manufacturers make alterations to equipment designs and

the tools used for running and pulling flow control devices, it is
essential that the latest manufacturer’s data sheets are used
otherwise serious problems may arise. This is more important with
regard to the installation and retrieval of SCSSVs.
10.10.1 SCSSV Running Procedure

The running of wireline installed SCSSVs is covered previously in section 9 of this
manual.
The list below shows the common valves used by Eni E&P and same procedures should
be followed for the running of these valves.
• ‘BA-6’ Camco
• ‘DK’ Otis
• ‘BAAFVE’ Baker
• ‘BAARVE’ Baker
• ‘BAARVHE’ Baker
• ‘BAAFVHE’ Baker
• ‘WRP’ Camco
• ‘FXE’ Otis.
The different types of lock mandrels for running these valves are covered previously in
this section. The variations in procedures are in the type of prongs or probes run with
each valve to keep the valve open during installation.
10.10.2 SCSSV Pulling Procedure

The pulling of SCSSVs is covered previously in section 9 of this manual.
The same procedure should also be followed for the pulling of the following types of
valves.
• ‘BA-6’ Camco
• ‘DK’ Otis
• ‘BAAFVE’ Baker
• ‘BAARVE’ Baker
• ‘BAARVHE’ Baker
• ‘BAAFVHE’ Baker
• ‘WRP’ Camco
• ‘FXE’ Otis.
The different types of pulling tool and equalising prongs for the pulling of these valves are
already covered in the previous part of this section.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11. WIRELINE PROBLEMS
11.1 WIRE BREAKS
11.1.1 Wire Breaks At Surface
Wire Remains Visible

When the wire breaks at the surface it occasionally gets trapped in the hay pulley or the
stuffing box. If it jams at the hay pulley the normal procedure is to put the wireline clamp
on the wire, pull out the slack, if any and connect the two broken ends together by either
looping the ends round each other and wrapping them and/or using a double male
crossover, attaching a rope socket on each end of wire and connecting them together,
you can also use a nut or chain link to join wire together. Pull the wire out of the hole,
remove the tool string and the broke wireline. Spool on a new line if the remaining line is
too short to carry out further operations. If the wire is broken at the stuffing box and the
tool string is free the procedure would be:
1) Close the BOP rams to grip the wire. Bleed off all pressure in the lubricator.
Remove one section of lubricator, back-thread the wireline through the remaining
lubricator and stuffing box and reconnect wire as above.
2) Take up all wire slack with the wireline unit. Equalise and open the BOP rams. If
there is enough lubricator remaining to accommodate the tool string, then pull out of
the hole. If not, then enough wireline should be pulled out to allow the section of
lubricator to be re-installed in the rig-up.
Note: The hay pulley may have to be repositioned to allow knot to pass.
The wire can also be removed from counter head to pass on to
drum.
Note: The BOPs should be re-closed and pressure bled off.
Note: Always attempt, if possible, to make the connection so that it is

wound onto the reel a number of times before picking up heavy
weights or jarring.
3) Cut the wire at the wireline unit and rig-down lubricator. Pull the wireline out of the
stuffing box and lubricator. Add the lubricator section and back-feed through the
stuffing box. Re-rig the lubricator and re-connect the wireline as before. Take up all
wire slack with the wireline unit. Equalise and open the BOP. Pull out of the hole
with the tool string.
4) The wire is reconnected, using a nut, link from chain, or disc or rope sockets and
spooled back onto drum (Refer to Figure 11-1 and Figure 11-2). The hay pulley may
have to be repositioned to permit knot to pass. Wire can be removed from counter
head to allow the knot to go onto drum.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 11-1- Chain Link Type Knot
Figure 11-2- Double Adapter Rope Socket Type
11.1.2 Wire Break In The Well

When the wire breaks downhole, or breaks at surface then falls back down the hole, the
first objective is to calculate the depth at which the top of the wire will be from the surface.
To calculate this, a number of factors must be known:
• The length of wire in the hole, whether tools are stuck or free and, if
tools are free, what depth would they fall to i.e. bottom of the hole
(HUD), PBTD, a nipple, crossover, etc. If stuck, at what depth.
• The operator will know this from the actions he was taking at the time
the wire broke and from the wireline unit’s depth counter reading.
• Having calculated the length of the wire in the hole and determined
where the tool string is held up it is easy to calculate where the top of
the wire would be if it was standing straight up.
• Depth of tool string - length of wire in hole = Depth to top of wire.
• However, the wire does not sit straight up but coils round the tubing
walls and therefore falls to a lower depth. This is referred to as wire fall
and is dependent upon the size and type of wire, the length in the hole
and the tubing diameter.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Having determined the approximate depth of the top of the wire, it is now necessary to
find and confirm the depth before attempting to retrieve it. The tools used to find the top of
the wire are referred to as wire finders. If the line breaks at the surface due to extensive
jarring, the jars on the tool string still work and if the line parted at the counterhead, with
the broke end extended through the stuffing box, it is possible to splice the line and
continue jarring to free and recover the toolstring.
Amount of wire fallback per 1,000ft

In our scenario, we have used 0.108 wire in 51/2 ins tubing. By using the table we find that
the wire will fall back 40ft per 1,000ft and that the wire will be found as follows.
10,000 + 28 + 21 + 12 (Toolstring) = 10,061
10,061
Fall back = 40 x = 402.44
1,000
Top of wire = minus 61ft of surface wire = 341.44
To assume that the top of the wire would be found or pushed 'x' thousand feet down the
hole is totally wrong. The wire will be found in a long spiral, hard against the tubing wall,
and does not emulate a coil spring. (The only way that the line would move further down
the tubing, is if the top of the wire was picked up by a fishing tool, and pulled down the
hole inside itself as the tool moves downhole inside the wire spiral. On trying to retrieve
the fishing tool, it would invariably get stuck due to wire above the toolstring being
dragged into a ball).
Tubing Size (ins.) Wireline OD. (ins.) Wire Fall ft/1,000ft.

7
2 /8 0.092 12
31/2 0.092 16
31/2 0.108 15
31/2 3
/16 20
41/2 0.108 27
41/2 3
/16 35
51/2 0.108 40
51/2 3
/16 50
71/2 0.108 90
71/2 3
/16 100
Table 11-a - Wire Fall Estimations
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11.1.3 Wire Stuck In The Stuffing Box

Stuffing boxes for use with 0.108 wire incorporate a 16ins sheave wheel which highlights
that manufacturers have recognised that sheave wheels, pulleys etc., should be
compatible with wire size.
Note: It is essential to change all stuffing box packings on a regular basis

since, during wireline operations, it is quite common for metal
splinters to be shaved from the line by the cutting action of the
sharp profiles on the edges of the metal wireline guides. These
filings are carried into the packings and increase lateral pressure on
the line. In cases where only the top two or three packings have
been replaced, metal build up has contributed to isolated instances
of a phenomena called Hydro-Dynamic deformation, which is
evidenced by a reduction in the diameter of the line, (over approx. 2-
3ft of its length), caused by the generation of hydrostatic pressures
during rapid acceleration/deceleration during the wireline process.
Similar conditions, and line failures, can be created by excessive tightening down of the
stuffing box packing. Although this is not a common problem, it has been experienced in
Europe and the USA, particularly when using stainless steel lines.
Note: It is recommended to use brass packing gland and lower gland as

the metal type can create wear to the wire resulting in wire failure.
11.2 WIRELINE TOOLSTRING STICKING

For the following scenarios the methods of freeing the toolstring are similar as far as
jarring with mechanical or power jars, to free the string. Depending on the severity of the
toolstring being stuck it may require the wireline to be cut. This will require approval from
the wireline supervisor.
11.2.1 During Gauging Operations

Cause:
• Build up of wax on tubing wall.
• Wrongly sized gauge cutters for operation
• Poorly maintained gauge cutters (worn, cutting edge worn)
• Build up of scale on tubing wall.
Prevention:
• Use correctly sized gauge cutters for operation.
• Use properly maintained gauge cutters.
• Use correct toolstring for operation (power jars)
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11.2.2 During Pressure and Temperature Surveys

Cause:
• Pressure and temperatures gauges hanging up in a Side Pocket
Mandrel.
• Toolstring being blown up well.
• Toolstring hanging up in deviated section of well.
Prevention:
• Gauges and toolstring should be correctly centralised.
• Use the correct amount of weight bar for operation being carried out.
• Use a toolstring designed for deviated/dogleg section (roller stem,
knuckle joints).
11.2.3 During Perforating Operations

Cause:
• Wireline toolstring being blown up well.
• Wireline toolstring oversized after perforation.
Prevention:
• Correctly balance pressures prior to perforating.
• Use sufficient weight bar to minimise toolstring movement.
• Use correct loading and sizing procedures for charges.
11.2.4 During Lock Setting/Retrieving

Cause:
• Lock incorrectly pinned
• Build up sand sediment around the lock mandrel
• Improper pressure equalisation prior to lock mandrel being released.
Prevention:
• Ensure the correct equalisation procedure is followed prior to releasing
lock mandrel.
• Ensure the correct type of plug is used with regards to well conditions
(i.e. prong type on wells with sand or sediment production).
• Ensure the correct pinning procedure is followed.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11.2.5 During Packer Setting

Cause:
• Casing or tubing was not drifted prior to run.
• The lock was incorrectly pinned.
• Movement of tubulars when the packer is setting.
Prevention:
• Ensure a drift run has been carried out before running packer.
• Ensure the correct pinning procedure is followed.
• Use the correct procedure when applying pressure to the tubing string.
11.2.6 During Scratching Operations

Cause:
• Scratcher becomes stuck in wax plug.
• Scratcher being deformed after passing through restriction in well.
Prevention:
• Use correct size scratcher for the well profile.
• When scratching wax add extra stem below jars to ensure the jars are
free from any wax plug that is encountered by the scratcher.
11.2.7 During Hydrate Removal

Cause:
• Insufficient methanol mix injected during wireline runs.
• In-correct glycol mix used while pressure testing.
Prevention:
• Ensure there is a continuous injection of methanol during wireline runs.
• Ensure the correct mixture of glycol/water is used when pressure
testing.
11.3 TOOLSTRING PROBLEMS

The following are the problems which can be encountered with toolstring condition or
improper procedures used.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11.3.1 Toolstring Breakage

Cause:
• Worn connections.
• Damaged or worn tools.
• Wrong manipulation of toolstring on delicate tools.
Prevention:
• Regularly inspect threads.
• Correctly maintain tools.
• Ensure the correct procedure is followed for the toolstring being run.
11.3.2 Toolstring Disconnection

Cause:
• Worn connections.
• Tools not tightened up properly on surface prior to running in.
Prevention:
• Regularly inspect threads.
• Use of quick-lock type connectors.
• Ensure the correct procedure is followed for making up the toolstring to
be run.
11.4 FISHING
11.4.1 Standard Well Site Inventory Of Fishing Tools

The following is a list of tools that would be expected in a standard fishing toolbox:
a) Wireline Clamp
b) Wireline Grab
c) Wireline Finder
d) LIBs to suit tubing sizes
e) Blind Boxes to suit tubing sizes.
f) Heavy duty pulling tool
g) Wireline cutters
h) GO-Devils
i) Overshots
j) Bell Guides to suit tubing sizes
k) Power jars
l) Tubular jars.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11.4.2 General
Fishing is the name given to the operation to retrieve items from the well which may be
damaged, stuck or have been dropped, and is an efficient way of rectifying this kind of
problem. The most common reason for fishing is when a wireline has broken, either, at
the surface and remains visible, or downhole and is not visible. In the later case, several
conditioning and preparatory trips may be necessary before the ‘fish’ can be located
successfully and retrieved. As each fishing job is different, these operations cannot be
covered by specific procedures, but it is in this area the operator’s experience and skill
can play a significant part.
Wireline fishing is not a planned operation, the variety of possible fishing jobs make it
impossible to detail definitive procedures, however, it should be remembered that
standard wireline procedures and practices must still be followed wherever possible even
when the rig up will almost certainly be different from normal.
Wireline fishing becomes necessary due to a number of reasons, ranging from operator
error, often due to poor communication, bad practices, in experiences etc. through to
problems experienced in today’s deep wells, such as asphaltenes, scale, chemical
composition, and high temperatures which attack wirelines, equipment and seals and
serve to compound problems.
Over the years there have been vast improvements in downhole technology, such as
completion design, plugging systems, subsurface safety valves etc. There have also been
improvements in wire quality and strength, however, the areas that have seen few
changes are the wirelining technique itself, and the surface equipment in direct contact
with the wire.
Before tackling the various methods of fishing, it is necessary to determine what checks
and procedures can be carried out to avoid a fishing job in the first place.
11.4.3 Fishing Prevention Measures

Fishing techniques are extremely varied and depend largely on the circumstances and
well conditions for each individual situation.
The aim of wireline is to complete the set programme as quickly and safely as possible
without getting the tools stuck or breaking the wire.
It is the aim of the wireline operator to carry out operations in a safe and timely manner
without becoming stuck, breaking the wire, being blown up the hole or losing tools etc. To
prevent these occurrences the following good wireline practices should be observed:
• Check and maintain equipment regularly. Function test all equipment to
be run including hydraulic and spang jars.
• Check that running/pulling tools move to the sheared position by
removing the shear pins and testing them on an appropriate fish neck.
• Always ensure that a tool with an OD larger than the rest of the
toolstring is run below the jars and check that all thread connections are
tight.
• Observe that the load limitations of the wire being used are never
exceeded.
• Maintain the wireline and lubricate with oil when running into the well to
reduce friction and wear to the stuffing box. Take precautions to avoid
kinking the wire and check that the counter is correctly zeroed at the
appropriate datum point.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
• Keep the hydraulic pressure relief valve correctly adjusted.

• Use correct equalising procedures with the proper prong, wait until
equalisation is complete.
• Concentrate on what you are doing. Try to visualise what is happening
downhole as the wire is manipulated at the surface. If unsure, ask for
assistance.
• Maintain a careful record of toolstring dimensions i.e. fish neck sizes,
ODs and lengths. Think ahead, be prepared for problems.
• Check the programme and/or well files for current well status and
previous problems en-countered. Follow the programme and do not
deviate unless prior approval has been obtained.
Note: However careful an operator is, fishing jobs will still occur due to
equipment failures, well conditions and unexpected problems.
Note: Discuss a fishing programme with all the relevant personnel and
consider all possible results of each time the well bore is entered
and plan for the various possibilities.
1) Make sure that wire is not in contact with rig floor, beams etc. as this will cause
damage from abrasion.
2) If taking control of a well, i.e. hydraulic pumps for SCSSV and HMV, make sure the
hold open pressures are not exceeded and closely monitored for any pressure drop
(possible leaks).
3) Make sure that signs and barriers are placed to prevent anyone closing swab valve,
etc. especially when adjacent operations are ongoing.
4) Make sure that all hydraulic pumps used have a back up air supply in case of an
emergency.
11.4.4 Fishing Assembly

Having established where the top of the wire should be, the first tool we would run is a
wire finder (Refer to Figure 11-3).
A typical toolstring would include:
• Rope socket.
• Lightest amount of stem required to get down the hole (see below).
• Tubular jars.
• Jar-Up pulling tool.
• Rope socket.
• Stem (for spacer)
• Wire finder.
The reason why the lightest amount of stem is required, is due to the fact that it is
necessary to find the top of the wire with the wire finder. It would be ideal, therefore, if the
wire finder should cease downward movement, or show some sign of running through a
restriction (i.e. weight loss or jerky downward movement), within + 20ft mark, where the
wire would be expected to be found.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
To find the lightest amount of stem, the following formula would be used.
Force per square inch or amount of weight it will take for a toolstring to fall, neglecting
friction = area in square inch x pressure: (A x P = f)
π x wire OD 2 = Area x lubricator press = Force trying to blow the wire out
of the stuffing box
4
If the weight per ft of the stem is not known, the following formula may be used:
OD 2 x 8
Weight per ft of round bar stock or stem = =wt / ft .
3
Figure 11-3 - Initial Fishing String

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
The normal spang jar is not used for wire fishing as jar action can easily be lost if the wire
becomes snagged between the linkage, therefore tubular jars may be used.
The tubular jar is commonly used for fishing because its moving components are, for the
most part, enclosed within the outside housing, protecting them from entanglement with
the wireline to be fished and other well debris.
Tubular jars have screwed components which are susceptible to backing off during
prolonged jarring. Also, the efficiency of jarring down may be decreased due to the
viscosity effects of the fluid displaced from inside the housing. (Refer to Figure 11-4).
Figure 11-4 - Jars

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11.5 SLICKLINE FISHING PROCEDURES
11.5.1 Wireline Finder/Retriever

The two traditional types of wire finder are the bell shaped finder (Refer to previous
Figure 11-3) and the Bowen finder/retriever (Refer to Figure 11-5).
Bell Shaped Finder

This type of finder is a solid, thin walled device which is belled out to conform to the
tubing drift diameter. When correctly used it will seldom miss the top of the wire, however,
the disadvantages are:
• Difficult to get through the Xmas tree.
• Cannot pass through nipples.
• Cannot retrieve the wire.
Bowen Finder/Retriever
The Bowen wireline retriever consists of a top sub, mandrel, main sub, spear point, slip
and skirt. The retriever may be dressed with various skirt sizes to conform to tubing drift.
Figure 11-5 - Wire Finder/Retriever

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11.5.2 Running A Wire Finder

The wire finder is a circular device with fingers which pick up the tail end of the wire from
the tubing wall and bend it into the middle of the tubing (Refer to previous Figure 11-3),
preparing it to be retrieved by another device (wireline grab/spear).
1) Select the appropriate size of wire finder for the tubing and restrictions. Adjust the
diameter of the wire finder fingers according to the particular tubing weight or
restriction size. The fingers should be adjusted to bear on the tubing walls so that
the wire cannot pass.
2) If necessary, attach a rope socket to the pin end of the wire finder.
3) Make up a suitable toolstring using tubular jars instead of spang jars.
4) Attach wire finder to releasing tool. (Normally a jar up to release tool is preferred.)
5) Attach wire finder assembly to the toolstring and zero on the tubing hanger flange.
6) Pick up tools into the lubricator and make it up to the BOP.
7) Pressure test the lubricator and open the swab valve, counting the number of turns.
8) Run in the hole slowly and continuously observe weight indicator.
9) Once close to the wire pull up the hole every 100ft. to ensure that the wire has not
been bypassed.
10) The wire tail (top of loose wire) depth will be indicated by weight loss. Sit wire finder
down on top of wire tail. (Care must be taken to ensure that the wire finder does not
run past the wire tail.)
11) Open jars and tap down on wire several times. This action will bundle the wire end
into the middle of the tubing forming a ‘birds nest’.
12) Continue to tap down on the wire until approximately 3ft. of wire has been ‘bird-
nested’. Pull out of the hole with the wire finder, ensuring that it has not attached
itself to the wireline.
13) Once the tool is confirmed to be inside the lubricator, close the swab valve and
bleed down the lubricator.
14) Back off the quick union and raise the lubricator.
Bowen Wire Finder/Retriever

In operation, the Bowen retriever is run into the well, the well fluid and friction cause the
skirt to ride up on the mandrel, exposing the spear point and the opening between the
spear point and the skirt.
When the tool contacts the broken line, the line will pass through the space between the
spear and the skirt. A loss of running in weight will show when contact has been made.
Stopping the decent causes the skirt to move down the mandrel, wedging the caught line
between the matching tapers of the skirt and the spear. Pulling up on the wireline
securely wedges the line, the entire wireline can then be pulled from the well.
The main disadvantages of this device are:
• Can be difficult to get through the tree.
• Difficult to pass through nipples and remain effective.
If used roughly, the fingers which make up the skirt can distort or break off causing further
problems.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Wire Finder Operating Technique

Having chosen the equipment to use, run in the hole to locate the wire. It is possible that
the scratcher wire finder will be a little tight in the tubing and that some gentle jarring will
be required before the finder will run freely in the tubing. When the finder runs freely,
proceed down the tubing monitoring the weight indicator and looking for any kind of
running pattern i.e. finder binding on tubing joints, etc.
In our example, upon reaching 300ft, the running speed should be extremely slow.
Ideally, when the scratcher reaches the broken end of the wire, downward movement
should cease, however, the most difficult part of fishing is pulling the broken end of the
wire away from the tubing wall and it is quite likely that the scratcher will run down inside
the wire spiral. When this happens, the operator should run in no further than 400ft. It is
quite likely that the running pattern will change when the finder is inside the wire spiral. If
400ft is reached, pull back up to 300ft and try again, watching for the pattern change and
try to pin-point the depth at which it changes, it may take some 5 or 6 attempts running
slowly up and down the tubing. When the depth has been established, start to increase
the speed at which the finder is run, past the position the top of the wire is believed to be
at (run no more than 30ft past the end of the wire at this stage).
The objective now is to pull the end of the wire away from the tubing wall and try and kink
it enough for a grab to get hold of it. Regardless of the type of wire finder, it is not good
practice to ball the wire, as a wire grab with a tight ball on it could lead to problems and
could cause damage to the safety valve landing nipple.
As soon as the wire finder has sat down on top of the wire, jar down lightly 2-3 times and
if the finder remains at the same depth, pull out of the hole. It’s quite likely that the wire
will have become entangled with the wire finder and will be retrieved; however, let us
assume that the wire is still left in the hole.
It must be taken into account that, if the first few runs with the wire finder are
unsuccessful, the finder must be pulled out of the hole, re-adjusted and re-run. It is
essential that patience and strict discipline are maintained.
The majority of fishing jobs which go sour are due to prematurely running wireline grabs
hundreds of feet below the end of the wire, causing the wire above the toolstring to ball
and tangle, thus leaving a second toolstring in the hole.
11.5.3 Wireline Grabs

These come in various designs such as two, three and four prong. The most important
point when choosing a grab is to choose one which is not too big for the job.
The largest inflexible OD on the grab must be measured. Assume that two wraps of wire,
one on top of the other are around that particular OD. Make sure that the total OD is
smaller than the smallest ID that the grab must pass through.
Preparing The Grab

Bend open the prongs of the grab until approx. 1/2 inch larger than the tubing ID.
Compress the prongs (without bending them) to less than the safety valve ID and bind
two wraps of packing tape around the tips of the prongs (Refer to Figure 11-6). (This will
be worn off when running up and down the tubing directly below the safety valve nipple).
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
It must be considered that although the main priority is to retrieve the fish, it must not be
achieved at the expense of scoring the bore of the SVLN. Therefore, all precautions must
be taken to avoid this happening.
Running The Grab

The grab would be run on the same toolstring as the scratcher, except that now an ‘RB’
pulling tool will be attached to the jars and latched onto a rope socket which is in turn,
attached to the top of the wireline grab.
If the wire finder has found where the top of the wire is, but has not removed the broken
end from the tubing wall, it may be preferable to either run the grab below the wire finder,
or else 'bait the grab' by looping wire around the top of the grab prongs (only if sufficient
clearance exists between grab OD and SVLN ID). Both methods have been known to be
successful.
Figure 11-6 - Preparing the Wireline Grab
Running A Wireline Grab/Spear

A wireline grab/spear is a device used for retrieving loose wire in the well. It is usually run
after a wire finder has bundled the wireline.
1) Select the appropriate size of wireline grab/spear for the tubing and restrictions. The
fingers should be adjusted to as close to the tubing internal diameter as possible.
2) If necessary, attach rope socket to the pin end of the wireline grab/spear.
3) Make up a suitable toolstring using tubular jars instead of spang jars. Depending on
the operation spring jars may also be used.
4) Attach wire grab/spear to releasing tool. (Normally a jar up to release tool is
preferred).
5) Attach wire grab/spear assembly to the toolstring and zero on the tubing hanger
flange.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
6) Pick up tools into the lubricator and make it up to the BOP.

8) Run in the hole slowly and continuously observe weight indicator.
9) Stop at approximately 100ft. above ‘bent wire’ and note pick up weight accurately.
10) Open jars and tap down on wire several times. This action should engage the
wireline grab/spear in the bent kinked wire.
11) Pick up and note the toolstring weight while pulling out. A steady overpull when
compared to the pick up weight in step 9 indicates successful retrieval of the wire.
12) If the retrieved wire becomes stuck, the releasing tool can be sheared leaving the
wireline grab/spear downhole. The wire size or toolstring configuration can then be
changed and another attempt made to retrieve the wire.
13) Pull out of the hole carefully, monitoring the weight indicator continuously. A sudden
loss of weight indicates that the retrieved wire has disengaged from the wire
grab/spear. It this should happen, repeat steps 8-12.
14) Recover the wire to surface by following the procedure for stripping wire.
11.5.4 Alligator Grab

The Alligator Grab, (Refer to Figure 11-7) is a wireline fishing tool utilised to catch and
retrieve loose objects (e.g. broken equipment) from the tubing. The grab is designed to
allow the operator to pre-determine the amount of jaw pressure required to effectively grip
the fish by adjusting the spring tension in the tool prior to running in the tubing.
Note: An external thread is available on the lower end of the top sub to
allow the attachment of a centraliser, if necessary.
The principle of operation is as follows.

When the grab is set down on a fish, downward jar action will shear the shear pin and the
force of the spring will move the inner mandrel upwards. This upward movement will also
move the shot pin upwards and, due to the slots in the upper ends of the jaws, rotate the
jaws about the pivot to grip the fish.
Note: Prior to running the alligator grab, it must be established that loose
objects exist in the tubing. This alligator grab is not designed to
withstand heavy jarring operations on a fish stuck in the tubing.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
The PCE alligator grab is available in various sizes as listed in Table 11-b below.
Size ins. (mm) Fish Neck Size ins. Thread Connection ins. Maximum OD ins.(mm)
(mm) (mm)
11/4 (31.75) 1.187 (30.15) 15
/16 (23.81) - 10 tpi 1.25 (31.75)
11/2 (38.10) 1.187 (30.15) 15
/16 (23.81) - 10 tpi 1.50 (38.10)
2 (50.80) 1.375 (34.93) 11/16 (26.99) - 10 tpi 1.75 (44.45)
3 (76.20) 1.750 (44.45) 15/16 (33.34) - 10 tpi 2.25 (57.15)
Table 11-b- Specifications for the PCE Alligator
Figure 11-7 - PCE Alligator Grab

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11.5.5 Go Devil
The go-devil is similar in appearance to a section of stem. It is available in 11/2ins and
17/8ins sizes and in lengths from 18ins to 60ins (5ft). It has a slot milled along its length
and a filler plate which is held in position with roll pins, leaving a hole in the centre to run
smoothly down the wire (Refer to Figure 11-8).
There are two major types of go-devil:
• Bevelled
• Flat-bottomed.
Figure 11-8- Go-Devil

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Bevelled Go-Devil
A bevelled go-devil is used to slide down wire and cut at the socket by a ‘slicing’ action.
Length is determined by the contents of the tubing:
• Long in heavy oil.
• Short in light fluid.
This tool is not recommended for use in gas, as speed of impact could cause
considerable tubing/casing damage.
Ensure diameter is sufficient to prevent devil wedging alongside toolstring.
Flat-Bottomed Go-Devil
A flat bottom Go Devil is used to:
• Trip Flopetrol cutter and Kinley.
• Provide cutting base on sand/wire.
• Add weight to toolstring to jar down.
• Assist toolstring back into tubing (past a muleshoe).
Note: When assembling a Go-devil above a BOP or tree connection, pack

the quick union with rags to prevent pieces being dropped inside.
11.5.6 Cutter Bar

Kinley Snepper (Refer to Figure 11-9).
The Kinley Snepper will cut any line up to and including 0.125ins and 7/32ins electric
(braided) line. It is 21/2ft long and can be run in a 11/4ins minimum ID or larger. It will cut
the line 21/2ins above the rope socket (this is important when fishing for the rope socket
as a pulling tool with an ‘S’ core would be required to grip the neck of the rope socket).
It is designed to be dropped into the hole and operates by the impact of its own weight
when it hits the target.
As the snepper cuts, it also crimps the line and clamps onto it. This action makes it
possible to pull the snepper back up with the cut line, (though only use the crimper if the
snepper has sufficient weight to overcome the force of well pressure on the cross-
sectional area of the wire).
The cutter can be used in three ways:
1) Dropped onto the rope socket.
2) Dropped and followed by a flat bottomed Go-Devil for cutting large OD. wire, in
deviated wells or wells with high viscosity fluid.
3) Dropped upside down when a rope socket is covered with sand; this gives a firm
base for a flat-bottomed Go-Devil to be dropped on to.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
To recap, the wireline would have been picked up in the lubricator using the gauge cutter
until the wire is pulled tight against the toolstring downhole. It may also be possible to see
the toolstring jars open and close downhole by observing the weight indicator. The
objective now is to prepare the broken wire for the application of the wireline cutter so that
the wire may eventually be cut at the rope socket. To do this, the jars on the downhole
toolstring must be closed, (so that the cutter will strike solidly), and enough slack wire
must be played out to avoid fouling the cutter against the tubing wall.
Satisfactory results can be achieved by allowing approx. 3ins of slack per 1,000ft in a
straight hole and approx. 6ins per 1,000ft in a deviated hole. Sufficient time must also be
allowed for the cutter to reach the toolstring. By assuming a speed of 250ft per min in an
oil well and 350ft per min in a gas well, 45mins should be adequate waiting time for this
scenario.
It is important that the operator does not prematurely manipulate the broken wire, as this
could cause the cutter to cut the wire before reaching the toolstring, thus complicating the
fishing job.
The next and most important point is to consider the OD of the cutter bar, and the OD of
the toolstring versus the ID of the tubing. The Kinley Snepper for example, has an OD of
1.5ins. The toolstring in our case has an OD of 1.875ins. Side by side that equals
3.375ins OD. The ID of 51/2ins lbs per ft tubing is 4.892ins.
As previously discussed, the snepper is designed to stay attached to the wireline once it
has cut it, however, if the snepper fell off the end of the wire, it would fall down beside the
toolstring, possibly wedging itself between the jars, (which are slanted in the tubing), and
the tubing wall, creating what could be an -impossible fishing job. Therefore, the snepper
must have centralisers fitted in order to avoid this problem. These centralisers should be
designed for each size of tubing, and kept in a fishing box ready for fitting should the
occasion arise.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 11-9- Kinley Snepper

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Flopetrol Cable Cutter (Refer to Figure 11-10).

The Flopetrol cable cutter can be used to cut wire in a well providing it is still accessible at
the surface. If the wire has broken downhole then a different type of cutter must be used.
The cable cutter is attached to the wireline and dropped into the well. It strikes the rope
socket or go-devil (used when there is sand etc. covering the rope-socket), and cuts the
wire simultaneously gripping the cut end. The cable cutter can then be retrieved with the
fishing wire. By changing the components it can cut all sizes of slickline and braided line
up to 1/4ins. diameter, leaving 1ins. of wire remaining above the rope socket.
The cutter can be used in two ways, with the tool in 'standard' mode and the hammer an
integral part of the tool or in the 'interface' mode. If there is a restriction or a fluid level in
the well, it is possible, due to the operation of the 'standard' tool, that it will cut the wire at
these points. For this reason the Flopetrol cable cutter can be deployed in the 'interface'
mode. This involves removing the hammer section from the cutting section. The tapered
wedge in the cutter is pinned with a brass shear pin to avoid premature shearing. The
cutting section is then attached to the wireline.
Before starting this operation, the BOP must be closed and the pressure bled off from the
lubricator.
The lubricator can now be made up to the BOP, the pressure equalised across it and the
BOP opened. The cable cutter will now be free to drop down the hole. The time it takes
for the cutter to reach the rope-socket will vary depending on the depth, deviation and the
type of fluid in the hole.
Once it is considered that the cutter has reached the rope-socket, an overpull should be
exerted on the wireline to ascertain whether the cutter bar above has cut the wireline. If
not, the wireline should be slacked off, the BOP closed and the lubricator bled off and
removed.
The hammer/weight bar can now be installed and dropped in the same manner as the
cutter section. When the hammer section hits the cutting section, the impact is
transmitted through the cutting assembly, cutting and gripping the wireline.
The 'interface' tool can be retrieved on the wire in the same manner as the 'standard'
cutter.
The cutter and go-devil are recovered with the wire and give a clean cut, close to the rope
socket. They can be used in oil or gas by varying the length of the go-devil.
Caution: The OD of the toolstring to be dropped on and the ID of tubing

should be known and, if necessary, centralisers should be added to
the cutter to prevent it going down the side of the toolstring.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 11-10 - Flopetrol Wireline Cutter

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Cutter Bar Procedure

1) Note the normal cable weight and slack off the wire.
2) Close the BOP rams on the wire and vent down the lubricator via the manifold.
Observe the lubricator pressure gauge for any pressure build-up.
3) Ensure there is zero pressure build-up in the lubricator and back off the quick-union.
Raise the lubricator high enough to allow insertion of the cutter bar.
4) Install the cutter bar as specified in the manufacturer's manual.
Important: Check that the cutter bar slides up and down the wire freely.
5) Gently sit the cutter down on top of the BOP rams.

6) Stab the lubricator back on top of the BOPs. Take particular care to keep the cutter
bar aligned with lubricator to avoid premature cutting of the wire. Avoid excessive
slack on the wire. Make up quick-union and close lubricator manifold valve.
7) Open equalising valve on BOP to allow well pressure to equalise across it.
8) Crack open BOP rams, enough to free the wire, but without allowing the bar to drop.
9) Pick up the wire to the normal wire weight noted prior to slacking off, or until the
beginning of overpull is observed.
10) Fully open BOP rams to allow cutter bar to drop.
11) Allow sufficient time for bar to drop.
Note: This will vary depending on well depth, well deviation, well fluid and
bypass.
Note: In some cases the bar hitting the rope socket can be observed as a
small kick on the weight indicator, or felt manually on the line.
Deviation, restrictions, scale and doglegs can cause the bar to hang
up. Working the wire up and down can assist the cutter.
Interface Bar Procedure

1) The procedure to insert the interface bar into the lubricator and release it is the
same as for the cutter bar.
2) When the wire has been cut, pull back to surface. This should normally retrieve the
cutter bar and interface bar on the end of the wireline.
3) Once the tool is confirmed to be inside the lubricator, close the Xmas tree and bleed
down lubricator.
4) Back off the quick-union and raise the lubricator.
5) Remove the cutter bar and interface bar.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Centraliser Design
Ensure that the OD of the centraliser touches the tubing wall on one side with the other
side slightly overlapping the toolstring OD.
Ensure that the centraliser OD with two wraps of wire around it will pass through the
smallest ID (calculated safety factor).
Having dropped the snepper, the current state of the operation is as follows:
• The lubricator is in position with the wireline valve rams partially open
and the wire attached to the gauge cutter in the lubricator.
Attempt to pull the gauge cutter as high as possible into the lubricator, (this should be
possible if the wire is cut from the toolstring, if not some manipulation may be necessary
or else a flat bottomed go devil dropped on top of the snepper).
Having established that the wire is cut, close the wireline valve and bleed off the
lubricator.
Knowing at this stage that there is only a 2.5ft long snepper to pull back, the lubricator
can be rigged down to one section or even crossover and stuffing box to sit onto the
wireline valve. This makes backfeeding the wire much easier and less dangerous to
fingers etc.
Once the line has been backfeed through the stuffing box, it should then be spliced (using
pipe splices as discussed with gauge cutter), onto the 0.108” drum, 3/16" drum, or direct to
the spooling device, whichever is most convenient, and having opened the wireline valve
the wire can be retrieved from the hole.
Caution: When retrieving the wire, a stage will be reached where pressure
acting on the cross section area of the wire creates a force greater
than the weight of the wire in the hole, at this stage the wire may
blow out of the stuffing box and out with control. Ensure that non
essential personnel are aware of this, so that they may stand well
clear.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11.5.7 Blind Box

Assuming that this well is vertical, it is possible to run a blind box on the end of a
toolstring (using tubular jars) down through the broken wireline to the rope socket and to
‘box’ off the wire from the rope socket, (2-4 downward jar actions usually being sufficient),
and retrieve the toolstring without becoming tangled up with the broken wire (Refer to
Figure 11-11).
It is essential that the blind box is of the exact size for the job, as a blind box with too
small an OD will not cut the wire, and a blind box that is too big will probably tangle up in
the broken line and prematurely cut the wire up the hole.
Figure 11-11 - Blind Box

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Formula
Always assume that the rope socket is sitting against the tubing wall.
The blind box must be of an exact size to touch the opposite side of the tubing wall, and
overlap the centre of the rope socket in order to cut the wire.
Check that the blind box OD is small enough to go through the smallest tubing ID allowing
two wraps of wire around it.
Example:
5 inch, 15# Tubing
Tubing ID = 4.408
Toolstring OD = 1.875
Blind Box OD = 3.52
4 x 0.108 wire = 0.43
Blind Box + Wire = 3.95
‘R’ Nipple ID = 4.125
Total Clearance
above Safety Factor = 0.18
This formula has proven very successful on a number of occasions, but it is stressed that
only the correct size of blind box will provide any chance of success.
11.5.8 Special Tools

The Petroline Heavy Duty Pulling Tool, see Figure 11-12, is designed to minimise the
problem of wear and/or damage to fishing necks during operations where heavy jarring is
intended. This tool has been designed so that the latching dogs act on the full
circumference of a fishing neck. The Petroline heavy duty pulling tool can withstand
extensive heavy jarring. It is a shear down to release tool.
The pulling tool is run on the end of a wireline string that includes a jar accelerator, 8-10ft
of weight bar, tension jars, link jars and the heavy duty pulling tool. The wireline toolstring
is run down to the fish and latched on to the fishing neck. Latching requires the core
adapter and finger core to move upwards in the latch housing; the fingers will move into
the recess. Latching is complete when the coiled spring in the upper housing returns the
finger core to its original position. Upward jarring should be continued until the object
becomes loose or it is necessary to cut off some wire or re-tie a new rope socket.
If safety disconnect is necessary several downward jars will shear the pin. The finger core
will be in the raised and release position and the wireline string may then be pulled to the
surface.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Note: Prolonged jarring on non-heavy duty tools can result in tool failure
and the possibility of parts being left downhole.
Figure 11-12- Petroline Heavy Duty Pulling Tool

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11.5.9 Centre Spears

Wireline Bulldog Spears are fishing tools specifically designed to catch stuck tubular
assemblies by spearing into their internal profiles. There are three types of Bulldog
Spears:
• Conventional type
• Collet type
• Releasable Collet type.
In all cases, the upward movement of a tapered rod will expand a set of slips outward
onto the internal profile of a fish. When upward jarring is employed to free the fish, the
slips will bite tighter into the internal profile of the stuck assembly due to the tapered
arrangement between the slips and the tapered rod on the spear.
Conventional Spear
Figure 11-12 shows a conventional wireline bulldog spear. This type of spear is primarily
designed to catch stuck tubular profiles with internal diameters ranging from 0.5 to
6.00ins. The bulldog spear consists of a top sub/fish neck, tapered rod and hardened and
tempered slips which are dovetailed into grooves in the tapered rod. The through bore in
the tapered rod and the hole drilled in the top sub facilitates fluid bypass when running
the spear in the tubing.
Depending on the I.D. of the fish, the number of slips used will vary.
Note: The conventional bulldog spear cannot be released once it catches

on the internal profile of a downhole assembly. It must be run with a
jar-down-to-release pulling tool to ensure that release is possible
from the spear when necessary.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 11-13 - Conventional Bulldog Spear

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Releasable Collet Type Bulldog Spear

The Releasable Collet Type Bulldog Spear, (Refer to Figure 11-14), is used to catch
stuck assemblies with internal diameters ranging from 0.875 to 3.5ins. The releasable
collet spear consists of a spear, centre mandrel with attached fishing neck, collet slips,
spring and outer mandrel with an internal fishing neck. This spear has no fluid bypass
features.
The principle of operation is as follows. A shear-up-to-release running/pulling tool (e.g.
Camco ‘JU’ or Otis ‘RB’) is used to run the spear into the fish. When the fishing tool
spears the downhole assembly, the collet will positively stop on top of the fish and the
spear will move into the bore of the fish. This action will compress the spring and
simultaneously allow the collet slips to retract as the OD of the taper on the centre
mandrel reduces.
When the collet slips are retracted sufficiently, they will force the collet slips down the
taper and grip. An upward pull on the wireline will move the centre mandrel up and
expand the collet slips to bite into the fish. Upward jarring is then applied to free the fish
or shear the shear pin in the running/pulling tool.
To release the spear from the fish, a shear-up-to-release pulling tool is used (e.g. Otis
‘GR’) to drive down the centre mandrel and latch into internal fishing neck on the outer
mandrel. As the centre mandrel is driven down, the collet slips retract on the taper until
the pulling tool latches. With the collet slips retracted, upward jarring will free the spear
from the fish.
Note: Due to the function of the spring, the downward movement of the
centre mandrel and the latching of the pulling tool are essential for
the release of the spear.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 11-14 - Collet Type Spears

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11.6 LOST TOOL FISHING PROCEDURE
11.6.1 Impression Block

The Lead Impression Block (LIB), see Figure 11-15 (the running procedure for which is
already described in section 9.12), is an important and useful tool to have available during
fishing operations. A selection of LIBs should be kept in the wireline toolbox in a range of
ODs to suit the various tubing and completion equipment sizes. Tapered LIBs can be
used to check damage inside internal fishing necks.
The lead core is normally pinned through the body and should be checked prior to
running the tool to ensure that it is firmly secure. Other pre-running checks are to
measure the OD accurately and ensure that the lead base is clean and smooth and has
no markings on it that would confuse the operator when interpreting an impression.
When running in the tubing, the LIB should be lowered slowly through the Xmas tree,
landing nipples, side pocket mandrels (SPMs), and sliding side doors (SSDs); the
operator should have the depths of these completion tools prior to running the tubing.
Running the LIB without a knuckle joint can avoid excessive movement of the tool while
running in. This will reduce the marking of the lead and will tend to centre the LIB for a
more representative impression.
Note: If the toolstring hangs up, it should be tapped through the restriction
very slowly without jarring.
When the toolstring is 4-6ft. above the fish the LIB is lowered very gently onto the fish.
The tools are then picked up to open the jars about half way and the toolstring jarred
down once only. The toolstring is pulled back to surface.
Note: Heavy downward jarring will cause the lead to extrude (spread
outwards) and may interfere with the retrieval of the LIB through any
restrictions in the tubing, i.e. landing nipples etc.
The LIB should be handled with care on recovery to avoid making any other marks on the
lead that would make the impression taken downhole difficult to interpret. The LIB can be
used with excellent results and will assist the operator in selecting the correct fishing tool
to clear the tubing and return the well to normal operations.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 11-15 - Lead Impression Block (LIB)
11.6.2 LIB Running Procedure

1) Select a suitable size of LIB. It should be at least 0.25ins. below the smallest tubing
restriction to be encountered.
2) Prepare the base of the LIB. Remove all marks and dents using a file and polish the
face. The LIB should then be properly protected and handled with care to prevent
damage to the prepared face.
3) Make up the LIB onto the toolstring taking care not to mark the polished face.
4) Pick up the toolstring into the lubricator and make it up to the BOP.
Note: Make sure that the toolstring is pulled up well inside the lubricator to
avoid the LIB making contact with the BOPs as the lubricator is
lowered. Remember that, as the upper hay pulley is attached to the
top of the lubricator, the cable will move down at double the rate of
the lubricator.
6) Run in the hole slowly with the LIB. Stop approximately 100ft. above the object of
which an impression is required.
7) Take an accurate pick up weight.
8) Run the hole slowly and sit down gently on top of the object.
9) Pick up and partly open the jars. Jar down once only.
Note: Jarring down more than once may confuse the impression and
loosen the lead.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10) Slowly pull out of the hole with the lead impression block.
11) When certain that the tool is inside the lubricator, close in well and bleed down
lubricator.
12) Back off the quick union and pick up lubricator.
13) Pull lubricator to one side of the Xmas tree to ensure that the LIB cannot make
contact with the top of the Xmas tree or any object as it is being lowered out of the
lubricator.
14) Remove LIB for inspection, taking care not to damage the polished face.
11.6.3 Fishing Magnet

The Magnet fishing tool is designed to remove small pieces of ferrous metals from the top
of tools in the wells (Refer to Figure 11-16). This tool does not have a hole through it for
fluid bypass as do other tools. The magnet is fitted with a sleeve on the outside and a
spring which compresses the sleeve to keep it below the end the magnet. Upon reaching
the depth of the fish the operator sets the tool string down gently on top of the fish. The
weight of the tool string the forces the magnet down the sleeve to pick up small pieces of
wire or ferrous metals that might be lying on top or around the fish. This should be
retrieved from the well slowly so as not to lose the particles that have been picked up.
Figure 11-16 - Magnet

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11.6.4 Type ‘BB’ Pulling tool

Assuming that the necessary re-spooling, re-rigging up of lubricator etc., has been
completed, the snepper (if it had fallen off the wire) and toolstring must be recovered.
This should be a relatively simple matter of using a centralised or skirted ‘SB’ or ‘UO’
pulling tool for the snepper and a skirted ‘UO’, ‘SS’ or ‘RS’ (a ‘UO’' pulling tool with the
bottom threaded to accept various sizes of skirt, will avoid the expense of threading both
‘S’ and ‘R’ bodies) depending on the need to jar up or down to shear the toolstring, etc.,
off from the downhole device. The use of an ‘S’ core for the rope socket (i.e. ‘RS’ or ‘SS’)
is recommended due to the fact that 21/2 inch of wire will be left above the rope socket
fishing neck, (a ‘B’ core would not have sufficient reach).
If there should be anything from 6ins - 2ins of wire attached to the rope socket, stopping
an ‘SS’ or ‘RS’ from reaching the rope socket, do not box it off with a blind box. A small
piece of wire is difficult to fish, and could hinder the retrieval of the toolstring or downhole
device. A ‘BB’ or ‘BE’ which have a split skirt should be used, alternatively, the skirt and
body of the ‘UO’ or ‘RS’, ‘SS’ can be modified to grip the rope socket leaving the wire
attached. (Refer to Figure 11-17).
Figure 11-17 - ‘BB’, ‘BE’ and ‘SS’ Pulling Tools

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11.6.5 Overshot
Overshots are used to grip downhole tools when:
• The fishing neck is worn or broken
• There is no fishing neck (i.e. the tool has parted by unscrewing)
• When a larger upward force is required than could be pulled on a
standard pulling tool.
The principle of operation of all overshots is the same. A hardened set of steel slips with
sharp upward facing teeth grip the fish. A spring assists these slips to engage initially.
However, an upward pull and upward jarring sets the slips tighter because of the tapered
ID in the skirt.
Upward movement of the matching taper on the skirt will increase the gripping force.
O’Bannon Overshot
The ability of the O’ Bannon Overshot, (Refer to Figure 11-18), to catch various items is
made possible by an upper and lower set of segmented slips which sit in tapered bowls
(Dual Catch Overshot). These slips are available in a 1/8ins. incremental range of sizes
giving this tool a broad catching range. (It is usual to select the slip size required and
check the grip by latching the same sized object at surface prior to running).
The principle of operation of the O’ Bannon overshot is as follows. The overshot is run in
the tubing with the ID of the slips slightly smaller than the OD of the fish. When the slips
contact the fish the slip segments move upwards in the tapered bowls increasing the ID of
the slip arrangement. The fish will move through the slips if the ID of the slips is big
enough.
On picking up the toolstring the teeth on the slips bite into the sides of the fish stopping
any movement of the slip segments. Further upward pull moves the tapered bowls up and
a wedging action makes the teeth bite tighter into the fish.
Note: O’ Bannon overshots have no release mechanism so they are

always run with a rope socket and latched into a shear up or shear
down pulling tool.
On retrieval at surface the O’ Bannon overshot requires to be disassembled.

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 11-18 - O’ Bannon Overshot

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Flopetrol Releasing Overshot

The Flopetrol Releasing Overshot, see Figure 11-19, performs the same function as the
O’ Bannon Overshot, i.e. it will catch tool assemblies or parts of assemblies which have
parted by breaking or unscrewing. However, the Flopetrol Overshot has a releasing
mechanism built into its upper assembly, that is, when the tool is subjected to downward
jarring the slips will retract and release the fish (release may be necessary if the wire
needs to be changed to a larger diameter line or a rope socket requires re-making).
The Flopetrol Overshot has a wide range of slips from 1/2ins. to 27/8ins. to fit the tool's two
different sizes of overshots.
Prior to running the overshot it is necessary to check that the correct core extension (long
or short), correct slip size, and correct shear pin (steel or brass) have been installed.
The principle of operation is as follows. On contact the slips stop at the top of the fish and
the remainder of the tool moves downwards. The spring then pushes the slips down and
the taper causes the initial grip.
An upward pull sets the slips tighter. Any upward jarring force to retrieve the fish is
transmitted through the skirt and the slips. The shear pin cannot be sheared by upward
jarring action.
Safety release is affected by downward jarring action; considerable jarring may
sometimes be required. The core remains resting on the fish - the remainder of the tool
moves downwards. Once the pin is sheared the two pawls hold the core in an upward
position which keeps the slips retracted from the taper.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 11-19 - Flopetrol Releasing Overshot

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
11.7 WIRE RECOVERY

Prior to commencing fishing operations under pressure, the following important points
must be noted:
• When pulling wire with toolstring and /or fish, sufficient lubricator length
is required to accommodate both toolstrings above the swab valve (with
both jars open)
• When the wire is open-ended, it may be forcibly ejected from the
stuffing box by the well pressure when the wire end is close to the
surface. Ensure that all non-essential personnel are excluded from the
immediate area.
11.7.1 Wire Recovery Procedure

1) Pull up until the wireline grab/spear is as far up into the lubricator as possible to
leave the maximum length of wire beneath it to work with.
2) Close the BOP rams and note the travel of the manual stems. This will indicate if
the rams have successfully closed or not. If closed completely, this usually indicates
the wire bundle/’birds nest’ is completely contained in the lubricator and the BOP
rams are closed on the fished wire.
3) Bleed down the lubricator. Close in the bleed valve and monitor lubricator pressure.
4) Before backing off the quick union, the pressure gauge should be checked and
should be reading zero pressure. The bleed off valve must be re-opened.
5) Back off the quick union and pick up the lubricator slowly, making sure that the wire
bundle/’birds nest’ inside does not snag.
Note: The wireline operator must slack off as the lubricator is being lifted.
6) Place and secure a wireline bar clamp to the wire immediately above the BOPs.
7) Lower the fishing string out of the lubricator and remove the wireline grab/spear and
wire bundle/’birds nest’.
8) Rig down the lubricator (or stand it to one side).
9) If necessary, strip through enough wire to feed back through the lubricator and
stuffing box. This is done by attaching a tugger line to the bar clamp and picking up.
The line is then secured at BOP level using a second bar clamp.
Note: The wireline can also be attached to a gauge cutter and the wireline
winch used to strip the wire through the BOP.
10) Thread the tail end through the lubricator assembly and the stuffing box. Make up
the stuffing box to the lubricator and position this assembly above the clamp on top
of the BOPs.
11) Remove the wire from the unit depth counter wheel assembly (to allow the knot to
be pulled onto the drum).
12) Join the ends of the wire using a nut and a standard wireline knot.
13) Pick up tension on the line using the wireline winch. Examine the knot closely. Make
sure that it does not begin to unwind under tension.
14) Remove the bar clamp from above the BOPs and stab on the lubricator, making up
the quick union (as the lubricator is lowered, the tension in the wireline will drop off).
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
15) Take up the tension in the wireline using the winch and open the equalising valve
on the BOPs.
16) Allow the pressure to equalise across the BOP and open same.
17) Pull out of the hole with the wireline until the wireline knot and several wraps are on
the drum. Place a wireline clamp on the line and slack off the tension.
18) Replace the wire in the unit depth counter wheel and take up the tension on the
wireline.
19) Remove the wireline clamp and continue to pull out of the hole.
20) Pull out of the hole carefully, observing the weight indicator closely. Any sudden
increase in weight may indicate that there is a knot or kink in the wire.
Note: When a knot is encountered, steps 1-19 must be repeated.
21) When the end of the retrieved wireline is approaching surface, ensure that all
personnel are well clear of the immediate area in case the tail end is ejected from
the well or the wire breaks unexpectedly.
22) Post a responsible person at the BOP control to be ready to close the BOPs when
the tail end reaches the surface.
If there is any possibility of losing any of the strands back through the wireline valve, then
use a fishing clamp, (consisting of two pieces of angle iron back to back, bolted together
so that the wire is clamped between the plates). The clamp must be long enough to
straddle the wireline valve; (Refer to Figure 11-20).
Once the wire has been clamped, it would be removed from the grab, and the grab and
pulling tool replaced by a gauge cutter. The objective now being to pull the wire as far up
the lubricator as possible. (Additional lubricator sections would be an advantage at this
stage.) The broken ends of the wire would be looped over the skirt of the gauge cutter
and secured by tying a wrap around wire knot (as per type ‘B’ rope socket), or by using a
2ins length of tube, which would make a tidier and more secure method of anchoring the
wire.
The ideal sizes of tube would be:
0.092 wire = 1/4in control line.
0.108 wire = 3/8in control line or copper pipe.

3
/16 inch braided line = 1/2in copper pipe.
Caution: It is tempting at this stage to attach the gauge cutter directly onto
the rope socket. This can be dangerous, as a certain amount of
weight is required to overcome the effect of the well pressure acting
on the cross-sectional area of the wire. Failure to allow for this could
cause the rope socket and gauge cutter to be blown up to the top of
the lubricator.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Figure 11-20 - Fishing Clamp
11.8 TOOL RECOVERY

This procedure refers to the recovery of a stuck toolstring with a clean rope socket.
Previous to this, boxing off and LIB runs will normally have been made to prepare and
check the rope socket.
Prior to commencing any fishing operation, attempt to determine the cause of the ‘stuck
tool’ from the well history. If the causes are connected with settling of debris etc., check to
see if these conditions can be removed by circulation, change of well fluid etc.
11.8.1 Tool Recovery Procedure

1) Ensure that there is enough length of lubricator above the swab valve to
accommodate the combined fishing and fished tools (with both jars open).
2) Select a suitable fishing tool and shear pin type (jar-up or jar-down release
mechanism) depending on the tool to be fished.
3) If appropriate, select the correct size of guide skirt and fit a centraliser above the
pulling tool instead of a guide skirt.
4) Make up the complete fishing string with sufficient weight (when selecting the
fishing string, consideration must be given to the combined weight of the fishing
string and the toolstring to be fished). Ensure that a spring/hydraulic jar is included
in the fishing string.
5) Pick up fishing string into lubricator after taking the zero on the tubing hanger
flange.
6) Make up the lubricator quick union to the BOP.
8) Run in the hole slowly, observing the weight indicator closely. Run in the hole to
approximately 100ft. above the top of the stuck tool.
9) Take an accurate pick-up weight and run in the hole slowly. Sit down on top of the
stuck tool.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
10) Pick up on the wireline and observe the weight indicator. Overpull will indicate that
the stuck tool is successfully latched. If not latched, repeat previous steps as
required.
11) Once the stuck tool has been properly latched, attempt to free it using the
spring/hydraulic jars.
12) If stuck tool is freed, pull out slowly and retrieve as normal.
13) If jarring produces no result, shear off fishing tool by jarring in the appropriate
direction. Pull out and revert to fishing operations using heavier equipment.
11.9 FISHING FOR KNOWN/UNIDENTIFIED OBJECTS

Every time wireline operations take place there is always the possibility of coming across
some sort of obstruction in the Xmas tree, tubing, above an SCSSV or plug. If this is the
case then we have to find out what the obstruction may be.
In an ideal situation the down hole cameras on the market could be used but as they are
expensive and are still being experimented with basic fishing for unidentified objects
would take place. To identify and clear or free obstruction/obstructions from the well.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
12. TOOLSTRING WEIGHT FOR FLOWING WELLS
For accurate calculation of wireline toolstring weight to operate in flowing wells, it is

necessary to consider the component forces that try to force the toolstring upwards if the
well is flowing, or downwards if an injector well.
• Force due to the piston effect:
Is the differential pressure that is generated along all the length of the
wireline toolstring, produces a force that tries to push the toolstring in the
direction of the flow. This force is proportional to fluid velocity, area
between tubing ID and toolstring OD, fluid viscosity and toolstring length.
• Thrust on the bottom of the toolstring:
Is the produced force which acts on the bottom surface of the toolstring
that tries to push in the direction of the flow. This is proportional to fluid
velocity, the toolstring diameter and fluid density.
• Thrust due to the friction on the wireline toolstring surface:
Is the friction drag force on the toolstring surface. This is proportional to
fluid velocity, the toolstring surface finish, fluid density and friction
coefficient that depend from Reynolds number and fluid composition.
12.1 PISTON EFFECT

Variables
F2 Force due to the piston effect for each length unit of the wire line tool string
V Fluid speed at the well pressure and temperature conditions
D1 External diameter of the wire line toolstring
D2 Inside diameter of the tubing or casing
η Fluid viscosity at the well pressure and temperature conditions
Table 12-a - Piston Effect Variables
The formula that represents the piston effect is as follows:

V × η × L × D12
F2 = C F2
D 22 − D12
D 22 + D12 − Eq. 12.A
D
1n 2
D1
where:
F2 = kg (lbs) D2 = mm (ins)
V = m/sec (ft/sec) η = cp
L = m (ft) CF2 = 2.6558 x 10-3 (5.44 x 10-4)
D1 = mm (ins)
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Tubing ID 23/8” 4.7# And Wireline Toolstring Diameter Of 1.5"

Force Per Foot Length
V Viscosity [cp]
[ft/sec] 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
10 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.07 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15
20 0.04 0.07 0.11 0.15 0.19 0.22 0.26 0.30
30 0.06 0.11 0.17 0.22 0.28 0.34 0.39 0.45
40 0.07 0.15 0.22 0.30 0.37 0.45 0.52 0.60
50 0.09 0.19 0.28 0.37 0.47 0.56 0.65 0.75
60 0.11 0.22 0.34 0.45 0.56 0.67 0.79 0.90
70 0.13 0.26 0.39 0.52 0.65 0.79 0.92 1.05
80 0.15 0.30 0.45 0.60 0.75 0.90 1.05 1.20
90 0.17 0.34 0.51 0.67 0.84 1.01 1.18 1.35
100 0.19 0.37 0.56 0.75 0.94 1.12 1.31 1.50
110 0.21 0.41 0.62 0.82 1.03 1.23 1.44 1.65
120 0.22 0.45 0.67 0.90 1.12 1.35 1.57 1.80
130 0.24 0.49 0.73 0.97 1.22 1.46 1.70 1.95
140 0.26 0.52 0.79 1.05 1.31 1.57 1.83 2.10
150 0.28 0.56 0.84 1.12 1.40 1.68 1.96 2.24
160 0.30 0.60 0.90 1.20 1.50 1.80 2.10 2.39
170 0.32 0.64 0.95 1.27 1.59 1.91 2.23 2.54
180 0.34 0.67 1.01 1.35 1.68 2.02 2.36 2.69
190 0.36 0.71 1.07 1.42 1.78 2.13 2.49 2.84
200 0.37 0.75 1.12 1.50 1.87 2.24 2.62 2.99
Table 12-b - Piston Force 1.5” Toolstring And 23/8” Tubing
Wire line tool string 1.5" & Tubing 2"3/8 4.7#
3.5
3 η=2.00
2.5 η=1.75
η=1.50
2
F [lb] η=1.25
1.5 η=1.00
1 η=0.75
η=0.50
0.5
η=0.25
0
0 50 100 150 200 250
V [ft/sec]
Figure 12-1 - Piston Force 1.5” Toolstring And 23/8” 4.7# Tubing
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1

V Viscosity [cp]
[ft/sec] 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2
0 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000
10 0,005 0,010 0,015 0,021 0,026 0,031 0,036 0,041
20 0,010 0,021 0,031 0,041 0,052 0,062 0,072 0,083
30 0,015 0,031 0,046 0,062 0,077 0,093 0,108 0,124
40 0,021 0,041 0,062 0,083 0,103 0,124 0,145 0,165
50 0,026 0,052 0,077 0,103 0,129 0,155 0,181 0,207
60 0,031 0,062 0,093 0,124 0,155 0,186 0,217 0,248
70 0,036 0,072 0,108 0,145 0,181 0,217 0,253 0,289
80 0,041 0,083 0,124 0,165 0,207 0,248 0,289 0,330
90 0,046 0,093 0,139 0,186 0,232 0,279 0,325 0,372
100 0,052 0,103 0,155 0,207 0,258 0,310 0,361 0,413
110 0,057 0,114 0,170 0,227 0,284 0,341 0,398 0,454
120 0,062 0,124 0,186 0,248 0,310 0,372 0,434 0,496
130 0,067 0,134 0,201 0,268 0,336 0,403 0,470 0,537
140 0,072 0,145 0,217 0,289 0,361 0,434 0,506 0,578
150 0,077 0,155 0,232 0,310 0,387 0,465 0,542 0,620
160 0,083 0,165 0,248 0,330 0,413 0,496 0,578 0,661
170 0,088 0,176 0,263 0,351 0,439 0,527 0,614 0,702
180 0,093 0,186 0,279 0,372 0,465 0,558 0,651 0,744
190 0,098 0,196 0,294 0,392 0,491 0,589 0,687 0,785
200 0,103 0,207 0,310 0,413 0,516 0,620 0,723 0,826
Table 12-c - Piston Force 1.5” Toolstring And 27/8” 6.5# Tubing
0.9
0.8 η=2.00
0.7 η=1.75
0.6 η=1.50
0.5 η=1.25
F [lb]
0.4 η=1.00
0.3 η=0.75
0.2 η=0.50
0.1 η=0.25
0
0 50 100 150 200 250
V [ft/sec]
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Tubing ID 31/2 9.3# And Wireline Toolstring Diameter Of 1.5"

V Viscosity[cp]
[ft/sec] 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2
0 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
10 0.0020 0.0041 0.0061 0.0082 0.0102 0.0123 0.0143 0.0164
20 0.0041 0.0082 0.0123 0.0164 0.0205 0.0246 0.0286 0.0327
30 0.0061 0.0123 0.0184 0.0246 0.0307 0.0368 0.0430 0.0491
40 0.0082 0.0164 0.0246 0.0327 0.0409 0.0491 0.0573 0.0655
50 0.0102 0.0205 0.0307 0.0409 0.0511 0.0614 0.0716 0.0818
60 0.0123 0.0246 0.0368 0.0491 0.0614 0.0737 0.0859 0.0982
70 0.0143 0.0286 0.0430 0.0573 0.0716 0.0859 0.1003 0.1146
80 0.0164 0.0327 0.0491 0.0655 0.0818 0.0982 0.1146 0.1309
90 0.0184 0.0368 0.0552 0.0737 0.0921 0.1105 0.1289 0.1473
100 0.0205 0.0409 0.0614 0.0818 0.1023 0.1228 0.1432 0.1637
110 0.0225 0.0450 0.0675 0.0900 0.1125 0.1350 0.1575 0.1800
120 0.0246 0.0491 0.0737 0.0982 0.1228 0.1473 0.1719 0.1964
130 0.0266 0.0532 0.0798 0.1064 0.1330 0.1596 0.1862 0.2128
140 0.0286 0.0573 0.0859 0.1146 0.1432 0.1719 0.2005 0.2291
150 0.0307 0.0614 0.0921 0.1228 0.1534 0.1841 0.2148 0.2455
160 0.0327 0.0655 0.0982 0.1309 0.1637 0.1964 0.2291 0.2619
170 0.0348 0.0696 0.1043 0.1391 0.1739 0.2087 0.2435 0.2782
180 0.0368 0.0737 0.1105 0.1473 0.1841 0.2210 0.2578 0.2946
190 0.0389 0.0777 0.1166 0.1555 0.1944 0.2332 0.2721 0.3110
200 0.0409 0.0818 0.1228 0.1637 0.2046 0.2455 0.2864 0.3274
Table 12-d - Piston Force 1.5” Toolstring And 31/2” 9.3# Tubing
0.09
0.08 η=2.00
0.07 η=1.75
0.06 η=1.50
0.05 η=1.25
0.04 η=1.00
0.03 η=0.75
0.02 η=0.50
0.01 η=0.25
0
0 50 100 150 200 250
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Tubing ID 5 13.0# And Wireline Toolstring Diameter Of 1.5"

V Viscosity [cp]
[ft/sec] 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2
0 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
10 0.0005 0.0010 0.0015 0.0020 0.0025 0.0030 0.0035 0.0040
20 0.0010 0.0020 0.0030 0.0040 0.0050 0.0060 0.0070 0.0080
30 0.0015 0.0030 0.0045 0.0060 0.0075 0.0090 0.0106 0.0121
40 0.0020 0.0040 0.0060 0.0080 0.0100 0.0121 0.0141 0.0161
50 0.0025 0.0050 0.0075 0.0100 0.0126 0.0151 0.0176 0.0201
60 0.0030 0.0060 0.0090 0.0121 0.0151 0.0181 0.0211 0.0241
70 0.0035 0.0070 0.0106 0.0141 0.0176 0.0211 0.0246 0.0281
80 0.0040 0.0080 0.0121 0.0161 0.0201 0.0241 0.0281 0.0322
90 0.0045 0.0090 0.0136 0.0181 0.0226 0.0271 0.0317 0.0362
100 0.0050 0.0100 0.0151 0.0201 0.0251 0.0301 0.0352 0.0402
110 0.0055 0.0111 0.0166 0.0221 0.0276 0.0332 0.0387 0.0442
120 0.0060 0.0121 0.0181 0.0241 0.0301 0.0362 0.0422 0.0482
130 0.0065 0.0131 0.0196 0.0261 0.0327 0.0392 0.0457 0.0522
140 0.0070 0.0141 0.0211 0.0281 0.0352 0.0422 0.0492 0.0563
150 0.0075 0.0151 0.0226 0.0301 0.0377 0.0452 0.0528 0.0603
160 0.0080 0.0161 0.0241 0.0322 0.0402 0.0482 0.0563 0.0643
170 0.0085 0.0171 0.0256 0.0342 0.0427 0.0512 0.0598 0.0683
180 0.0090 0.0181 0.0271 0.0362 0.0452 0.0543 0.0633 0.0723
190 0.0095 0.0191 0.0286 0.0382 0.0477 0.0573 0.0668 0.0764
200 0.0100 0.0201 0.0301 0.0402 0.0502 0.0603 0.0703 0.0804
Table 12-e - Piston Force 1.5” Toolstring And 5” 13.0# Tubing
0.09
0.08 η=2.00
0.07 η=1.75
0.06 η=1.50
0.05 η=1.25
0.04 η=1.00
0.03 η=0.75
0.02 η=0.50
0.01 η=0.25
0
0 50 100 150 200 250
Figure 12-4 - Piston Force 1.5” Toolstring And 5” 13.0# Tubing

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
12.2 FORCE ON TOOLSTRING SECTION
Variables
Qhyd Fluid rate at the well pressure and temperature conditions
D1 External diameter of the wire line tool
CF Friction Factor
ρ Fluid density at the well pressure and temperature conditions
Table 12-f - Force On Toolstring Section
The fluid speed is expressed by the following formula:

Qhyd 1000000 × 4
V = CF × × Eq. 12.B
86400 D22 × π
where:
V = m/sec (ft/sec)
Qhyd = m3/sec (ft3/sec)
D 22 = mm2(ins2)
CF = 14.737 (2.122 x 10-3)
The thrust of the fluid on the toolstring section is expressed from the following formula:
F1 = C F1× D12 × V 2 × ρ Eq. 12.C
where:
D 12 = mm2 (ins2)
V = m/sec (ft/sec)
ρ = kg/dm3 (lb/ins3)
CF1 = 4.169 x 10-5 (0.0055)

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
The results of the following chart and graph are expressed in pounds.
Wireline Toolstring Diameter 1.5 [inch]

V ρ [gr/cm³]
[ft/sec] 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
10 0.25 0.50 0.74 0.99 1.24
20 0.99 1.98 2.97 3.96 4.95
30 2.23 4.46 6.68 8.91 11.14
40 3.96 7.92 11.88 15.84 19.80
50 6.19 12.38 18.56 24.75 30.94
60 8.91 17.82 26.73 35.64 44.55
70 12.13 24.26 36.38 48.51 60.64
80 15.84 31.68 47.52 63.36 79.20
90 20.05 40.10 60.14 80.19 100.24
100 24.75 49.50 74.25 99.00 123.75
110 29.95 59.90 89.84 119.79 149.74
120 35.64 71.28 106.92 142.56 178.20
130 41.83 83.66 125.48 167.31 209.14
140 48.51 97.02 145.53 194.04 242.55
150 55.69 111.38 167.06 222.75 278.44
160 63.36 126.72 190.08 253.44 316.80
170 71.53 143.06 214.58 286.11 357.64
180 80.19 160.38 240.57 320.76 400.95
190 89.35 178.70 268.04 357.39 446.74
200 99.00 198.00 297.00 396.00 495.00
Table 12-g - Force on 1.5” Toolstring Diameter
600
500 ρ=1.0
400 ρ=0.8
F [lb] 300 ρ=0.6
200 ρ=0.4
100 ρ=0.2
0
0 50 100 150 200 250
V [ft/sec]
Figure 12-5 - Force on 1.5” Toolstring Diameter

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
12.3 FORCE DUE TO FRICTION OF THE TOOLSTRING AT SURFACE
Variables
Qhyd Fluid rate at the well pressure and temperature conditions
D1 External diameter of the wire line tool
ρ Fluid density at the well pressure and temperature conditions
CF Friction Factor
s Length area of the wire line tool string (Metric unit: length = 1dm- English unit length
= 1 inch)
Table 12-h - Force Due To Friction Effect
The fluid speed is expressed in the following relationship:

Q hyd 1000000 × 4
V= ×
86400 D 22 × π
where:
V = m/sec (ft/sec)
Qhyd = m3/g (ft3/sec)
D 22 = mm2(ins2)
CF = 14.737 (2.122 x 10-3)
The thrust due to the friction on the toolstring surface is expressed in the following
relationship:
0.10797
CF = Valid if (D2 - D) <4.277 ins
(D 2 −D1 )
2.582
0.10797
CF = Valid if (D2 - D) >4.277 ins
(D 2 −D1)2.582
where:
D1 = ins
D2 = ins
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
therefore:
V2
F3 =K F × 0.1 × C F × s × ρ ×
2
where:
F3 = kg (lbs) V = m/sec (ft/sec)
s = dm2 (ins2) CF = Dimensionles
ρ = kg/dm3 (kg/dm3) KF = 508.2552 (1.6576)
The results of the following chart and graph are expressed in pounds.

Density kg / dm3
V[ft/sec] 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
5 0.66 1.32 2.65 3.97 5.29 6.62
10 2.65 5.29 10.59 15.88 21.17 26.47
15 5.95 11.91 23.82 35.73 47.64 59.55
20 10.59 21.17 42.35 63.52 84.69 105.86
25 16.54 33.08 66.16 99.25 132.33 165.41
30 23.82 47.64 95.28 142.92 190.55 238.19
35 32.42 64.84 129.68 194.52 259.36 324.21
40 42.35 84.69 169.38 254.07 338.76 423.45
45 53.59 107.19 214.37 321.56 428.75 535.93
50 66.16 132.33 264.66 396.99 529.32 661.65
Table 12-i - Friction Force 1.5” Toolstring And 23/8” 4.6# Tubing
700
ρ=1.0
600
ρ=0.8
500
400 ρ=0.6
F3[lb]
300
ρ=0.4
200
ρ=0.2
100
ρ=0.1
0
0 20 40 60
V[ft/sec]
Figure 12-6 - Friction Force 1.5” Toolstring And 23/8” 4.6# Tubing
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1

Density kg / dm3
V[ft/sec] 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
5 0.12 0.25 0.49 0.74 0.99 1.24
10 0.49 0.99 1.98 2.97 3.95 4.94
15 1.11 2.22 4.45 6.67 8.90 11.12
20 1.98 3.95 7.91 11.86 15.82 19.77
25 3.09 6.18 12.36 18.54 24.71 30.89
30 4.45 8.90 17.79 26.69 35.59 44.49
35 6.05 12.11 24.22 36.33 48.44 60.55
40 7.91 15.82 31.63 47.45 63.27 79.09
45 10.01 20.02 40.04 60.06 80.07 100.09
50 12.36 24.71 49.43 74.14 98.86 123.57
Table 12-j - Friction Force 1.5” Toolstring And 27/8” 6.5# Tubing
Tubing 2"7/8 6.5# & Wire Line tool string 1.5"
140
=1.0
120
100 =0.8
80
=0.6
F3[lb]
60
=0.4
40
=0.2
20
=0.1
0
0 20 40 60
V[ft/sec]
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1

Density kg / dm3
V[ft/sec] 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
5 0.04 0.07 0.15 0.22 0.30 0.37
10 0.15 0.30 0.59 0.89 1.19 1.48
15 0.33 0.67 1.33 2.00 2.67 3.34
20 0.59 1.19 2.37 3.56 4.75 5.93
25 0.93 1.85 3.71 5.56 7.41 9.27
30 1.33 2.67 5.34 8.01 10.68 13.35
35 1.82 3.63 7.27 10.90 14.53 18.17
40 2.37 4.75 9.49 14.24 18.98 23.73
45 3.00 6.01 12.01 18.02 24.02 30.03
50 3.71 7.41 14.83 22.24 29.66 37.07
Table 12-k - Friction Force 1.5” Toolstring And 31/2” 9.3# Tubing
Tubing 2"7/8 6.5# & Wire Line tool string 1.5"
140
ρ=1.0
120
100 ρ=0.8
80
ρ=0.6
F3[lb]
60
ρ=0.4
40
ρ=0.2
20
ρ=0.1
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
V[ft/sec]
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Tubing ID 5” 13.0# And Wireline Toolstring Diameter Of 1.5"

Density kg / dm3
V[ft/sec] 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
5 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.04 0.05 0.06
10 0.02 0.05 0.10 0.14 0.19 0.24
15 0.05 0.11 0.22 0.32 0.43 0.54
20 0.10 0.19 0.38 0.58 0.77 0.96
25 0.15 0.30 0.60 0.90 1.20 1.50
30 0.22 0.43 0.87 1.30 1.73 2.16
35 0.29 0.59 1.18 1.77 2.36 2.95
40 0.38 0.77 1.54 2.31 3.08 3.85
45 0.49 0.97 1.95 2.92 3.90 4.87
50 0.60 1.20 2.40 3.61 4.81 6.01
Table 12-l - Friction Force 1.5” Toolstring And 5” 13.0# Tubing
6 ρ=1.0
5
ρ=0.8
F3[lb] ρ=0.6
ρ=0.4
2
ρ=0.2
1
ρ=0.1
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
V[ft/sec]
Figure 12-9 - Friction Force 1.5” Toolstring And 5” 13.0# Tubing

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
13. WIRELINE TESTING
There are two methods of testing slickline, the torsion test and the Eddy current test. Both
of these are detailed in this section.
13.1 TORSION TEST

The portable torsion tester has been designed to be able to test the condition of wireline
materials in the field in compliance with API 9A.
13.1.1 Test Objective

To measure the number of twists an 8ins long sample piece of wireline can withstand
before breakage occurs. Recording these results in a log, enables a performance curve to
be drawn showing the life span of a wireline in relationship to it's usage. This highlights
the current embrittlement condition of a wireline prior to carrying out any further wireline
operations.
13.1.2 Procedure
1) Pull approx. 50ft of wire from the drum, cut a small length and prepare a specimen
2) Place the specimen through the jaws of the tester. Set the jaws at the appropriate
marks which provide the wire gauge length of 8ins. between the jaws.
3) Tighten down the Allen holding screws sufficiently to hold the wire in place during
the test.
4) Close the torsion tester lid and secure the latch.
5) Rotate the handle at a constant rate of approx. 60 turns/min (60rpm) until the wire
breaks. Count and record the number of turns taken to break the wire, if the total of
rotations is not a whole number, round them up if the part rotation is equal to or
greater than a half turn.
6) Unlatch and open the lid, remove the wire ends from the jaws and inspect the break
to observe if it is a clean shear or not (Refer to fracture analysis section 13.1.3).
Enter the number of turns or rotations into the log book and any relevant information
from the analysis.
7) A torsion test should be carried out at the start of all wireline rig up operations and
after every time a new rope socket connection is made. If the number of rotations is
less than the API or manufacturers guidelines, refer to the wireline test analysis
section 13.1.3.
8) The wireline job history should also be entered into the log book along which helps
identify operations that cause fast deterioration rates.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
API 9A Torsion Limits

0.072 29
0.082 26
0.092 23
0.108 20
Table 13-a - API A9 Acceptable Torsion Limits
Figure 13-1 - Typical Wireline Specimen Preparation
13.1.3 Wireline Test Analysis
Acceptance
If the number of turns is within satisfactory limits, the test piece is deemed to have passed
the test, irrespective of the position of the failure. If the number of turns does not satisfy
the requirements of the specification and if failure is within 1/8 ins of the grips, the test
shall be considered as invalid and shall be repeated.
If, when making any individual test, the first specimen fails then two additional specimens
shall be tested as confirmation. The average from any two tests will then be taken as
representation of the wire. If these are also failures, 500ft of wire will be pulled from the
drum and the test repeated. On further failure of the tests, a maximum of two more 500ft
lengths shall be removed and tests conducted again. If after this, the wireline still fails the
tests, the Wireline Supervisor should be informed so as to make a decision on the
disposition of the line.
Torsion Fracture Analysis

The significance of the torsion test is not fully appreciated by some personnel as a
definitive wire quality arbiter for carbon steel wirelines. It is not only the number of twists
to failure that is important, but more specifically, whether the material exhibits a ‘ductile’
or a ‘brittle’ primary fracture. In general, three types of primary wire fracture may be
encountered at the conclusion of a torsion test, these are categorised by API as follows.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Fracture Classification
Grade 1 Fracture without Secondary Breaks

After testing, the sample should contain a
single fracture which is square ended
(sometimes referred to as a ‘Ball and
Socket’ break). There should be no
evidence of spiral splitting on the sample
and no secondary fractures.
This type of fracture is characteristic in
wire, in suitable condition for continued use.
It is usually related to high numbers of turns
before failure.
Figure 13-2 - Single-Square Ended

Primary Fracture
Grade 1 Fracture with Secondary Breaks

Sometimes a grade 1 fracture may be
accompanied by a secondary helical-
shaped fracture. This secondary fracture is
a result of the instantaneous release of
stored energy when the primary fracture
occurs. It is termed a ‘recoil’ fracture.
Although a recoil fracture indicates a slight
reduction in torsional strength and ductility,
it can be discounted. The main concern is
the primary fracture and this is a true
reflection of the wire condition.
Figure 13-3 - Single-Square Ended

Primary Fracture with Secondary Breaks
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Grade 2 Fractures
Although containing a square-ended break, a
grade 2 sample primary fracture may be
slightly stepped.
Secondary helical fractures may be present
and slight spiral splitting may also be in
evidence.
This type of primary fracture is usually
associated with a lower number of turns
before failure.
Figure 13-4- Slightly Stepped Primary Fracture
Grade 3 Fractures
This primary fracture will show a severely
stepped or helical type break, usually
associated with secondary fractures. Spiral
splitting will almost certainly be present along
with localised twisting.
A secondary break is not usually present as
the primary break is associated with a low
number of turns to failure.
This sample would be unacceptable for
further use. Re-testing would be required
after spooling off approximately 500ft of wire.
Figure 13-5- Single -Helical Spear Type Fracture

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
13.1.4 General Guidance Notes

It should be noted that any torsion test performed relates only to the test piece and does
not guarantee the quality of the remaining length of wireline.
In the event of obtaining a Grade 2 or Grade 3 type fracture characteristics, two repeat
tests shall be performed. If the quality of a wireline is variable, it is permissible to cut off a
length (say 200ft) and re-test. Two re-tests should both give Grade 1 type fractures. This
procedure may, if necessary, be repeated since it is well known that the ductility of a
wireline deteriorates more rapidly at bottom hole temperatures.
13.2 EDDY CURRENT NDT

The Non Destructive Test (NDT) on slickline is carried out, and recorded, using an
industry accepted method termed the ‘Eddy Current Inspection Technique’ to locate
cracks, pittings, scratches and variation of diameter. It must be performed according to
the specification.
The first test must be recorded on all the wire length, at the time that it is first wound onto
the wireline winch drum. This test is used as a correlation log to help analyse future wire
examinations.
The test frequency is decided by the Wireline Superintendent and may be influenced by
the quantity and type of operations carried out and well environment. It is recommended
that this test is performed after operations where the pull on the wireline has exceeded
50% of the breaking strength and always after heavy jar action.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
14. WIRELINE ANGLE AND STRETCH CORRECTION FACTORS
14.1 LINE STRETCH CALCULATION

The load registered on the weight indicator of the wireline unit does not indicate the total
load exerted on the line.
If the angle between the wireline approaching and leaving the hay pulley is 90° then the
reading on the weight indicator will be correct except for any malfunctioning of the weight
indicator itself to (Refer to Figure 14-1).
If the angle between the wireline entering and exiting the hay pulley is less than 90° then
the reading on the weight indicator will be higher than the actual load on the line. Refer to
example #1.
If the angle between the line entering and exiting the hay pulley is more than 90° then
the reading on the weight indicator will be lower than the actual load on the line. Refer to
example #2.
Using the table and formulae provided, the actual (resultant) load on the line can be
calculated prior to wireline operations (Refer to examples #1 and #2).
Figure 14-1 - Wireline Angle Correction

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Included Angle Correction Factor Included Angle Correction Factor

40 1.87938 92 1.38932
42 1.86716 94 1.36400
44 1.85436 96 1.33826
46 1.84100 98 1.31212
48 1.82708 100 1.20362
50 1.81262 102 1.7556
52 1.79758 104 1.4716
54 1.78202 106 1.11838
56 1.76590 108 1.08928
58 1.74924 110 1.05984
60 1.73206 112 1.03008
62 1.71434 114 1.0000
64 1.69610 116 0.96962
66 1.67734 118 0.93894
68 1.65808 120 0.90798
70 1.63830 122 0.87674
72 1.61804 124 0.84524
74 1.59726 126 0.81348
76 1.57602 128 0.78146
78 1.55430 130 0.84542
80 1.53208 132 0.81348
82 1.50942 134 0.78146
84 1.48626 136 0.74922
86 1.46270 138 0.71674
88 1.43868 140 0.68404
90 1.4.1422 142 0.65114
Table 14-a- Wireline Angle Correction Factors
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
a) Example #1
Angles below 90° means the weight indicator dial reads higher than actual resultant force.
e.g. Angle between entry and exit line
= 70°
Pull on line 1,000lbs.
= 1,000 x 1.63830 (factor for 70°
from table 14-a) ÷ 1.41422 (factor for
90° from table 14-a)
1.63830
= 1,000 x 1.41422
= 1,000 x 1.158
= 1,158lbs WT indicator reads 1,158
when resultant is 1,000lbs at 70°
Angle above 90° then weight indicator
dial reads lower than actual resultant.
b) Example 2
e.g. Angle between entry and exit line
= 110°
Pull on line 1,000lbs.
= 1,000 x 1.14716 (factor for 110°
from table 14-a) ÷ 1.41422 (factor for 90o
table 14-a)
1.14716
= 1,000 x 1.41422
= 811lbs.
WT indicator reads 811lbs when
resultant is 1,000lbs at 110°
Figure 14-2- Examples 1 and 2
To interpolate odd number angles not given in the following chart, calculate according to
above formulae the resultant of the angle for one degree less and one degree more than
the angle desired by splitting the difference. (Figures provided by Martin Decker)
14.2 CALCULATION OF LINE STRETCH

The stretch in the wireline is the length of line in the well multiplied by the average of the
stretch in the first and last foot length. Although during regular wireline operations the line
stretch is seldom considered, it may become necessary, e.g. during slick line logging, to
know this to calculate the actual tool-depth.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
The stretch factor for 0.108ins wireline, shown below, has been calculated using the
typical modular values from the manufacturer.
Size Modular value Weight/1,000ft

API 9A 0.092 6.9 x 10-5 22.65lbs
0.108 4.9 x 10-5 31.11lbs
0.125 3.7 x 10-5 41.80lbs
SUPA 75 0.092 7.8 x 10-5 23.40lbs
0.108 5.7 x 10-5 32.10lbs
0.125 4.3 x 10-5 43.20lbs
Table 14-b - 0.108ins Wireline Stretch Factors
The total line stretch can be worked out by using the following formula:
[F(Wt) + F(Wt + Wl)] x L
Total stretch = 2
Where total stretch is in inches:

F = Stretch factor, inches/foot/lbs (0.108ins = 4.9 x 10-5)
Wt = Weight of toolstring (lbs)
WI = Weight of wireline in well (lbs)
L = Length of line in well (ft)
Example: 0.108 inch API-9A wire, length 10,000ft

31.11 lbs
Nominal weight =
1,000 ft
so:
WI = 311.1lbs
F = 4.9 x 10-5
Say tool weight Wt = 200lbs
Total stretch:
[(4.9 x 10 - 5 x 200) + 4.9 x 10 - 5 (200 + 311.1)] x 10,000
=
2
[(0.0098 + 0.025)] x 1,000

=
2
= 174 ins
Note: It is assumed that there is no temperature variation.

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
15. WIRELINE EQUIPMENT NDT PROCEDURES
The wireline system is defined as the package required to conduct wireline operations on
a well and includes the winch, power pack, pressure control equipment and all other
relevant auxiliary equipment.
All surface equipment and the wireline cable must have a series of periodical non-
destructive tests (NDT) carried out upon it according to the procedures described in the
following sections and in accordance with the schedules provided.
A visual inspection must be conducted periodically on all the equipment before each
pressure test. The visual inspections are described in section 15.2.
Hydraulic pressure tests must be carried out periodically on all the equipment with water
in a proper approved test facility. All tests must be carried out twice and recorded on a
chart recorder.
Radiographic, magnetic (Magnaflux™) and ultrasonic examinations must be carried out
only by specialised contractors listed on the Company’s vendor list.
A copy of the current certificate (i.e. the record of the last hydraulic test and the last non-
destructive examination) must be attached to the all surface equipment.
All the surface equipment must be marked with a unique identification code on an
alphanumeric nameplate, from which it must be possible to identify the equipment
number, working pressure, type of material and type of service.
The Wireline Supervisor (if applicable) and the Contractor’s Quality Assurance Manager,
or his appointed delegate, are responsible for the registration of the tests and for the
correct procedures to be followed.
All the tests performed on every single item of the surface equipment must be recorded in
the Test Register.
The register must record the procedure and the time/date of the tests on the following
report forms:
• NDT Visual Inspection Report (Figure 15-1)
• NDT Test Pressure BOP Report
• NDT Test Pressure Lubricator Equipment Report
• NDT Magnetic/ Ultrasonic Examination Report
• NDT Radiographic Examination Report.
15.1 SURFACE EQUIPMENT TEST SCHEDULES

The test frequency schedules given in the following sub-sections are for all equipment
from 5,000 through 20,000psi WP.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
15.1.1 Stuffing Box

• A visual inspection must be carried out every 12 months as per section
15.2.1.
• A pressure test must be recorded every 12 months as per section
15.2.2.
• A body inspection should be performed with magnetic or ultrasonic
technique every 24 months as per section 15.2.4.
• A thread inspection should be performed, by the magnetic technique
with liquid dye penetration, every 24 months as per section 15.2.4.
• A weld inspection should be performed, by an ultrasonic or radiographic
technique, every 24 months as per section 15.2.5.
15.1.2 Safety Check Union

15.2.1.
15.2.2.
15.1.3 Injection Nipple

15.2.1.
15.2.2.
15.1.4 Lubricator (5,000 through 20,000psi WP)

15.2.1.
15.2.2.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1

15.1.5 BOPs
15.2.1.
15.2.2.
15.1.6 Adapter Flange

15.2.1.
15.2.2.
15.2 EQUIPMENT NDT PROCEDURES
15.2.1 Visual Inspection Procedure

The following inspection procedure must be performed before any pressure testing:
1) Visually inspect the internals of all assemblies to detect for grooving caused by wire
cutting, the presence of cuttings and measure the ID to detect for any thickness
reduction.
2) Visually inspect each quick union to check for damage of the thread, in particular on
the sealing surfaces and grooves.
3) Visually inspect the BOP with special attention taken to sealing surfaces, elastomer
condition and hydraulic connections.
4) Visually inspect the adapter flange the ring joint seats taking particular attention.
5) For each examined element, an ‘NDT Visual Inspection Report’ must be filled in
and carefully registered by the Eni E&P Wireline Superintendent (if applicable) or
the Contractor’s QA Manager.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
15.2.2 Lubricator Component Pressure Test Procedure

The pressure test procedure described herein is for the pressure containing lubricator
assembly equipment (adapter flange, lubricator sections/risers, stuffing box, safety check
union and injection nipple).
1) Pressurise the assembly using water up to the rated working pressure and hold
pressure for 15min.
2) Check for leaks and then bleed off the pressure.
3) Repeat the previous steps again.
4) After bleeding off the pressure, check the condition of the sealing elements.
5) All tests will be recorded on paper chart and/or on magnetic support and attached to
the Test Report.
6) For each examined component, the ‘NDT Report: Test Pressure Lubricator
Equipment’ must be filled in and carefully registered by the Company Wireline
Superintendent (if applicable) or by the Contractor QA Manager.
15.2.3 BOP Pressure Test Procedure

1) Pressurise the assembly with water up to the rated working pressure with the rams
open. Hold the pressure for 15min.
2) Check for leaks and then bleed off the pressure.
3) Repeat the previous steps.
4) Pressurise the assembly with water up to the rated working pressure with the rams
closed, pumping from well direction. Hold the pressure for 15min.
5) Repeat the previous steps.
6) After bleeding off the pressure, check the condition of the sealing elements.
7) All tests will be recorded on paper chart and/or on magnetic support and attached to
the Test Report.
8) For each examined component, the ‘NDT Report: Test Pressure BOP’ must be
filled in and carefully registered by the Company Wireline Superintendent (if
applicable) or by the Contractor QA Manager.
15.2.4 Magnetic/Ultrasonic Examination Procedure

This procedure is for Magnetic Particle Examination, Ultrasonic Examination and Liquid
Dye Penetrant Examination
1) These examinations will only be carried out by Eni E&P vendor listed companies.
2) The examination must be performed in accordance with written procedures
available for company verification. The procedures must be in compliance with the
requirements of EN/ISO standards
3) Prior to performing the examination, the surfaces to be tested shall be sandblasted;
sealing surfaces shall be carefully protected before sandblasting
4) For each component examined a ‘NDT Report: Magnetic/Ultrasonic
Examination’ must be filled in and the NDT Contractor report must be attached.
These documents must be registered by the Company Wireline Superintendent (if
applicable) or by the Contractor QA Manager.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
15.2.5 Radiographic Examination (X-Ray) Procedure

1) These examinations will only be carried out by Eni E&P vendor listed companies.
2) The examination will be carried out as per the ASME Section 5-2, and ASME 8 div.
1 appendix 6-UW 51 specifications.
3) For each component examined a ‘NDT Report: Radiographic Examination’ must be
filled in and the NDT Contractor’s report attached. These documents must be
registered by the Company Wireline Superintendent (if applicable) or by the
Contractor QA Manager.
15.2.6 Hardness Test Procedure
1) Hardness tests of the material must be included as part of the documentation for
each item.
2) The surface equipment for standard service manufactured from 80,000psi minimum
yield strength material must have at least a hardness value of 200 Brinnell. The
surface equipment for standard service manufactured from 110,000psi minimum
yield strength material must have a hardness value between 290 Brinnell (30
Rockwell C) and 341 Brinnell (36 Rockwell C).
3) The surface equipment for H2S rated service must have a hardness value not
higher than 22 Rockwell C.
15.3 NDT REPORT FORMS

The report forms overleaf should be used for the procedures detailed in the previous
sections.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
15.3.1 Visual Inspection Report
NDT REPORT TOOL CODE

Eni
E&P Division
VISUAL INSPECTION
DATE : TOOL DESCRIPTION :
PIPING
1) Internal Wire-Line caused indentions Yes No
2) Cuttings Yes No
3) Thickness decrease Yes No
Quantity in mm :
QUICK UNION
1) Female thread damage Yes No
2) Male thread damage Yes No
3) Female seal surface damage Yes No
4) Seal - Unit damage Yes No
5) Internal Wire-Line caused indentations Yes No
6) Cuttings Yes No
ADAPTER
1) Thread damage Yes No
2) Seal surface damage Yes No
3) Internal Wire-Line caused indentations Yes No
4) Cuttings Yes No
5) Ring - Joint seat damage Yes No
BOP
1) Internal Wire-Line caused indenations Yes No
2) Cuttings Yes No
3) Hydraulic connections damage Yes No
4) Rams Seal - Unit Acceptable Non Accept.
5) Pistons Seal - Unit Acceptable Non Accept.
Rapairing Job Performed :
TOOL ACCEPTED Yes No
Signature Signature
Figure 15-1 - NDT Visual Inspection Report

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
15.3.2 Pressure Test Report

Eni
E&P Division PRESSURE TEST
Lubricator Equipment
PRESSURE TEST PRESSURE TEST

( 1st Cycle ) ( 2nd Cycle )
Pressure Pressure
TIME Elapsed Time TIME Elapsed Time
Kg/cm2 Kg/cm2
Leaks Detected :
Seals condition at test end :
1)
2)
3)
Repairing Job Performed Reference Files
Signature Signature
Figure 15-2 - NDT Lubricator Component Pressure Test Report

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
15.3.3 BOP Pressure Test Report

Eni
E&P Division
PRESSURE TEST B.O.P.
RAMS OPEN RAMS OPEN

Pressure Pressure
Kg/cm2 Kg/cm2
RAMS CLOSED RAMS CLOSED

Pressure Pressure
Kg/cm2 Kg/cm2
Leaks detected :
Rams condition at test end :
Repairing Job Performed Reference Files
Signature Signature
Figure 15-3 - NDT BOP Pressure Test Report

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
15.3.4 Magnetic/Ultrasonic Examination Report
TOOL CODE
NDT REPORT
Eni MAGNETIC / ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION
E&P Division
ULTRASONIC INSPECTION
INTERNAL LENGTHWISE
EXTERNAL CROSSWISE
THICKNESS
MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION
INTERNAL PIN
EXTERNAL BOX
BOROSCOPE CONTROL
OTHER CONTROLS
Defect Detected :
Contractor : Report n° :
Ticket n° :
Signature Signature
Figure 15-4 - NDT Magnetic/Ultrasonic Test Report

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
15.3.5 Radiographic Examination Report

Eni
E&P Division RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION
TEST EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION :
RECORDING SITE :
SAFETY EQUIPMENT :
Welding n° Accepted
Position Not Accepted
Defect Detectedi :
Contractor : Report n° :
Ticket n° :
Signature Signature
Figure 15-5 - NDT Radiographic Test Report

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
15.4 FIELD TESTS

Before the rig up of surface equipment a visual inspection must be performed as per
following procedure:
1) Visually inspect the internal surface of all the lubricator components to ensure that
there is no grooving due to the wireline cable, there are no shavings and verify
there is no thickness reduction. This visual inspection must take place before any
pressure tests.
2) Visually inspect each quick union to observe for any thread, seal surfaces or groove
damage.
3) Visually inspect the BOP with particular attention to the seal surfaces, condition of
the elastomeric seals and hydraulic connections. This visual inspection must also
be carried out before the pressure tests.
4) Visually inspect the adapter flange, taking particular attention to the ring joint seats.
15.4.2 Pressure Test Procedure
Primary Pressure Test

The Company Representative is responsible for the pressure test procedure being carried
out on the lubricator equipment and the BOP functional test before use on the well. This
is carried out after rigging up on the well in order to test all the connections.
Note: The BOP should be function and pressure tested on the deck before
rigging up including a pressure test against the rams.
Pressure testing may be carried out via a line directly onto the lubricator or through the
Xmas tree kill wing, if applicable.
1) After completing rigging up with the toolstring in the lubricator and the Xmas tree
valves closed, connect the test pump to the lubricator.
2) With the lubricator bleed off valve open and the stuffing box packing de-energised,
pump water (dosed with glycol if hydrate formation is a risk) and fill the lubricator.
3) Close the bleed off valve and energise the stuffing box.
4) Slowly bring the pump pressure up to the test pressure according to the well
programme but never to exceed the lubricator assembly WP (which is the WP of the
lowest rated component).
5) Hold the pressure for 10min observing that there is no leakage.
6) Bleed off the pressure, record the test in the daily report and begin well operations.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Subsequent Pressure Tests

Subsequent tests may be performed test using the well fluid pressure before making any
further runs.
The pressure test will be carried out as per the followings procedure:
1) With the lubricator installed and the bleed off valve closed, slowly open the swab
valve until pressure is observed on the gauge on the bleed off port. Stop the
opening the valve and allow the pressure to stabilise.
2) Verify the SITHP pressure on the gauge.
3) Check for any leaks on the adapter flanges, quick unions or stuffing box.
4) If there is no leakage, fully open the swab valve.
5) Continue with operations.
15.5 INSPECTION OF WIRELINE AND CABLE

Non Destructive Tests (NDT) must be recorded periodically on both wireline and cable in
order to verify if there is any wear, stress cracking, pitting or diameter variation. These
tests are fully described earlier in section 13.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
16. SAFETY
16.1 POLICY
It is the policy of the company to conduct world-wide operations in a manner to protect
the personnel, the environment and property, and which conforms to applicable legislative
requirements.
Although there is a company responsibility for safe operating practices, it is also
incumbent upon each employee or contractor also to work safely.
16.2 SAFETY AUDIT

A safety audit should be conducted for all well operations to ensure that the
documentation, procedures and equipment to be used is effective in achieving and
maintaining adequate levels of health and safety. The audit should identify all potential
hazards and be able to rectify any practical health and safety standards in line with the
company policy and legal requirements.
Safety audits should be drafted locally for each installation to comply with local legislation.
16.3 RISK ASSESSMENT

A risk assessment should be carried out for each operation to identify potential hazards
and estimate the extent of the risk from these hazards. With regard to wireline operations
this should include handling of the tools and equipment, rigging up procedure, the
equipment suitability, the specific well operation procedure, rigging down procedure, level
of exposure to toxic well fluids or chemicals provided and radioactive substances.
Any hazards identified should be weighted in the assessment to evaluate the level of risk
and prioritise appropriate preventive measures.
16.4 SAFETY TRAINING

To minimize the risk of personnel accidents, both Company and contract staff should be
trained to work safely. This training is aimed at personnel being able to conduct their work
competently and safely. If any crew are observed to have not had adequate training, this
should be immediately reported to the Wireline Supervisor for action to be instigated.
New staff should have received induction training which will make them aware of potential
hazards they may encounter on their first well site.
16.5 PERSONNEL SAFETY EQUIPMENT

All contract companies must supply their personnel with the adequate Personnel
Protective Equipment, (PPE: overall, helmet, safety boot, gloves, safety glasses,
soundproof headset). This equipment must be up to normal company standards and as
per contract.
Any equipment required above this will be supplied by the company (Breathing Apparatus
sets, safety harness, etc.).
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
16.6 WIRELINE UNIT SAFETY EQUIPMENT

The wireline unit shall be safely located and shall be properly secured to prevent
movement when the wireline tension is applied.
The equipment shall be: spark arresting exhaust silencer, explosion proof electric circuits,
foam extinguisher, explosive mixture and toxic gas detector, use of no spark-making
tools.
The power pack shall be positioned and only operated in areas designated as safe, in
accordance with IP ‘Moral Code of Safe Practices in the Petroleum Industry’ which
classifies areas as:
• Zone 0.
In which a flammable atmosphere is continuously present, or for long
periods (more than 1,000 hours per year).
• Zone 1.
In which a flammable atmosphere is likely to occur in normal operation
(about 10 to 1,000 hours per year).
• Zone 2.
In which a flammable atmosphere is not likely to occur in normal
operation, and if it occurs will exist only for a short period (less than
10hrs per year).
The wireline unit must be properly guarded to prevent personnel injury.

Lubricator equipment must be properly tested (NDT) and certified in accordance with
section 15.2. Lifting tackle must also be properly certified and attached to the lifting points
provided on the equipment.
The operator must check the unit and the tools regularly to ensure they are in good
operating condition according to the manufacturer’s instructions, especially:
a) Hydraulic hoses and connections.
b) Power pack oil and fuel levels daily as well as leaks.
c) Shut-down systems should be tested before using the unit.
d) The wire must be tested before use with a torsion tester, refer to section 13.1.
e) Ensure all guards are in place and secured before using the unit.
16.7 OPERATIONAL SAFETY
16.7.1 General
Wireline operations are potentially hazardous in not conducted by trained personnel with
suitable well maintained equipment. The following operation safety points should be
adhered to:
a) Personnel must wear mandatory safety gear when working with wireline
equipment and tools. This safety wear includes; safety boots, hard hat,
coveralls, gloves, eye protection.
b) If H2S is present, the crew must be specifically trained in the local H2S
procedures.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
c) Safe access must be made available to the top of the Xmas tree. Personnel
must not climb up the tree.
d) Adequate lighting must be provided for work in the dark.
e) All hand tools must be kept in good condition. Anti-sparking tools must be
supplied.
f) For operations on rig, barriers are necessary and use of safety belts for work
floors higher than 1.5m or more from ground floor.
g) Ear defenders must be worn whenever local regulations on noise levels are
reached or if the operator deems it necessary. As a rule of thumb, ear
protection should be worn if it is necessary to shout to be heard.
h) The handling of chemicals must be in accordance to local Control of Exposure
to Hazardous Substances Regulations.
16.7.2 Site Safety

a) Escape routes from the Xmas tree must be available and clearly marked or
roped off.
b) The winch must always be secured to the ground or deck.
c) Adequate lifting equipment must be available for the lifting of the lubricator
onto and off from the Xmas tree.
16.8 H2S PROCEDURES

Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) or sour gas can be found at any work site or at any process
plant. It is formed by sulphate reducing bacteria in oil producing wells.
The safe working with H2S is controlled by COSHH regulations and within Eni E&P, the
Company Health and Safety System.
16.8.1 General H2S Guidelines

a) Prior to commencing operations, all personnel should have received the
training laid out under the company guidelines, as detailed in the Health and
Safety System. Trainees must never be allowed to work on H2S sites.
b) Warning signs should be posted and all areas effected roped off.
c) Only essential personnel should be within the work area.
d) If an H2S leak is suspected or confirmed and cannot be contained
immediately, then persons in areas and follow the emergency procedures.
e) Never enter or work in an enclosed space or area where there is an H2S risk
without wearing breathing apparatus.
f) Never work alone or be unsupervised by a person in a safe area within an
H2S hazardous area.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
16.8.2 Operational H2S Guidelines

a) All rig site personnel will generally be required to follow company procedures
and safety equipment.
b) All areas where potential danger of free H2S can be present should have
continuous gas monitoring taking place using either fixed or portable
monitors, with audible and visual alarms, activated whenever the
concentration of H2S in air exceeds 10ppm. All personnel should also wear
personnel H2S monitors.
c) All surface pressure control equipment should conform to NACE MR-01075
standards.
d) All wireline tools unsuitable for H2S service shall be plunged in a bath of
corrosion of corrosion inhibitor before being exposed to a H2S environment.
All landing nipples, subsurface devices and plugs shall be suitable for H2S
service.
e) Improved plough steel (IPS) wireline shall only be used in a H2S environment
(up to 50ppm in stream) in conjunction with corrosion inhibitor. In a H2S
environment above 50ppm. Consideration should be given to using
specialised wireline such as Bridon Supa 70 or similar.
f) When H2S is present all elastomer seals, including the packing of the stuffing
box, should be made of Viton.
g) Prior to operations commencing, a meeting with all parties concerned with
any operations during the wireline programme must be held to establish
hazardous areas, safe areas, escape routes, etc.
h) Where H2S levels are higher than 50ppm, then a ‘buddy’ system should be
implemented, i.e. where every operator must constantly in sight of another
person who can raise the alarm in case of an emergency.
i) A communication network is recommended (e.g. radios) between all crew
members is recommended.
Note: This may prove in-operable where personnel are masked up in BA

sets and also due to high noise levels in certain areas.
j) The wireline lubricator should be flushed from top to bottom with water to
absorb any H2S present prior to breaking the lubricator connection.
k) A Gas detector should be used to check for the presence of H2S prior to
breaking the lubricator connection.
16.8.3 Safety Recommendations

a) No H2S should be allowed to escape to atmosphere in a place where it can
accumulate and be dangerous.
b) If a leak develops, every effort should be made to stop the leak at once.
c) BA sets must be used in all operations where personnel might be in contact
with H2S, i.e. breaking the lubricator connection.
d) Adequate BA sets or equipment should be supplied to meet the requirements
of everyone working in the area.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
16.8.4 Emergency Procedure

When a H2S alarm is activated, the following procedures should be followed by rig site
personnel:
a) Obtain a BA set/escape mask and mask up immediately.
b) If it is obvious an equipment failure to atmosphere has occurred, the well
should be closed in immediately using the Surface Valve on the wellhead
Surface tree. If relevant, and safe to do so, the wireline valve should be used
as an alternative.
c) Warn all personnel in the area and leave immediately to a safe are upwind of
the incident.
d) The control room should be informed of the situation and/or H2S alarms
activated.
e) Upon safe to do so an investigation team should be formed to investigate the
leak. The team should comprise of at least two members with sufficient air
supply for 30min.
f) Once the source of the leak has been found then the appropriate remedial
action should be taken.
<10ppm Personal and portable H2S monitors to be

used in all hazards areas
10-50ppm Mask up with BA set for any operations
that vent gas
>50ppm BA set to be masked up and worn
continuously in hazardous areas
Table 16-a - H2S Level Equipment Requirements
16.9 CORROSIVE AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES

All wireline operations which require the use of corrosive or hazardous substances shall
be performed within the following general rules:
a) All persons involved in operations which require the use of corrosive or
hazardous substances shall be fully briefed on the procedures, precautions
and first aid procedures required.
b) The transport, handing and storage and use of any corrosive or hazardous
substance shall be carried out in accordance with the Health and Safety at
work Act and COSHH regulation chemical data sheet for that substance.
c) Protective clothing appropriate to the hazard shall be worn in accordance with
COSHH regulation chemical data sheets.
d) Corrosive and Hazardous substances shall be disposed of in a manner
appropriate to the hazard involved and in accordance with COSHH chemical
data sheets.
e) Any person exposed to a hazardous substance through inhalation, ingestion,
absorption through or in contact with shall receive first aid. Contaminated
clothing should be removed and treated and disposed of as appropriate.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
16.10 REPORTING OF SAFETY INCIDENTS

All safety incidents resulting in personnel accidents and dangerous occurrences must be
reported immediately according to local regulations and appropriate report forms.
The Wireline Superintendent is responsible for investigation of any such incidents and to
recommend preventative measures.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Appendix A - Report Forms

A.1. Initial Activity Report (ARPO 01)
INITIAL ACTIVITY WELL NAME
FIELD NAME
District/Affiliate Company REPORT
DATE: ARPO 01 Cost center
Permit/Concession N° Well Code
General Data Depth Above S.L . Joint venture

On shore Off shore Ground Level[m] AGIP: % %
Latitude: Water Depth [m] % %
Longitude Rotary Table Elev.[m] % %
Reference First Flange[m] Type of Operation

Rig Name Top housing [m]
Rig Type Reference Rig Program TD (Measured) [m]

Contractor Ref. Rig RKB - 1st Flange Program TD (Vertical) [m]
Rig Heading [°] Cellar Pit Rig Pump

Offset FROM the proposed location Depth [m] Manufacturer
Distance [m] Length [m] Type
Direction [°] Width [m]: Liner avaible [in]
Major Contractors
Type of Service Company Contract N° Type of Service Company Contract N°
Mud Logging
D. & C. Fluids
Cementation
Waste treatment
Operating Time Jack-up leg Penetration Supply Vessel for Positioning

Moving [gg:hh] Leg Air gap Penetration N° Name Horse Bollard pull
Positioning [hh:min] N° [m] [m] Power [t]
Anchorage [hh:min]
Rig-up [hh:min]
Delay [hh:min]
Lost-time Accidents [hh:min]
Rig Anchorage
Anchor Mooring Line Piggy Back Mooring Line Tension Operative Total
Bow Weight Length Weight Chain Cable [Tested] Tension Time
N° Angle Type & Manufacturer [t] Cable Chain N° [t] Length Ø Length Ø [t] [t] [hh:min]
[m] [m] [m] [mm] [m] [mm]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Note: Supervisor
Superintendent
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
A.2. Daily Report (ARPO 02)
DAILY REPORT WELL NAME
Completion - Work Over FIELD NAME

District/Affiliate Company
DATE: ARPO 02 Modified Cost center
Completion Work Over Well Code Report N° of
Rig Name Well Type RT Elevation [m]

Type of Rig Well Drilled On Ground Lelel / Water Depth [m]
Contractor Last Intervention Date RT - 1st flange [m]
Well Head BOP Type Ø w.p. [psi] Costs Daily Cumulative

Type Stack Rig
W.P. [psi] Diverter Service
Production casing Annular Materials
Ø nom. [inch] Annular Logistic
ID [inch] Upper Rams
Steel Grade Middle Rams Personnel Boarding Leaving
Thickness [lb/ft] Middle Rams Agip
Top [m] Middle Rams Rig
Bottom [m] Lower Rams Others
Top cmt [m] Last Test Total
From [hr] To [hr] OP. Code OPERATION DESCRIPTION
Operations at 07:00
Mud Situation Visc. [s/l] Mud in pits Additives Losses

Mud Type Cl- / O/W [g/l] Daily [m3]
Density [kg/l] pH / ES Progr. [m3]
Contractor Type of Service Working Stand by Arrived on Loc. Left Loc. Daily Service Cumulative Serv.
Hours Hours Date Hour Date Hour Cost Cost
Stock Quantity UM Stock Quantity UM Supervisor:

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
A.3. Wireline Report (ARPO 11)
WIRELINE REPORT WELL NAME
FIELD NAME
DATE: ARPO - 11 Cost center
SINGLE COMPLETION SELECTIVE SHORT STRING Well Code

DUAL COMPLETION LONG STRING
General Data Flanges
RKB Elevation @ m. Base Flange Tbg Spool Top Flange Ø Psi
Tubing Size OD Weight [lb/ft] @ m. Flowing Flange Ø Psi
Tubing Size OD Weight [lb/ft] @ m. Kill Line Flange Ø Psi
Tubing Shoe Ø @ m. BPV Type Ø
Packer data @ m.
@ m. Wellhead Pressure Check
Minimum I.D. String THP [Kg/cm2] CHP [Kg/cm2]
Previous Bottom Hole @ m. Annulus / P [Kg/cm2]
Annulus / P [Kg/cm2]
Request Operation Annulus / P [Kg/cm2]
POOL
Perforated Zones Open Hole
From [m] To [m]
Note
Operation Description
Situation After the Job

NO TOOLS IN HOLE SCSSV Actual Bottom Hole:
TSV BPV PLUG OTHER TOOLS Max Size Run in Hole Ø @m
Note Supervisor
Superintendent
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
A.4. Pressure And Temperature Survey Report (ARPO 12)
WELL NAME
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE
SURVEY REPORT FIELD NAME
DATE: ARPO - 12 Cost center
SINGLE COMPLETION SELECTIVE SHORT STRING Well Code

DUAL COMPLETION LONG STRING
General Data POOL
RKB Elevation @ m Base Flange Tbg Spool Perforated Zones Open Hole
Tubing Size OD Weight [lb/ft] @ m. From [m] To [m]
Tubing Size OD Weight [lb/ft] @ m.
Tubing Shoe Ø @ m.
Minimum I.D. String
Wellhead Pressure Check

Tbg Drifted with Size To [m] Last Depth

B.H. Sample
Survey Report
Well Status Well Status
SHUT IN Q. GAS [Sm3/gg] SHUT IN Q. GAS [Sm3/gg]

3
FLOWING Q. OIL [m /gg] FLOWING Q. OIL [m3/gg]
CHOKE SIZE Q. WATER [m3/gg] CHOKE SIZE Q. WATER [m3/gg]
Time M.D. T.V.D. Temp. Press. Gradient T.H.P. Time M.D. T.V.D. Temp. Press. Gradient T.H.P.
[hh:mm] [m] [m] [°C] [Kg/cm2] [Kg/cm2/m] [Kg/cm2] [1'] [m] [m] [°C] [Kg/cm2] [Kg/cm2/m] [Kg/cm2]
'Values Referred To D.W.T. - T.H.P. Gauge 'Values Referred To D.W.T. - T.H.P. Gauge
q @ [ g ] [ ] [ ] q @ [ g ] [ ] [ ]
Gas Gas
Density [g/l] Oil Density [g/l] Oil
Water Water
Element Type Element Type
Serial N° Last calibration Serial N° Last calibration
Work. pressure [kg/cm2] Work. Temperature [°C] Work. pressure [kg/cm2] Work. Temperature [°C]
Notes: Supervisor
Superintendent
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
A.5. Malfunction & Failure Report (FB-1)
MALFUNCTION & FAILURE REPORT

(FEED BACK REPORT 01)
District/Subsidiary
Report Date:______________________
Well Name: Well Code:
General Information
Contract No: Contract Type: Contractor:
Service/Supply:
Drilling Completion Workover Duration Dates of Failure: Distributed By:
RIG SITE
Description of Failure:
Drilling & Completions Company Man:

Adopted or Suggested Solution(s):
Contractor Contingency Measures:
Contractor Representative:
DISTRICT OR SUBSIDIARY NOTES:
Failure Classification Status Operations Manager:

Technical Normal
Management/Organisation Extreme Time Lost:
Safety/Quality Innovative
Adverse Estimated Cost of Failure:
MILAN HEAD OFFICE NOTES:
Analysis Code:
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
A.6. Contractor Evaluation (FB-2)
CONTRACTOR EVALUATION
(FEED BACK REPORT 02)
District/Subsidiary Report Date: _________________________

Well Name: Well Code:
General Information
Contract No.: Contract Type: Contractor:
Service/Supply: Distributed By:
R1 Technical Requirements
FB_01 REPORT REFERENCES
FB Report No.: Time Lost (Hr.Min): Economic Cost (€M):
Category Evaluation Score (0-9)
Suitability of Equipment and Materials
Compliance of Equipment and Materials to the Contract
Adequacy of Personnel
Meeting with Operational Programme Requirements
Meeting with Contract Operation Timings
Equipment Condition/Maintenance
R2 Management and Organisational Requirements
Availability of Equipment and Materials
Technical and Operational Support to Operations
Capability and Promptness to Operational Requests
R3 Safety and Quality Assurance Requirements
Meeting with the Contract Agreement DSS
Availability and Validity of Requested Certificates
Meeting with Contract Quality Assurance Terms
Event Support Documentation
Type of Subject: Issued By: Date:
Document:
Notes:
Failure Status Operations Manager Well Operations Manager

Normal Extreme Adverse Innovative
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Appendix B - ABBREVIATIONS
API American Petroleum Institute
BG Background Gas
BHA Bottom Hole Assembly
BHP Bottom Hole Pressure
BHT Bottom Hole temperature
BJ Blast Joint
BOP Blow Out Preventer
BPD Barrel Per Day
BPM Barrels Per Minute
BPV Back Pressure Valve
C/L Control Line
CCL Casing Collar Locator
CET Cement Evaluation Tool
CGR Condensate Gas Ratio
CMT Cement
CR Cement Retainer
CRA Corrosion Resistant Alloy
CSG Casing
DHSV Down Hole Safety Valve
DLS Dog Leg Severity
E/L Electric Line
ESD Electric Shut-Down System
ESP Electrical Submersible Pump
ETA Expected Arrival Time
FBHP Flowing Bottom Hole Pressure
FBHT Flowing Bottom Hole Temperature
FC Flow Coupling
FPI/BO Free Point Indicator/Back Off
FTHP Flowing Tubing Head Pressure
FTHT Flowing Tubing Head Temperature
GCT Guidance Continuous Tool
GLR Gas Liquid Ratio
GOC Gas Oil Contact
GOR Gas Oil Ratio
GP Gravel Pack
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
GPM Gallon (US) per Minute

GPS Global Positioning System
GR Gamma Ray
GSS Gyro Single Shot
HAZOP Hazard and Operability
HHP Hydraulic Horsepower
HP/HT High Pressure - High Temperature
HSI Horsepower per Square Inch
IADC International Association of Drilling Contractors
IBOP Inside Blow Out Preventer
ID Inside Diameter
IP Internal Pressure
L/D Lay Down
L/S Long String
LAT Lowest Astronomical Tide
LC 50 Lethal Concentration 50%
LCM Lost Circulation Materials
LCP Lower Circulation Position (GP)
LEL Lower Explosive Limit
LN Landing Nipple
LTA Lost Time Accident
LTT Lower Tell Table (GP)
M/D Martin Decker
M/U Make Up
MAASP Max Allowable Annular Surface Pressure
MD Measured Depth
MLH Mudline Hanger
MLS Mudline Suspension
MODU Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit
MOP Margin of Overpull
MPI Magnetic Particle Inspection
MSCL Modular Single Completion Land
MSL Mean Sea Level
MUT Make up Torque
MW Mud Weight
MWD Measurement While Drilling
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
N/D Nipple Down

N/U Nipple Up
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
NDT Non Destructive Test
OBM Oil Base Mud
OD Outside Diameter
OH Open Hole
OHGP Open Hole Gravel Packing
OIM Offshore Installation Manager
ORP Origin Reference Point
OWC Oil Water Contact
P&A Plugged & Abandoned
P/U Pick up
PBR Polished Bore Receptacle
PI Productivity Index
PKR Packer
PLT Production Logging Tool
POB Personnel On Board
POOH Pull Out Of Hole
PPB Pounds Per Barrel
PPG Pounds Per Gallon
ppm Part Per Million
PVT Pressure Volume Temperature
Q Flow Rate
Q/A Q/C Quality Assurance, Quality Control
R/D Rig Down
R/U Rug Up
RBP Retrievable Bridge Plug
RCP Reverse Circulating Position
RIH Run In Hole
RJ Ring Joint
RKB Rotary Kelly Bushing
ROV Remote Operated Vehicle
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
RPSP Reduced Pump Strokes
RT Rotary Table
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
S/N Serial Number

SBHP Static Bottom Hole Pressure
SBHT Static Bottom Hole Temperature
SCC Stress Corrosion Cracking
SDE Senior Drilling Engineer
SF Safety Factor
SG Specific Gravity
SICP Shut-in Casing Pressure
SIMOP Simultaneous Operations
SPM Stroke per Minute
SR Separation Ratio
SSC Sulphide Stress Cracking
TCP Tubing Conveyed Perforations
TD Total Depth
TFA Total Flow Area
TOC Top of Cement
TOL Top of Liner
TVD True Vertical Depth
TW Target Well
UAR Uncertainty Area Ratio
UR Under Reamer
VBR Variable Bore Rams (BOP)
VDL Variable Density Log
VSP Velocity Seismic Profile
W/L Wireline
WBM Water Base Mud
WC Water Cut
WOM Well Operations Manager
WOW Wait On Weather
WP Working Pressure
YP Yield Point
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0 1
Appendix C – BIBLIOGRAPHY
Eni E&P- Document Document code

Completion Design Manual STAP-P-1-M-7100
Other Eni E&P Documents STAP Code

Wireline Materials STAP M-1-M-4001
Wireline Sizes STAP- P-1-M-6066
International Standards
API Specification No 9A- Wireline

6 Slickline Operations

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

6 Slickline Operations

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

S P E O IDENTIFICATION CODE PAG 2 OF 302

2. RESPONSIBILITIES AND CREWING ......................................................................11

3. TOOLSTRING SELECTION .....................................................................................13

4. SURFACE EQUIPMENT SELECTION .....................................................................22

5. WIRE SELECTION ...................................................................................................31

5.4 Other Sheaves.......................................................................................................... 32

6. WIRELINE UNIT SELECTION..................................................................................34

8. WIRELINE RIG-UP/DOWN OPERATIONS ..............................................................43

9. GENERAL WIRELINE PROCEDURES ....................................................................76

9.3.2 With Memory Gauge.................................................................................................. 85

10. SPECIFIC FLOW CONTROL PROCEDURES .........................................................175

10.4.3 ‘X’ Running Procedure.............................................................................................. 186

11. WIRELINE PROBLEMS ...........................................................................................209

11.4.1 Standard Well Site Inventory Of Fishing Tools...................................................... 215

12. TOOLSTRING WEIGHT FOR FLOWING WELLS ...................................................253

13. WIRELINE TESTING ................................................................................................265

14. WIRELINE ANGLE AND STRETCH CORRECTION FACTORS .............................270

15. WIRELINE EQUIPMENT NDT PROCEDURES........................................................274

15.1.4 Lubricator (5,000 through 20,000psi WP) ............................................................... 275

16. SAFETY ....................................................................................................................286

APPENDIX A - REPORT FORMS.....................................................................................292

A.6. Contractor Evaluation (FB-2) .................................................................................. 297

APPENDIX B - ABBREVIATIONS ....................................................................................298

APPENDIX C – BIBLIOGRAPHY .....................................................................................302

1.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL

1.3 UPDATING, AMENDMENT, CONTROL & DEROGATION

1.4 DOCUMENTATION AND APPROVAL

2. RESPONSIBILITIES AND CREWING

2.1 PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES

2.2.1 Light Duty Operations

2.2.2 Heavy Duty Operations

3.2 ASSEMBLY SELECTION

3.2.1 Rope Socket

Mechanical Up-stroke Jar (Spring Type)

Hydro-Mechanical Up-stroke Jar (Spring Type)

3.2.4 Knuckle Joints

Figure 3-9 - Knuckle Joint

3.2.5 Types Of Connections

4. SURFACE EQUIPMENT SELECTION

4.1 LIFTING EQUIPMENT

4.1.2 Lifting Frame

4.1.3 Hydraulic Mast

4.2 ADAPTER FLANGE

Figure 4-1 - Typical Adapter Flange

4.4 LUBRICATOR RISER

Working Pressure Seal Type

Figure 4-2 - Typical Lubricator Section (Lower)

4.5 STUFFING BOX

Figure 4-3 - Typical Stuffing Boxes

4.6 INJECTION NIPPLE

Figure 4-4 - Typical Injection Sub

4.7 SAFETY CHECK UNION

Figure 4-5 - Safety Check Union

4.8 SWAB VALVE

5.1 WIRE DIAMETERS

Company standardises on the use of only the last three sizes.

5.3 ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

5.3.1 Counter Wheel

d = Wire Diameter, ins

Rm = Tensile strength, psi

Figure 5-1 - Measuring Wheel

5.4 OTHER SHEAVES

5.5 COATED WIRE LINE CABLE

Figure 5-2 - Coated Wireline